2012 Honda Accord Crosstour

Main Menu 2012 Crosstour Online Reference Owner's Manual
Owner’s Identification
OWNER This owner’s manual should be considered

a permanent part of the vehicle and should
remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
This owner’s manual covers all models of

ADDRESS the Crosstour. You may find descriptions of
STREET equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
Images throughout this owner’s manual

CITY STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY ZIP CODE/ (including the front cover) represent
POSTAL CODE features and equipment that are available on
V. I. N. some, but not all, models. Your particular
model may not have some of these features.
DELIVERY DATE The information and specifications included
(Date sold to original retail purchaser) in this publication were in effect at the time
of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
DEALER NAME DEALER NO. Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and
ADDRESS without incurring any obligation whatsoever.
STREET
POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN

AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez
CITY STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY ZIP CODE/ besoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur en
POSTAL CODE français, veuillez demander à votre
OWNER’S SIGNATURE concessionnaire de commander le
numéro de pièce 33TP6C20 .
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
Main Menu
Introduction
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2012 Crosstour was a wise investment. As you read this manual, you will
It will give you years of driving pleasure. find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to information is intended to help you
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and avoid damage to your vehicle, other
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so property, or the environment.
you can refer to it at any time.
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the Maintenance MinderTM shown in

the instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it
preserves your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in
mind that your dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many
systems unique to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction
and will be pleased to answer any questions and concerns.
i
Main Menu
Introduction
Event Data Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment
or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is
designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR
under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can
read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally required or with the
permission of the vehicle owner.
ii
Main Menu
Introduction
California Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
Service Diagnostic Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data
can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may
also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.
California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act

The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle may contain perchlorate materials − special
handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
iii
Main Menu
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others, You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
is very important. And operating this including:
vehicle safely is an important Safety Labels − on the vehicle.
responsibility. Safety Messages − preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
To help you make informed These signal words mean:
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
other information on labels and in HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
hurt you or others. HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
Of course, it is not practical or You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow

possible to warn you about all the instructions.
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must Safety Headings − such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
use your own good judgement. Safety Precautions.
Safety Section − such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
Instructions − how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information − please read it
carefully.
iv
Note: All page numbers referenced in this document are hyperlinked.
2012 Crosstour Online Reference Owner's Manual
Contents
Your Vehicle at a Glance (main controls) ................................................................................................ 3
Driver and Passenger Safety (seat belts, SRS, and child protection) ............................................................. 5
Instruments and Controls (indicators, gauges, dashboard, and steering column) ........................................... 53
Features (climate control, audio, steering wheel, security, cruise control, HomeLink , and other convenience items)............... 125
Before Driving (fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading) ........................................................................ 281
Driving (engine and transmission operation).......................................................................................... 299
Maintenance (minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage).................................................. 323
Taking Care of the Unexpected (flat tire, jump starting, overheating, and fuses) ......................................... 371
Technical Information (vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls)............................................... 399
Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada only) (warranty and contact information)................... 415
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) (how to order) ................................................................................... 419
Index ................................................................................................................................................. I
INDEX
Service Information Summary (fluid capacities and tire pressures) ................................................... last page
Owner's Identification
1
Main Menu
Overview of Contents
Contents Before Driving Technical Information

A convenient reference to the What gasoline to use, how to break- ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,
sections in this manual. in your new vehicle, and how to load and technical information.
luggage and other cargo.
Your Vehicle at a Glance Warranty and Customer
A quick reference to the main Driving Relations
controls in your vehicle. The proper way to start the engine, (U.S. and Canada only)
shift the transmission, and park; plus A summary of the warranties
Driver and Passenger Safety what you need to know if you’re covering your new vehicle, and how
Important information about the planning to tow a trailer. to contact us for any reason. Refer to
proper use and care of your vehicle’s your warranty manual for detailed
seat belts, an overview of the Maintenance information.
supplemental restraint system, and The Maintenance MinderTM shows
valuable information on how to you when you need to take your Authorized Manuals
protect children with child restraints. vehicle to the dealer for maintenance (U.S. only)
service. There is also a list of things How to order manuals and other
Instruments and Controls to check and instructions on how to technical literature.
Explains the purpose of each check them.
instrument panel indicator and gauge, Index
and how to use the controls on the Taking Care of the Unexpected
dashboard and steering column. This section covers several problems Service Information Summary
motorists sometimes experience, A summary of the information you
Features and details how to handle them. need when you pull up to the fuel
How to operate the climate control pump.
system, the audio system, and other
convenience features.
2
Main Menu
Your Vehicle at a Glance
MOONROOF SWITCH (P.110) HOMELINK BUTTONS＊ (P.249)

INSTRUMENT PANEL

INDICATORS (P.55) MIRROR CONTROL
GAUGES (P.63) AUTO BUTTON
DRIVER’S FRONT (P.104)
AIRBAG (P.9, 23) CLOCK (P.238)
DRIVING POSITION COMPASS＊ (P.242)
MEMORY SYSTEM PASSENGER’S
BUTTONS＊ (P.101) FRONT AIRBAG
(P.9, 23)
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P.105) CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
POWER DOOR LOCK (P.126)
MASTER SWITCH
(Unlocking Fuel Fill
Door)(P.80)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.106) (P.134)
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE AUTOMATIC
(P.287) TRANSMISSION
(P.302)
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS AUXILIARY INPUT JACK (P.236)

(P.114, 115) USB ADAPTER CABLE (P.161, 171, 211, 222)
Without navigation system is shown.
＊: If equipped
3
Main Menu
INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS WINDSHIELD PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROL (P.73) WIPERS/WASHERS (P.30)
BUTTONS (P.68) HAZARD WARNING
(P.246) BUTTON
(P.74)
HEADLIGHTS/
TURN SIGNALS/ CENTER DISPLAY＊3
FOG LIGHTS
(P.70, 73) REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER/
REMOTE AUDIO HEATED MIRROR
CONTROLS BUTTON
(P.234) (P.75/106)
VEHICLE STABILITY INTERFACE DIAL＊3

ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM (P.177)
OFF SWITCH
(P.312)
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/
BLUETOOTH ＊1
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
HANDSFREELINK HORN (P.75/106)
VOICE CONTROL
BUTTONS (P.253) SELECTOR KNOB＊2
STEERING WHEEL (P.135)
NAVIGATION SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
VOICE CONTROL (P.76) SEAT HEATER SWITCHES＊2
BUTTONS＊3 (P.100)
＊1 : To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
＊2 : If equipped
＊3 : Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.
4
Main Menu
Driver and Passenger Safety
This section gives you important Additional Information About All Children Should Sit in a
information about how to protect Your Seat Belts ........................ 18 Back Seat .................................. 34
yourself and your passengers. It Seat Belt System Components ... 18 The Passenger’s Front Airbag
shows you how to use seat belts. It Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 19 Can Pose Serious Risks .......... 34

explains how your airbags work. And Automatic Seat Belt If You Must Drive with Several
it tells you how to properly restrain Tensioners ................................ 19 Children .................................... 36
infants and children in your vehicle. Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 20 If a Child Requires Close
Additional Information About Attention ................................... 36
Your Airbags ............................ 21 Additional Safety Precautions .... 36
Airbag System Components ....... 21 Protecting Infants and
How Your Front Airbags Small Children.......................... 38
Important Safety Precautions .......... 6 Work.......................................... 23 Protecting Infants ........................ 38
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features........ 7 How Your Side Airbags Work.... 27 Protecting Small Children .......... 39
Seat Belts ........................................ 8 How Your Side Curtain Airbags Selecting a Child Seat ...................... 40
Airbags ............................................ 9 Work.......................................... 28 Installing a Child Seat ..................... 41
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 11 How the SRS Indicator Works ... 29 With LATCH ................................ 42
1. Close and Lock the Doors ...... 11 How the Side Airbag Off With a Lap/Shoulder Belt .......... 44
2. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 11 Indicator Works ....................... 30 With a Tether ............................... 46
3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............. 12 How the Passenger Airbag Off Protecting Larger Children ............ 47
4. Adjust the Head Restraints .... 13 Indicator Works ....................... 30 Checking Seat Belt Fit ................ 47
5. Fasten and Position the Airbag Service .............................. 31 Using a Booster Seat ................... 48
Seat Belts .............................. 14 Additional Safety Precautions .... 32 When Can a Larger Child Sit in
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting Protecting Children − General Front .......................................... 49
Position ................................. 15 Guidelines ................................. 33 Additional Safety Precautions .... 50
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 16 All Children Must Be Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 51
Additional Safety Precautions .... 17 Restrained ................................ 33 Safety Labels .................................... 52
5
Main Menu Table of Contents
Important Safety Precautions
You’ll find many safety (see pages 33 − 50 ). to the road, other vehicles and
recommendations throughout this pedestrians could lead to a crash.
section, and throughout this manual. Be Aware of Airbag Hazards Remember, situations can change
The recommendations on this page While airbags can save lives, they quickly, and only you can decide
are the ones we consider to be the can cause serious or fatal injuries to when it is safe to divert attention
most important. occupants who sit too close to them, away from driving.
or are not properly restrained.
Always Wear Your Seat Belt Infants, young children, and short Control Your Speed
A seat belt is your best protection in adults are at the greatest risk. Be Excessive speed is a major factor in
all types of collisions. Airbags are sure to follow all instructions and crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
designed to supplement seat belts, warnings in this manual. the higher the speed, the greater the
not replace them. So even though risk, but serious injuries can also
your vehicle is equipped with airbags, Don’t Drink and Drive occur at lower speeds. Never drive
make sure you and your passengers Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even faster than is safe for current
always wear your seat belts, and one drink can reduce your ability to conditions, regardless of the
wear them properly (see page 14 ). respond to changing conditions, and maximum speed posted.
your reaction time gets worse with
Restrain All Children every additional drink. So don’t drink Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
Children age 12 and under should and drive, and don’t let your friends Condition
ride properly restrained in a back drink and drive, either. Having a tire blowout or a
seat, not the front seat. Infants and mechanical failure can be extremely
small children should be restrained Pay Appropriate Attention to the hazardous. To reduce the possibility
in a child seat. Larger children Task of Driving Safely of such problems, check your tire
should use a booster seat and a lap/ Engaging in mobile phone pressures and condition frequently,
shoulder belt until they can use the conversation or other activities that and perform all regularly scheduled
belt properly without a booster seat keep you from paying close attention maintenance (see page 325 ).
6
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Your vehicle is equipped with many

(8) (6) (9) (3) (9) features that work together to
(12) protect you and your passengers
(10) (4) during a crash.

(7) (7) Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
(8) strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
(10) compartment, front and rear crush
zones, a collapsible steering column,
and tensioners that tighten the front
(11) seat belts in a crash.
However, you and your passengers

(1) Safety Cage can’t take full advantage of these
(2) Crush Zones features unless you remain sitting in
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints the correct position and always wear
(5) (5) Collapsible Steering Column your seat belts. In fact, some safety
(6) Seat Belts features can contribute to injuries if
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags they are not used properly.
(9) Side Curtain Airbags
(10) Door Locks The following pages explain how you
(11) Seat Belt Tensioners can take an active role in protecting
(2) (2) (12) Occupant Position Detection
(1) System (OPDS) Sensor yourself and your passengers.
7
Seat Belts Help keep you from being thrown

Your vehicle is equipped with seat against the inside of the vehicle
belts in all seating positions. Not wearing a seat belt properly and against other occupants.
increases the chance of serious
Your seat belt system also includes injury or death in a crash, even Keep you from being thrown out
an indicator on the instrument panel though your vehicle has airbags. of the vehicle.
and a beeper to remind you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts. Be sure you and your Help keep you in a good position
passengers always wear seat should the airbags ever deploy. A
Why Wear Seat Belts belts and wear them properly. good position reduces the risk of
Seat belts are the single most injury from an inflating airbag and
effective safety device for adults and allows you to get the best
larger children. (Infants and smaller When properly worn, seat belts: advantage from the airbag.
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.) Keep you connected to the vehicle Of course, seat belts cannot
so you can take advantage of the completely protect you in every
Not wearing a seat belt properly vehicle’s built-in safety features. crash. But in most cases, seat belts
increases the chance of serious can reduce your risk of serious
injury or death in a crash, even Help protect you in almost every injury.
though your vehicle has airbags. type of crash, including:
− frontal impacts What You Should Do:
In addition, most states and all − side impacts Always wear your seat belt, and
Canadian provinces and territories − rear impacts make sure you wear it properly.
require you to wear seat belts. − rollovers
8
Airbags

Your vehicle has a supplemental Your vehicle also has side airbags to impact. The side curtain airbags
restraint system (SRS) with front help protect the upper torso of the equipped in this vehicle are also
airbags to help protect the heads and driver or a front seat passenger designed to help reduce the
chests of the driver and a front seat during a moderate to severe side likelihood of partial and complete
passenger during a moderate to impact (see page 27 for more ejection of vehicle occupants
severe frontal collision (see page information on how your side airbags through side windows in crashes,
23 for more information on how work). particularly rollover crashes (see
your front airbags work). page 28 for additional information on
In addition, your vehicle has side how your side curtain airbags work).
curtain airbags to help protect the
heads of the driver and passengers
during a moderate-to-severe side CONTINUED
9
The most important things you need What you should do: Always wear The rest of this section gives more
to know about your airbags are: your seat belt properly, and sit detailed information about how you
upright and as far back from the can maximize your safety.
Airbags do not replace seat belts. steering wheel as possible while
They are designed to supplement allowing full control of the vehicle. A Remember, however, that no safety
the seat belts. front passenger should move their system can prevent all injuries or
seat as far back from the dashboard deaths that can occur in a severe
Airbags offer no protection in rear as possible. crash, even when seat belts are
collisions, or minor frontal or side properly worn and the airbags deploy.
collisions.
Airbags can pose serious hazards.

To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force. So
while airbags help save lives, they
can cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.
10
Protecting Adults and Teens
Introduction Locking the doors reduces the 2.Adjust the Front Seats
The following pages provide chance of someone being thrown out
instructions on how to properly of the vehicle during a crash, and it
protect the driver, adult passengers, helps prevent passengers from

and teenage children who are large accidentally opening a door and
enough and mature enough to drive falling out.
or ride in the front.
Locking the doors also helps prevent
See pages 33 − 50 for important an outsider from unexpectedly
guidelines on how to properly opening a door when you come to a
protect infants, small children, and stop.
larger children who ride in your
vehicle. See page 80 for how to lock the
doors, and page 60 for how the door
1.Close and Lock the Doors and tailgate open indicator works. Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the
After everyone has entered the rear as possible while allowing you to
vehicle, be sure the doors and the Your vehicle has a programmable maintain full control of the vehicle.
tailgate are closed and locked. auto door locking/unlocking feature. Have a front passenger adjust their
For more information, see page 81 . seat as far to the rear as possible.
Your vehicle has a door and
tailgate open indicator on
the instrument panel to indicate
when a specific door or the tailgate is
not tightly closed.
CONTINUED
11
If you sit too close to the steering 3.Adjust the Seat-Backs

wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front Sitting too close to a front
airbag, or by striking the steering airbag can result in serious
wheel or dashboard. injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport Always sit as far back from the
Canada recommend that drivers front airbags as possible.
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to See page 93 for how to adjust the
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the front seats.
steering wheel up and down, and in
and out (see page 76 ). Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
If you cannot get far enough away leaving ample space between your
from the steering wheel and still chest and the airbag cover in the
reach the controls, we recommend center of the steering wheel.
that you investigate whether some
type of adaptive equipment may help. Passengers with adjustable seat-
backs should also adjust their seat-
back to a comfortable, upright
position.
12
4.Adjust the Head Restraints
Reclining the seat-back too far Improperly positioning head

can result in serious injury or restraints reduces their

death in a crash. effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position, and sit well Make sure head restraints are
back in the seat. in place and positioned properly
before driving.
Reclining a seat-back so that the

shoulder part of the belt no longer Properly adjusted head restraints
rests against the occupant’s chest will help protect occupants from
reduces the protective capability of Adjust the driver’s head restraint so whiplash and other crash injuries.
the belt. It also increases the chance the center of the back of your head
of sliding under the belt in a crash rests against the center of the See page 94 for how to adjust the
and being seriously injured. The restraint. head restraints and how the driver’s
farther a seat-back is reclined, the and front passenger’s active head
greater the risk of injury. Have passengers adjust their head restraints work.
restraints properly as well. Taller
See page 93 for how to adjust the persons should adjust their restraint
seat-backs. as high as possible.
13
5.Fasten and Position the Seat This spreads the forces of a crash
Belts over the strongest bones in your
Insert the latch plate into the buckle, upper body.
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Check that
the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious Improperly positioning the seat
injuries in a crash. belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are

properly positioned before
driving.
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of If the seat belt touches or crosses
the belt so the lap part fits snugly. your neck, or if it crosses your arm
This lets your strong pelvic bones instead of your shoulder, you need to
take the force of a crash and reduces adjust the seat belt anchor height.
the chance of internal injuries.
If necessary, pull up on the belt again

to remove any slack, then check that
the belt rests across the center of
your chest and over your shoulder.
14
RELEASE BUTTON
Never place the shoulder portion of a 6.Maintain a Proper Sitting
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or Position
behind your back. This could cause After all occupants have adjusted
very serious injuries in a crash. their seats and head restraints, and

put on their seat belts, it is very
If a seat belt does not seem to work important that they continue to sit
properly, it may not protect the upright, well back in their seats, with
occupant in a crash. their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is safely parked and the
No one should sit in a seat with an engine is off.
inoperative seat belt. Using a seat
belt that is not working properly can Sitting improperly can increase the
result in serious injury or death. chance of injury during a crash. For
The front seats have adjustable seat Have your dealer check the belt as example, if an occupant slouches,
belt anchors. To adjust the height of soon as possible. lies down, turns sideways, sits
an anchor, press and hold the release forward, leans forward or sideways,
button and slide the anchor up or See page 18 for additional or puts one or both feet up, the
down as needed (it has four information about your seat belts chance of injury during a crash is
positions). and how to take care of them. greatly increased.
CONTINUED
15
In addition, an occupant who is out of Advice for Pregnant Women When driving, remember to sit
position in the front seat can be upright and adjust the seat as far
seriously or fatally injured in a crash back as possible while allowing full
by striking interior parts of the control of the vehicle. When riding
vehicle or being struck by an as a front passenger, adjust the seat
inflating front airbag. as far back as possible.
This will reduce the risk of injuries

to both you and your unborn child
Sitting improperly or out of that can be caused by a crash or an
position can result in serious inflating front airbag.
injury or death in a crash.
Each time you have a checkup, ask
Always sit upright, well back in your doctor if it’s okay for you to
the seat, with your feet on the If you are pregnant, the best way to drive.
floor. protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.
16
Additional Safety Precautions Do not put any accessories on seat Do not attach or place objects on
Never let passengers ride in the belts. Devices intended to improve the front airbag covers. Objects on
cargo area or on top of a folded- occupant comfort or reposition the the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
down back seat. If they do, they shoulder part of a seat belt can could interfere with the proper

could be very seriously injured in a reduce the protective capability of operation of the airbags or be
crash. the belt and increase the chance of propelled inside the vehicle and
serious injury in a crash. hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
Passengers should not stand up or
change seats while the vehicle is Do not place hard or sharp objects Do not attach hard objects on or
moving. A passenger who is not between yourself and a front near a door. If a side airbag or a
wearing a seat belt during a crash airbag. Carrying hard or sharp side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
or emergency stop can be thrown objects on your lap, or driving with holder or other hard object
against the inside of the vehicle, a pipe or other sharp object in attached on or near the door could
against other occupants, or out of your mouth, can result in injuries be propelled inside the vehicle and
the vehicle. if your front airbag inflates. hurt someone.
Two people should never use the Keep your hands and arms away Do not cover or replace front seat-
same seat belt. If they do, they from the airbag covers. If your back covers without consulting
could be very seriously injured in a hands or arms are close to an your dealer. Improperly replacing
crash. airbag cover, they could be injured or covering front seat-back covers
if the airbag inflates. can prevent your side airbags from
inflating during a side impact.
17
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components If a front passenger does not fasten If the indicator comes on or the
Your seat belt system includes lap/ their seat belt, the indicator will beeper sounds when the driver’s seat
shoulder belts in all seating positions. come on about 6 seconds after the belt is latched and there is no front
The front seat belts are also ignition switch is turned to the ON seat passenger and no items on the
equipped with automatic seat belt (II) position. front seat, something may be
tensioners. interfering with the monitoring
If either the driver or a front system. Look for and remove:
The seat belt system passenger does not fasten their seat
includes an indicator on the belt while driving, the beeper will Any items under the front
instrument panel and a beeper to sound and the indicator will flash passenger’s seat.
remind you and your passengers to again at regular intervals.
fasten your seat belts. Any object(s) hanging on the seat
When no one is sitting in the front or in the seat-back pocket.
This system monitors the front seat passenger’s seat, or a child or small
belts. If you turn the ignition switch adult is riding there, the indicator Any object(s) touching the rear of
to the ON (II) position before your should not come on and the beeper the seat-back.
seat belt is fastened, the beeper will should not sound.
sound and the indicator will flash. If If no obstructions are found, have
your seat belt is not fastened before your vehicle checked by a dealer.
the beeper stops, the indicator will
stop flashing but remain on.
18
Lap/Shoulder Belt All seat belts have an emergency Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The lap and shoulder belt goes over locking retractor. In normal driving,
your shoulder, across your chest, the retractor lets you move freely in
and across your hips. your seat while it keeps some

tension on the belt. During a collision
To fasten the belt, insert the latch or sudden stop, the retractor
plate into the buckle, then tug on the automatically locks the belt to help
belt to make sure the buckle is restrain your body.
latched (see page 14 for how to
properly position the belt). The seat belts in all positions except
the driver’s have a lockable retractor
To unlock the belt, press the red that must be activated to secure a
PRESS button on the buckle. Guide child seat (see page 44 ).
the belt across your body so that it
retracts completely. After exiting the If the shoulder part of the belt is For added protection, the front seat
vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the pulled all the way out, the lockable belts are equipped with automatic
way and will not get closed in the retractor will activate. The belt will seat belt tensioners. When activated,
door. retract, but it will not allow the the tensioners immediately tighten
passenger to move freely. the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in position.
To deactivate the lockable retractor,
unlatch the buckle and let the seat
belt fully retract. To refasten the
seat belt, pull it out only as far as
needed.
CONTINUED
19
The tensioners can be activated Seat Belt Maintenance of protection in a subsequent crash.
during a collision in which the front For safety, you should check the
airbags do not deploy. In this case, the condition of your seat belts regularly. The dealer should also inspect the
airbags would not be needed, but the anchors for damage and replace
additional restraint could be helpful. Pull each belt out fully, and look for them if needed. If the automatic seat
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check belt tensioners activate during a
If the tensioner is activated, the SRS that the latches work smoothly and crash, they must be replaced.
indicator comes on and the tensioner the belts retract easily. If a belt does
must be replaced. not retract easily, cleaning the belt
may correct the problem (see page
353 ). Any belt that is not in good Not checking or maintaining
condition or working properly will seat belts can result in serious
not provide good protection and injury or death if the seat belts
should be replaced as soon as do not work properly when
possible. needed.
Honda provides a limited warranty Check your seat belts regularly

on seat belts. See your Honda and have any problem
Warranty Information booklet for corrected as soon as possible.
details.
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,

you should have your dealer inspect
the belt, and replace it if necessary.
A belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
20
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag System Components
(2)
(13) (9) (8) (11)

(1) (14)
(8)
(5)
(1) Driver’s Front Airbag (3)

(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag (4)
(3) Control Unit/Rollover Sensor (5)
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(5) Side Airbags
(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor
(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors (6)
(8) Front Impact Sensors
(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(16)
(10) Side Impact Sensors (First)
(11) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensor (7)(12)
(12) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors Control Unit/ (15)
OPDS Sensors Control Unit
(13) SRS Indicator
(10)
(14) Side Curtain Airbags (4)
(15) Safing Sensor (14) (16)
(16) Side Impact Sensors (Second)
CONTINUED
21
Your airbag system includes: Automatic front seat belt A driver’s seat position sensor that
tensioners (see page 19 ). monitors the distance of the seat
Two SRS (supplemental restraint from the front airbag. If the seat is
system) front airbags. The driver’s Sensors that can detect a too far forward, the airbag will
airbag is stored in the center of moderate to severe front impact, inflate with less force (see page
the steering wheel; the front side impact, or if your vehicle is 25 ).
passenger’s airbag is stored in the about to rollover.
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS Weight sensors that monitor the
AIRBAG’’ (see page 23 ). Sensors that can detect whether a weight on the front passenger’s
child is in the passenger’s side seat. If the weight is about 65 lbs
Two side airbags, one for the airbag path and signal the control (29 kg) or less (the weight of an
driver and one for a front unit to turn the airbag off (see infant or small child), the
passenger. The airbags are stored page 28 ). passenger’s front airbag will be
in the outer edges of the seat- turned off (see page 26 ).
backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE Sensors that can detect whether
AIRBAG’’ (see page 27 ). the driver’s seat belt and the front A sophisticated electronic system
passenger’s seat belt are latched that continually monitors and
Two side curtain airbags, one for or unlatched (see page 18 ). records information about the
each side of the vehicle. The sensors, the control unit, the
airbags are stored in the ceiling A rollover sensor that can detect if airbag activators, the seat belt
above the side windows. The front your vehicle is about to roll over tensioners, and driver and front
and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE and signal the control unit to passenger seat belt use when the
CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page deploy both side curtain airbags ignition switch is in the ON (II)
28 ). (see page 29 ). position.
22
An indicator on the instrument How Your Front Airbags Work During a frontal crash, your seat belt
panel that alerts you to a possible restrains your lower body and torso,
problem with your airbag system and the front airbag helps protect
components or seat belt tensioners your head and chest.

(see pages 29 and 55 ).
Although both airbags normally
An indicator on the instrument inflate within a split second of each
panel that alerts you that the other, it is possible for only one
passenger’s side airbag has been airbag to deploy.
turned off (see page 30 ).
This can happen if the severity of a
An indicator on the dashboard that collision is at the margin, or
alerts you that the passenger’s threshold, that determines whether
front airbag has been turned off or not the airbags will deploy. In
(see page 30 ). If you ever have a moderate to such cases, the seat belt will provide
severe frontal collision, sensors will sufficient protection, and the
Emergency backup power in case detect the vehicle’s rapid supplemental protection offered by
your vehicle’s electrical system is deceleration. the airbag would be minimal.
disconnected in a crash.
If the rate of deceleration is high Only the driver’s airbag can deploy if
enough, the control unit will inflate there is no passenger in the front
the driver’s and front passenger’s seat, or if the advanced airbag
airbags, at the time and with the system has turned the passenger’s
force needed. airbag off (see page 25 ).
CONTINUED
23
After a crash, you may see what Dual-Stage, Multiple-Threshold

looks like smoke. This is actually Front Airbags (SRS)
powder from the airbag’s surface. Your vehicle is equipped with dual-
Although the powder is not harmful, stage, multiple-threshold front
people with respiratory problems airbags (SRS). During a frontal crash
may experience some temporary severe enough to cause one or both
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of front airbags to deploy, the airbags
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do can inflate at different rates,
so. depending on the severity of the
crash, whether or not the seat belts
are latched, and/or other factors.
Front airbags are designed to
supplement the seat belts to help
reduce the likelihood of head and
After inflating, the front airbags chest injuries in frontal crashes.
immediately deflate, so they won’t
interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
The total time for inflation and

deflation is one-tenth of a second, so
fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until
they see them lying in their laps.
24
Advanced Airbags Objects placed or pushed under The driver’s advanced front airbag
Your front airbags are also advanced the front passenger’s seat may system includes a seat position
airbags. The main purpose of this cause the sensor to malfunction, sensor under the seat. If the seat is
feature is to help prevent airbag- increasing the risk of injury in a too far forward, the airbag will

caused injuries to short drivers and crash. inflate with less force, regardless of
children or small-statured adults who the severity of the impact.
ride in front. Failure to follow these instructions
could damage the sensors or prevent
For both advanced airbags to work them from working properly.
properly:
Occupants must sit upright and

wear their seat belts properly.
Do not spill any liquids on or DRIVER’S

SEAT
under the seats, cover the sensors, POSITION
or put any objects or metal items SENSOR
under the front seats.
If there is a problem with the sensor,

the SRS indicator will come on, and
the airbag will inflate in the normal
manner regardless of the driver’s
seating position.
CONTINUED
25
Be aware that objects placed on the To ensure that the passenger’s

passenger’s seat can also cause the advanced front airbag system will
airbag to be turned off. work properly, do not do anything
that would increase or decrease the
When the passenger airbag gets weight on the front passenger’s seat.
turned off by the weight sensors, a This includes:
‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator in
the center of the dashboard comes A rear passenger pushing or
on (see page 30 ). pulling on the back of the front
PASSENGER’S passenger’s seat.
SEAT WEIGHT
SENSORS If the weight sensors detect there is
no passenger in the front seat, the Moving the front seat forcibly
airbag is automatically turned off. back against cargo on the seat or
The passenger’s advanced front However, the passenger airbag off floor behind it.
airbag system has weight sensors indicator in this situation will not
under the seat. Although Honda come on. Hanging heavy items on the front
does not encourage carrying an passenger seat, or placing heavy
infant or small child in front, if the items in the seat-back pocket.
sensors detect the weight of an
infant or small child (up to about 65 Moving the front seat or seat-back
lbs or 29 kg), the system will forcibly back against the folded
automatically turn the passenger’s rear seat.
front airbag off.
26
Also, make sure the floor mat How Your Side Airbags Work Only one airbag will deploy during a
behind the front passenger’s seat side impact. If the impact is on the
is properly positioned on the floor passenger’s side, the passenger’s
(see page 353 ). If it is not, the mat side airbag will deploy even if there

may interfere with the proper is no passenger.
operation of the front passenger’s
seat and its sensors. To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants
Back seat passengers should not should wear their seat belts and sit
wedge objects or intentionally upright and well back in their seats.
force their feet under the front
passenger seat.
If you ever have a moderate to

severe side impact, sensors will
detect rapid acceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag.
CONTINUED
27
Side Airbag Cutoff System If the side airbag off indicator comes How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff on (see page 30 ), have the Work
system designed primarily to protect passenger sit upright. Once the
a child riding in the front passenger’s passenger is out of the airbag’s
seat. deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
Although Honda does not encourage indicator will go out.
children to ride in front, if the
position sensors detect a child has There will be some delay between
leaned into the side airbag’s the moment the passenger moves
deployment path, the airbag will shut into or out of the airbag deployment
off. path and when the indicator comes
on or goes off.
The side airbag may also shut off if a SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
short adult leans sideways, or a A front seat passenger should not
larger adult slouches and leans use a cushion or another object as a In a Side Impact
sideways into the airbag’s backrest. It may prevent the cutoff In a moderate to severe side impact,
deployment path. system from working properly. sensors will detect rapid acceleration
and signal the control unit to
Objects placed on the front instantly inflate the side curtain
passenger seat can also cause the airbag and activate the seat belt
side airbag to be shut off. tensioner on the driver’s or the
passenger’s side of the vehicle.
28
If the impact is on the passenger’s How the SRS Indicator Works If you see any of these indications,
side, the passenger’s side curtain The SRS indicator alerts the airbag system components may
airbag will inflate even if there are no you to a potential problem not work properly when you need
occupants on that side of the vehicle. with your airbag system components. them.

In a Rollover When you turn the ignition switch to
If the rollover sensor detects your the ON (II) position, this indicator
vehicle is about to roll over, it signals comes on briefly then goes off. This Ignoring the SRS indicator can
the control unit, which immediately tells you the system is working result in serious injury or death
deploys both side curtain airbags and properly. if the airbag systems or
activates both front seat belt tensioners do not work properly.
tensioners. If the indicator comes on at any
The airbag on the passenger’s side other time, or does not come on at all, Have your vehicle checked by a
will deploy, even if there are no you should have the system checked dealer as soon as possible if
passengers on that side of the by your dealer. For example: the SRS indicator alerts you to
vehicle. a possible problem.
One or both side curtain airbags may If the SRS indicator does not come
inflate in a moderate to severe on after you turn the ignition
frontal collision which causes the switch to the ON (II) position.
front airbags to deploy.
To get the best protection from the If the indicator stays on after the
side curtain airbags, occupants engine starts.
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats. If the indicator comes on or
flashes on and off while you drive.
29
How the Side Airbag Off How the Passenger Airbag Off Be aware that objects placed on the
Indicator Works Indicator Works front seat can cause the indicator to
U.S. Canada come on.
If no weight is detected on the front

This indicator alerts you that the seat, the airbag will be automatically
passenger’s side airbag has been shut off. However, the indicator will
automatically shut off. It does not not come on.
mean there is a problem with your U.S. Canada
side airbags. The passenger airbag off indicator
may come on and off repeatedly if
When you turn the ignition switch to the total weight on the seat is near
the ON (II) position, the indicator the airbag cutoff threshold.
should come on briefly and then go PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
out (see page 57 ). If it doesn’t come If an adult or teenage passenger is
on, stays on, or comes on while This indicator alerts you that the riding in front, move the seat as far
driving without a passenger in the passenger’s front airbag has been to the rear as possible, and have the
front seat, have the system checked. shut off because weight sensors passenger sit upright and wear the
detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less seat belt properly.
(the weight of an infant or small
child) on the front passenger’s seat.
It does not mean there is a problem
with the airbag.
30
If the indicator comes on with no Airbag Service The SRS indicator alerts you to a
front seat passenger and no objects Your airbag systems are virtually problem. Take your vehicle to an
on the seat, or with an adult riding maintenance free, and there are no authorized dealer as soon as
there, something may be interfering parts you can safely service. possible. If you ignore this

with the weight sensors. Look for However, you must have your indication, your airbags may not
and remove: vehicle serviced if: operate properly.
Any items under the front An airbag ever inflates. Any airbag If your vehicle has a moderate to
passenger’s seat. that has deployed must be severe impact. Even if your
replaced along with the control airbags do not inflate, your dealer
Any object hanging on the seat or unit and other related parts. Any should inspect the driver’s seat
in the seat-back pocket. seat belt tensioner that activates position sensor, the front
must also be replaced. passenger’s weight sensors, the
Any object(s) touching the rear of front seat belt tensioners, and all
the seat-back. We recommend against the use of seat belts and their anchors worn
salvaged airbag system during a crash to make sure they
If no obstructions are found, have components, including the airbag, are operating properly.
your vehicle checked by a dealer as tensioners, sensors, and control
soon as possible. unit.
Do not try to remove or replace

any airbag by yourself. This must
be done by an authorized dealer or
a knowledgeable body shop.
31
Additional Safety Precautions Do not remove or modify a front

Do not attempt to deactivate your seat without consulting your
airbags. Together, airbags and dealer. This could make the
seat belts provide the best driver’s seat position sensor or the
protection. front passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective. If it is necessary to
Do not tamper with airbag remove or modify a front seat to
components or wiring for any accommodate a person with
reason. Tampering could cause disabilities, first contact Honda
the airbags to deploy, possibly Automobile Customer Service at
causing very serious injury. (800) 999-1009 in the US, or
Honda Customer Relations at 1-
Do not expose the front passenger’s 888-9-HONDA-9 in Canada.
seat-back to liquid. If water or
another liquid soaks into a seat-
back, it can prevent the side airbag
cutoff system from working
properly.
32
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
All Children Must Be Restrained

Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because Children who are unrestrained
they are either unrestrained or not or improperly restrained can be

properly restrained. In fact, traffic seriously injured or killed in a
collisions are the number one cause crash.
of death of children age 12 and
under. Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
To reduce the number of child restrained in a child seat. A
deaths and injuries, every state, larger child should be properly
Canadian province and territory restrained with a seat belt and
requires that infants and children be use a booster seat if necessary.
Children depend on adults to protect properly restrained when they ride in
them. However, despite their best a vehicle.
intentions, many adults do not know Larger children must be restrained
how to properly protect child Infants and small children must be with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
passengers. restrained in an approved child seat a booster seat until the seat belt fits
that is properly secured to the them properly (see pages 47 − 50 ).
If you have children, or ever need to vehicle (see pages 38 − 46 ).
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.
33
All Children Should Sit in a Back The Passenger’s Front Airbag Small Children
Seat Can Pose Serious Risks Placing a forward-facing child seat in
According to crash statistics, Front airbags have been designed to the front seat of a vehicle equipped
children of all ages and sizes are help protect adults in a moderate to with a passenger’s front airbag can
safer when they are restrained in a severe frontal collision. To do this, be hazardous. If the vehicle seat is
back seat. the passenger’s front airbag is quite too far forward, or the child’s head is
large, and it can inflate with enough thrown forward during a collision, an
The National Highway Traffic Safety force to cause very serious injuries. inflating front airbag can strike the
Administration and Transport child with enough force to kill or
Canada recommend that all children Even though your vehicle has an very seriously injure a small child.
aged 12 and under be properly advanced front airbag system that
restrained in a back seat. Some automatically turns the passenger’s Larger Children
states have laws restricting where front airbag off under certain Children who have outgrown child
children may ride. circumstances (see page 30 ), please seats are also at risk of being injured
follow these guidelines: or killed by an inflating passenger’s
Children who ride in back are less front airbag. Whenever possible,
likely to be injured by striking Infants larger children should sit in the back
interior vehicle parts during a Never put a rear-facing child seat in seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
collision or hard braking. Also, the front seat of a vehicle equipped be properly restrained with a seat
children cannot be injured by an with a passenger’s front airbag. If belt (see page 47 for important
inflating front airbag when they ride the airbag inflates, it can hit the back information about protecting larger
in the back. of the child seat with enough force children).
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.
34
To remind you of the passenger’s U.S. Models DASHBOARD

front airbag hazards, and that SUN VISORS
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has

warning labels on the dashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
Canadian Models
SUN VISORS
35
If You Must Drive with Several If a Child Requires Close Additional Safety Precautions
Children Attention Never hold an infant or child on
Your vehicle has a back seat where Many parents say they prefer to put your lap. If you are not wearing a
children can be properly restrained. an infant or a small child in the front seat belt in a crash, you could be
If you ever have to carry a group of passenger seat so they can watch the thrown forward and crush the
children, and a child must ride in child, or because the child requires child against the dashboard or a
front: attention. seat-back. If you are wearing a
seat belt, the child can be torn
Place the largest child in the front Placing a child in the front seat from your arms and be seriously
seat, provided the child is large exposes the child to hazards in a hurt or killed.
enough to wear the lap/shoulder frontal collision, and paying close
belt properly (see page 47 ). attention to a child distracts the Never put a seat belt over yourself
driver from the important tasks of and a child. During a crash, the
Move the vehicle seat as far to the driving, placing both of you at risk. belt could press deep into the child
rear as possible (see page 93 ). and cause serious or fatal injuries.
If a child requires close physical
Have the child sit upright and well attention or frequent visual Never let two children use the
back in the seat (see page 15 ). contact, we strongly recommend same seat belt. If they do, they
that another adult ride with the could be very seriously injured in a
Make sure the seat belt is properly child in a back seat. The back seat crash.
positioned and secured (see page is far safer for a child than the
14 ). front.
36
Make sure any unused seat belt Do not leave children alone in a Keep vehicle keys/remote
that a child can reach is buckled, vehicle. Leaving children without transmitters out of the reach of
the lockable retractor is activated, adult supervision is illegal in most children. Even very young
and the belt is fully retracted and states, Canadian provinces and children learn how to unlock

locked. If a child wraps a loose territories, and can be very vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
seat belt around their neck, they hazardous. switch, and open the tailgate,
can be seriously or fatally injured. which can lead to accidental injury
(See pages 44 and 45 for how to For example, infants and small or death.
activate and deactivate the children left in a vehicle on a hot
lockable retractor.) day can die from heatstroke. A
child left alone with the key in the
Use the childproof door locks to ignition switch can accidentally set
prevent children from opening the the vehicle in motion, possibly
rear doors. This can prevent injuring themselves or others.
children from accidentally falling
out (see page 87 ). Lock all doors and the tailgate
when your vehicle is not in use.
Children who play in vehicles can
accidentally get trapped inside.
Teach your children not to play in
or around vehicles.
37
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Infants Two types of seats may be used: a moving their seat as far back as
seat designed exclusively for infants, recommended, or from locking their
or a convertible seat used in the rear- seat-back in the desired position.
facing, reclining mode.
It could also interfere with proper
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in operation of the passenger’s
a forward-facing position. If placed advanced front airbag system.
facing forward, an infant could be
very seriously injured during a In any of these situations, we
frontal collision. strongly recommend that you install
the child seat directly behind the
Rear-facing Child Seat Placement front passenger’s seat, move the seat
A rear-facing child seat can be placed as far forward as needed, and leave it
in any seating position in the back unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get
Child Seat Type seat, but not in the front. Never put a a smaller rear-facing child seat.
An infant must be properly rear-facing child seat in the front
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining seat.
child seat until the child reaches the
seat maker’s weight or height limit If the passenger’s front airbag Placing a rear-facing child seat
for the seat, and the child is at least inflates, it can hit the back of the in the front seat can result in
one year old. child seat with enough force to kill or serious injury or death during a
seriously injure an infant. crash.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head, When properly installed, a rear- Always place a rear-facing child
neck, and back. facing child seat may prevent the seat in the back seat, not the
driver or a front passenger from front.
38
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Small Children and weight are appropriate for a Child Seat Placement
rear-facing seat. We strongly recommend placing a
forward-facing child seat in a back
Of the different seats available, we seat, not the front.

recommend those that have a five-
point harness system as shown. Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
We also recommend that a small with a passenger’s airbag can be
child use the child seat until the child hazardous. If the vehicle seat is too
reaches the weight or height limit far forward, or the child’s head is
for the seat. thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating airbag can strike the child
with enough force to cause very
serious or fatal injuries.
Child Seat Type
Many states, Canadian provinces and Even with advanced front airbags
territories allow a child one year of that automatically turn the
age or older who also meets the passenger’s front airbag off (see
minimum size and weight page 30 ), a back seat is the safest
requirements to transition from a place for a small child.
rear-facing child seat to a forward
facing seat. Know the requirements
where you are driving and follow the
child seat instructions. Many experts
recommend use of a rear-facing seat
up to age two, if the child’s height CONTINUED
39
Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat
If it is necessary to put a forward- Selecting a Child Seat In seating positions and vehicles not
facing child seat in the front, move Most child seats are LATCH- equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as compatible (Lower Anchors and compatible child seat can be installed
possible, and be sure the child seat is Tethers for CHildren). Some have a using the seat belt and a top tether
firmly secured to the vehicle and the rigid-type connector, while others for added security. This is because
child is properly strapped in the seat. have a flexible-type connector. Both all child seats are required to be
are equally easy to use. Some designed so that they can be secured
existing and previously owned child with a lap belt or the lap part of a
seats can only be installed using the lap/shoulder belt.
Placing a forward-facing child seat belt. Whichever type you
seat in the front seat can result choose, follow the child seat In addition, the child seat
in serious injury or death if the manufacturer’s use and care manufacturer may advise that a seat
front airbag inflates. instructions as well as the belt be used to attach a LATCH-
instructions in this manual. Proper compatible seat once a child reaches
If you must place a forward- installation is key to maximizing your a specified weight. Please read the
facing child seat in front, move child’s safety. child seat owner’s manual for proper
the vehicle seat as far back as installation instructions.
possible, and properly restrain
the child.
40
Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat
Important considerations when Installing a Child Seat movement can be expected and
selecting a child seat After selecting a proper child seat should not reduce the child seat’s
Make sure the child seat meets the and a good place to install the seat, effectiveness.
following three requirements: there are three main steps in

installing the seat: If the child seat is not secure, try
The child seat is the correct type installing it in a different seating
and size for the child. 1. Properly secure the child seat to position, or use a different style of
the vehicle. All child seats must be child seat that can be firmly secured.
The child seat is the correct type secured to the vehicle with the lap
for the seating position. part of a lap/shoulder belt or with 3. Secure the child in the child seat.
the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Make sure the child is properly
The child seat is compliant with Tethers for CHildren) system. A strapped in the child seat
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety child whose seat is not properly according to the child seat maker’s
Standard 213 or Canadian Motor secured to the vehicle can be instructions. A child who is not
Vehicle Safety Standard 213. endangered in a crash. properly secured in a child seat
can be seriously injured in a crash.
2. Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured. After installing a child The following pages provide
seat, push and pull the seat guidelines on how to properly install
forward and from side-to-side to a child seat. A forward-facing child
verify that it is secure. seat is used in all examples, but the
instructions are the same for rear-
A child seat secured with a seat belt facing child seats.
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, it does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side
41
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with BUTTON

LATCH
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) at the outer
rear seats.
The lower anchors are to be used

only with a child seat designed for
use with LATCH.
The location of each lower anchor is LOWER ANCHOR Rigid type

indicated by a small button above the
anchor point. To install a LATCH-compatible child 3. Place the child seat on the vehicle
seat: seat, then attach the seat to the
lower anchors according to the
1. Move the seat belt buckle or child seat maker’s instructions.
tongue away from the lower
anchors. Some LATCH-compatible seats
have a rigid-type connector as
2. Make sure there are no objects shown above.
near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
42
ANCHOR COVER 7. Attach the tether strap hook to the

tether anchor, then tighten the
strap as instructed by the child
seat maker.

If the tether strap is too long and
cannot be tightened firmly, find a
route where the strap can be
tightened securely.
8. Push and pull the child seat

forward and from side-to-side to
Flexible type ANCHOR TETHER STRAP HOOK verify that it is secure.
Other LATCH-compatible seats 5. Lift the head restraint (see page

have a flexible-type connector as 94 ), then route the tether strap
shown above. through the legs of the head
restraint and over the seat-back,
4. Whatever type you have, follow making sure the strap is not
the child seat maker’s instructions twisted.
for adjusting or tightening the fit.
6. Open the anchor cover.
43
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/

Shoulder Belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in

all seating positions except the
driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
1. With the child seat in the desired 2. To activate the lockable retractor,
seating position, route the belt slowly pull the shoulder part of the
through the child seat according belt all the way out until it stops,
to the seat maker’s instructions, then let the belt feed back into the
then insert the latch plate into the retractor.
buckle and remove any slack from
the lap portion of the belt. 3. After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked, and
you will need to repeat these steps.
44
To deactivate the lockable retractor

and remove a child seat, unlatch the
buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let
the belt fully retract.

4. After confirming that the belt is 5. Push and pull the child seat
locked, grab the shoulder part of forward and from side-to-side to
the belt near the buckle, and pull verify that it is secure enough to
up to remove any slack from the stay upright during normal driving
lap part of the belt. Remember, if maneuvers. If the child seat is not
the lap part of the belt is not tight, secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
the child seat will not be secure. retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
To remove slack, it may help to
put weight on the child seat, or
push on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.
45
Installing a Child Seat with a Using an Anchor

Tether
ANCHOR COVER Outer Position ANCHOR ANCHOR COVER
ANCHOR TETHER STRAP HOOK Center Position TETHER STRAP HOOK

TETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS
1. After properly securing the child For the center seat, lower the
A child seat with a tether can be seat (see page 44 ), lift the head head restraint, then route the
installed in any seating position in restraint, then route the tether tether strap over the head
the back seat, using one of the strap over the seat-back and restraint and seat-back.
anchorage points shown above. through the head restraint legs.
2. Open the anchor cover, then
Since a tether can provide additional attach the tether strap hook to the
security to the lap/shoulder belt anchor, making sure the strap is
installation, we recommend using a not twisted.
tether whenever one is required or
available. 3. Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
46
Protecting Larger Children
When a child reaches the Checking Seat Belt Fit

recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the Allowing a child age 12 or under
child should sit in a back seat on a to sit in front can result in injury

booster seat and wear the lap/ or death if the passenger’s front
shoulder belt. airbag inflates.
The following pages give If a child must ride in front,

instructions on how to check proper move the vehicle seat as far
seat belt fit, what kind of booster back as possible, use a booster
seat to use if one is needed, and seat if needed, have the child
important precautions for a child sit up properly and wear the
who must sit in front. seat belt properly.
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt

properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
1. Does the child sit all the way back

against the seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend

comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
CONTINUED
47
3. Does the shoulder belt cross Using a Booster Seat Some states, Canadian provinces and
between the child’s neck and arm? territories also require children to
use a booster seat until they reach a
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as given age or weight (e.g., 6 years or
possible, touching the child’s 60 lbs). Be sure to check current
thighs? laws in the states, provinces and
territories where you intend to drive.
5. Will the child be able to stay
seated like this for the whole trip? Booster seats can be high-back or
low-back. Whichever style you select,
If you answer yes to all these make sure the booster seat meets
questions, the child is ready to wear federal safety standards (see page
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If 40 ) and that you follow the booster
you answer no to any question, the seat maker’s instructions.
child needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-
facing child seat should ride in a If a child who uses a booster seat
back seat and use a booster seat must ride in front, move the vehicle
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them seat as far back as possible and be
properly without the booster. sure the child is wearing the seat
belt properly.
48
A child may continue using a booster When Can a Larger Child Sit in Of course, children vary widely. And
seat until the tops of their ears are Front while age may be one indicator of
even with the top of the vehicle’s or The National Highway Traffic Safety when a child can safely ride in front,
booster’s seat-back. A child of this Administration and Transport there are other important factors you

height should be tall enough to use Canada recommend that all children should consider.
the lap/shoulder belt without a age 12 and under be properly
booster seat. restrained in a back seat. Physical Size
Physically, a child must be large
If the passenger’s front airbag enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
inflates in a moderate to severe properly fit (see pages 14 and 47 ). If
frontal collision, the airbag can cause the seat belt does not fit properly,
serious injuries to a child who is with or without the child sitting on a
unrestrained, improperly restrained, booster seat, the child should not sit
sitting too close to the airbag, or out in front.
of position.
Maturity
A side airbag also poses risks. If any To safely ride in front, a child must
part of a larger child’s body is in the be able to follow the rules, including
path of a deploying side airbag, the sitting properly, and wearing the seat
child could receive possibly serious belt properly throughout a ride.
injuries.
CONTINUED
49
If you decide that a child can safely Additional Safety Precautions Do not put any accessories on a
ride up front, be sure to: Do not let a child wear a seat belt seat belt. Devices intended to
across the neck. This could result improve a child’s comfort or
Carefully read the owner’s manual, in serious neck injuries during a reposition the shoulder part of a
and make sure you understand all crash. seat belt can make the belt less
seat belt instructions and all safety effective and increase the chance
information. Do not let a child put the shoulder of serious injury in a crash.
part of a seat belt behind the back
Move the vehicle seat to the rear- or under the arm. This could
most position. cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
Have the child sit up straight, back chance that the child will slide
against the seat, and feet on or under the belt in a crash and be
near the floor. injured.
Check that the child’s seat belt is Two children should never use the
properly and securely positioned. same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
Supervise the child. Even mature crash.
children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
50
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains With the tailgate open, airflow can
carbon monoxide gas. Carbon pull exhaust gas into your vehicle’s
monoxide should not enter the Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. interior and create a hazardous
vehicle in normal driving if you Breathing it can cause condition. If you must drive with the

maintain your vehicle properly and unconsciousness and even kill tailgate open, open all the windows,
follow the information on this page. you. and set the climate control system as
shown below.
Have the exhaust system inspected Avoid any enclosed areas or
for leaks whenever: activities that expose you to If you must sit in your parked vehicle
carbon monoxide. with the engine running, even in an
The vehicle is raised for an oil unconfined area, adjust the climate
change. control system as follows:
High levels of carbon monoxide can
You notice a change in the sound collect rapidly in enclosed areas, 1. Select the fresh air mode.
of the exhaust. such as a garage. Do not run the 2. Select the mode.
engine with the garage door closed. 3. Set the fan speed to high.
The vehicle was in a collision that Even with the door open, run the 4. Set the temperature control to a
may have damaged the underside. engine only long enough to move the comfortable setting.
vehicle out of the garage.
51
Safety Labels
These labels are in the locations SUN VISORS

shown. They warn you of potential U.S. models Canadian models
hazards that could cause serious
injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard

to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label which may be
removed by the owner), contact your
dealer for a replacement.
DASHBOARD
DOORJAMBS
U.S. models only
U.S. models Canadian models
RADIATOR CAP
52
Main Menu
Instruments and Controls
This section gives information about Outside Temperature Head Restraints ........................... 94
the controls and displays that Indicator .................................... 65 Easy Fold-down 60/40 Split
contribute to the daily operation of Trip Meter .................................... 65 Rear Seatback .......................... 97
your vehicle. All the essential Check Fuel Cap Message ........... 66 Armrests ....................................... 99
controls are within easy reach. Maintenance MinderTM................ 66 Seat Heaters ................................... 100
Temperature Gauge .................... 66 Driving Position Memory

Fuel Gauge ................................... 66 System......................................... 101
Controls Near the Steering Mirrors ............................................ 104
Wheel ............................................ 67 Power Windows ............................. 106
Windshield Wipers and Washers .. 68 Moonroof ........................................ 110
Turn Signals and Headlights .......... 70 Parking Brake ................................ 112
Fog Lights......................................... 73 Interior Convenience Items .......... 113
Instrument Panel Brightness ......... 73 Beverage Holders ...................... 114
Hazard Warning Button .................. 74 Accessory Power Sockets......... 114
Rear Window Defogger .................. 75 Console Compartment .............. 115
Steering Wheel Adjustments ......... 76 Glove Box ................................... 116
Keys and Locks ................................ 77 Sunglasses Holder ..................... 117
Immobilizer System......................... 78 Sun Visors ................................... 117
Ignition Switch ................................. 79 Hidden Removable Utility
Door Locks ....................................... 80 Box .......................................... 118
Control Locations ............................ 54 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking.. 81 Floor Storage Compartments .. 119
Instrument Panel ............................. 55 Childproof Door Locks ............... 87 Vanity Mirror ............................. 120
Instrument Panel Indicators ........... 56 Remote Transmitter ........................ 87 Coat Hook ................................... 120
Gauges .............................................. 63 Tailgate ............................................. 91 Center Pockets........................... 120
Information Display..................... 64 Seats .................................................. 93 Interior Lights ................................ 121
Odometer ...................................... 64 Front Seat Power Adjustments .. 93
53
Control Locations
INSTRUMENT PANEL MOONROOF SWITCH (P.110) HOMELINK BUTTONS＊ (P.249)

INDICATORS (P.55) MIRROR CONTROL
GAUGES (P.63) AUTO BUTTON
(P.104)
DRIVING POSITION
MEMORY SYSTEM
BUTTONS＊ (P.101) CLOCK (P.238)
COMPASS＊ (P.242)
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P.105)
CLIMATE CONTROL
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
MASTER SWITCH (P.126)
(Unlocking Fuel Fill
Door) (P.80)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.106) (P.134)
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
(P.287) AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
(P.302)
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS AUXILIARY INPUT JACK (P.236)

(P.114, 115) USB ADAPTER CABLE (P.161, 171, 211, 222)
＊ : If equipped
54
Instrument Panel
DOOR AND TAILGATE OPEN INDICATOR (P.60) TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS) INDICATOR (P.59)
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR (P.61)
MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR (P.62) DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS INDICATOR (P.61)
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.61) PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.57)

CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.56, 386) LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P.60)
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR FOG LIGHT INDICATOR (P.62)
(P.56, 386)
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.62)
CRUISE CONTROL
MAIN INDICATOR
(P.62)
CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATOR
(P.62)
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (P.56, 387) LOW TIRE PRESSURE LOW FUEL INDICATOR
INDICATOR (P.59) (P.61)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.58) SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
(P.57) (ABS) INDICATOR (P.58)
VSA OFF INDICATOR (P.58)
SEAT BELT REMINDER SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
FUEL ECONOMY INDICATOR (P.59) INDICATOR (P.56) SYSTEM (SRS) INDICATOR (P.57)
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
55
Instrument Panel Indicators
The instrument panel has many If your front passenger does not Low Oil Pressure
indicators to give you important fasten their seat belt, the indicator Indicator
information about your vehicle. comes on about 6 seconds after the The engine can be severely damaged
ignition switch is turned to the ON if this indicator flashes or stays on
Seat Belt Reminder (II) position. when the engine is running. For
Indicator more information, see page 386 .
This indicator comes on when you If either of you do not fasten your
turn the ignition switch to the ON seat belt while driving, the beeper Charging System
(II) position. It reminds you and your will sound and the indicator will flash Indicator
passengers to fasten your seat belts. again at regular intervals. For more If this indicator comes on when the
A beeper also sounds if you have not information, see page 18 . engine is running, the battery is not
fastened your seat belt. being charged. For more information,
see page 386 .
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position before fastening Malfunction Indicator
your seat belt, the beeper sounds Lamp
and the indicator flashes. If you do See page 387 .
not fasten your seat belt before the
beeper stops, the indicator stops
flashing but remains on.
56
Parking Brake and Brake System Supplemental Restraint Side Airbag Off Indicator
Indicator System Indicator U.S. Canada
U.S. Canada This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. If it comes on at This indicator comes on briefly when
This indicator has two functions: any other time, it indicates a you turn the ignition switch to the

potential problem with your front ON (II) position. If it comes on at
1. It comes on when you turn the airbags. This indicator will also alert any other time, it indicates that the
ignition switch to the ON (II) you to a potential problem with your passenger’s side airbag has
position. It is a reminder to check airbag system components. For automatically shut off. For more
the parking brake. A beeper more information, see page 29 . information, see page 30 .
sounds if you drive with the
parking brake not fully released.
Driving with the parking brake not
fully released can damage the
brakes and tires.
2. If it remains on after you have

fully released the parking brake
while the engine is running, or if it
comes on while driving, there
could be a problem with the brake
system. For more information, see
page 388 .
57
Anti-lock Brake System Vehicle Stability Assist VSA OFF Indicator

(ABS) Indicator (VSA) System Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for This indicator normally comes on for It comes on as a reminder that you
a few seconds when you turn the a few seconds when you turn the have turned off the vehicle stability
ignition switch to the ON (II) ignition switch to the ON (II) assist (VSA) system.
position. If it comes on at any other position.
time, there is a problem with the This indicator normally comes on for
ABS. If this happens, have your It flashes when VSA is active (see a few seconds when you turn the
vehicle checked at a dealer. With page 311 ). ignition switch to the ON (II)
this indicator on, your vehicle still position. See page 311 for more
has normal braking ability but no If it comes on and stays on at any information on the VSA system.
anti-lock function. For more other time, there is a problem with
information, see page 309 . the VSA system. Take your vehicle
to a dealer to have it checked.
Without VSA, your vehicle still has
normal driving ability, but will not
have VSA traction and stability
enhancement. For more information,
see page 311 .
58
Low Tire Pressure Tire Pressure Monitoring Fuel Economy Indicator

Indicator System (TPMS) Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for This indicator normally comes on for While the engine is operating in its
a few seconds when you turn the a few seconds when you turn the most economical range, this
ignition switch to the ON (II) ignition switch to the ON (II) indicator may come on and stay on.
position. If it comes on while driving, position.

it indicates that one or more of your
vehicle’s tires are significantly low If this indicator comes on and stays
on pressure. on at any other time, or if it does not
come on when you turn the ignition
If this happens, pull to the side of the switch to the ON (II) position, there
road when it is safe, check which tire is a problem with the TPMS. With
has lost pressure, and determine the this indicator on, the low tire
cause. If it is because of a flat tire, pressure indicator will not come on
replace the flat tire with the compact when a tire loses pressure. Take the
spare (see page 373 ), and have the vehicle to your dealer to have the
flat tire repaired as soon as possible. system checked. For more
If two or more tires are underinflated, information, see page 313 .
call a professional towing service
(see page 397 ). For more
information, see page 313 .
59
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lights On Indicator Door and Tailgate Open Indicator
Indicators
This indicator reminds you that the DOOR OPEN INDICATORS
exterior lights are on. It comes on
The left or right turn signal indicator when the light switch is in either the
blinks when you signal a lane change or position. If you turn the
or turn. If an indicator does not blink ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
or blinks rapidly, it usually means (I) or the LOCK (0) position without
one of the turn signal bulbs is turning off the light switch, this
burned out (see pages 347 and 349 ). indicator will remain on. A reminder
Replace the bulb as soon as possible, chime will also sound when you open
since other drivers cannot see that the driver’s door.
you are signaling. TAILGATE OPEN INDICATOR
This indicator will also come on
When you press the hazard warning when the light switch is in AUTO The appropriate light comes on in
button, both turn signal indicators and the lights turn on automatically. this indicator if the tailgate or any
and all turn signals on the outside of door is not closed tightly.
the vehicle flash. All the lights in the indicator come
on for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
60
Low Fuel Indicator Security System Indicator High Beam Indicator
This indicator comes on as a SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR This indicator comes on with the
reminder that you must refuel soon. high beam headlights. For more
When the indicator comes on, there information, see page 70 .
are about 2.8 U.S. gal (10.5 ) on

2WD models and 2.5 U.S. gal (9.6 ) This indicator also comes on with
on 4WD models of fuel remaining in reduced brightness when the
the tank. daytime running lights (DRL) are on
(see page 72 ).
When the needle reaches E, there is
a very small amount of fuel in the Daytime Running Lights
tank. Indicator
If this indicator comes on when you
This indicator comes on when the turn the ignition switch to the ON
security system is set. See page (II) position and release the parking
241 for more information on the brake, it means there is a problem
security system. with the DRL. There may also be a
problem with the high beam
headlights. Have your vehicle
checked by your dealer.
61
Cruise Control Main Maintenance Minder Immobilizer System

Indicator Indicator Indicator
This indicator comes on when you This indicator comes on for a few This indicator comes on briefly when
turn on the cruise control system by seconds when you turn the ignition you turn the ignition switch to the
pressing the CRUISE button (see switch to the ON (II) position. It ON (II) position. It will then go off if
page 246 ). reminds you that it is time to take you have inserted a properly coded
your vehicle in for scheduled ignition key. If it is not a properly
Cruise Control Indicator maintenance. The maintenance main coded key, the indicator will blink,
items and sub items will be displayed and the engine’s fuel system will be
This indicator comes on when you in the information display. See page disabled (see page 78 ).
set the cruise control. See page 325 for more information on the
246 for information on operating the Maintenance MinderTM. Washer Level Indicator
cruise control.
This indicator goes off when your Canadian models only
Fog Light Indicator dealer resets it after completing the This indicator comes on when the
required maintenance service. washer fluid level is low. Add washer
This indicator comes on when you fluid when you see this indicator
turn on the fog lights. For more (see page 339 ).
62
Gauges
TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER

TEMPERATURE GAUGE FUEL GAUGE
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE INDICATOR TRIP METER SELECT/RESET KNOB
ODOMETER/CHECK FUEL CAP MESSAGE
INFORMATION DISPLAY
U.S. model is shown.
63
Gauges
: Press the SELECT/RESET knob. Odometer

The odometer shows the total
ODOMETER TRIP METER A distance your vehicle has been
driven. It measures miles in U.S.
models and kilometers in Canadian
models. It is illegal under U.S.
federal law and Canadian provincial/
OUTSIDE
territorial regulations to disconnect,
ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE reset, or alter the odometer with the
LIFE INDICATOR intent to change the number of miles
or kilometers indicated.
TRIP METER B
Information Display To switch the display, press and

The information display shows the release the select/reset knob
odometer, trip meter, engine oil life, repeatedly. When you turn the
outside temperature, and ignition switch to the ON (II)
maintenance item code(s). position, your last selection is
displayed.
64
Gauges
Outside Temperature Indicator it up to ±5°F in U.S. models (±3°C Trip Meter

This indicator displays the outside in Canadian models) warmer or The trip meter shows the number of
temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S. cooler. miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
models) or Celsius (Canadian driven since you last reset it.
models). To see the outside NOTE: The temperature must be
temperature, press and release the stabilized before doing this There are two trip meters: Trip A

select/reset knob until the procedure. and Trip B. Switch between these
temperature is displayed. displays by pressing the select/reset
Select the outside temperature knob repeatedly.
The temperature sensor is in the display, then press and hold the
front bumper. Therefore, the select/reset knob for 10 seconds. Each trip meter works independently,
temperature reading can be affected The following sequence will appear so you can keep track of two
by heat reflection from the road for 1 second each: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, −5, different distances.
surface, engine heat, and the −4, −3, −2, −1, 0 (U.S.) or 0, 1, 2,
exhaust from surrounding traffic. 3, −3, −2, −1, 0 (Canada). When you turn the ignition switch to
This can cause an incorrect the ON (II) position, your last
temperature reading when your When the temperature reaches the selection is displayed.
speed is under 19 mph (30 km/h). desired value, release the select/
reset knob. You should see the new To reset a trip meter, display it, and
The sensor delays the display update outside temperature displayed. then press and hold the select/reset
until it reaches the correct outside knob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.
temperature. This may take several In certain weather conditions,
minutes. temperature readings near freezing
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
If the outside temperature is forming on the road surface.
incorrectly displayed, you can adjust
65
Gauges
Check Fuel Cap Message Temperature Gauge Fuel Gauge

If your fuel fill cap is loose or This shows the temperature of the This shows how much fuel you have.
missing, a ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ engine’s coolant. During normal It may show slightly more or less
message appears on the information operation, the pointer should rise than the actual amount. The needle
display after you start the engine. from the bottom mark to about the returns to the bottom after you turn
For more information, see page 285 . middle of the gauge. In severe off the ignition.
driving conditions, such as very hot
Maintenance MinderTM weather or a long period of uphill
The information display in the driving, the pointer may rise to the
instrument panel shows you the upper zone. If it reaches the red Avoid driving with an extremely low
engine oil life and maintenance (hot) mark, pull safely to the side of f uel level. Running out of f uel could
service items when the ignition the road. Turn to page 384 for cause the engine to misf ire, damaging
switch is in the ON (II) position. This instructions and precautions on the catalytic converter.
information helps to keep you aware checking the engine cooling system.
of the periodic maintenance your
vehicle needs for continued trouble-
free driving. Refer to page 325 for
more information.
66
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS WINDSHIELD PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROL (P.73) WIPERS/WASHERS (P.30)
BUTTONS (P.68)
HAZARD WARNING
(P.246) BUTTON
HEADLIGHTS/ (P.74)
TURN SIGNALS/

FOG LIGHTS CENTER DISPLAY＊3
(P.70, 73)
REAR WINDOW
REMOTE AUDIO DEFOGGER/
CONTROLS HEATED MIRROR
(P.234) BUTTON
(P.75/106)
VEHICLE STABILITY INTERFACE DIAL＊3
ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM (P.177)
OFF SWITCH
(P.312) REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/
BLUETOOTH (P.75/106)
HANDSFREELINK
VOICE CONTROL HORN＊1 SELECTOR KNOB＊2
BUTTONS (P.253) (P.135)
STEERING WHEEL
NAVIGATION SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS SEAT HEATER SWITCHES＊2
VOICE CONTROL (P.76) (P.100)
BUTTONS＊3
＊1 : To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
＊2 : If equipped
＊3 : Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system, refer to the navigation system manual.
67
Windshield Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers Push the right lever up or down to LO − The wipers run at low speed.
select a position.
HI − The wipers run at high speed.
MIST − The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever. Windshield Washers − Pull the
wiper control lever toward you, and
OFF − The wipers are not activated. hold it. The washers spray until you
release the lever. The wipers run at
INT − The length of the wipe low speed, then complete one more
interval is varied automatically sweep after you release the lever.
according to vehicle’s speed.
ADJUSTMENT RING Vary the delay by turning the
adjustment ring. If you turn it to the
1. MIST shortest delay ( position), the
2. OFF wipers change to low speed
3. INT − Intermittent operation when the vehicle speed
4. LO − Low speed exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
5. HI − High speed
6. Windshield washers
68
Windshield Wipers and Washers
Rear Window Wiper and Washer 3. Hold past ON to activate the rear
window wiper a few times and to
spray the rear window washer.
4. Rotate the switch

counterclockwise also to spray the

window washer and turn the wiper
on.
When you shift the transmission to

the reverse position with the front
windshield wiper activated, the rear
wiper operates automatically even if
the rear wiper switch is off.
1. OFF
When you turn the wiper switch to The rear window washer uses the
the ‘‘OFF’’ position, the wiper will same fluid reservoir as the wind-
return to its parked position. shield washer.
2. Rotate the switch clockwise to

turn the rear window wiper ON.
The wiper operates every 7
seconds after completing two
sweeps.
69
Turn Signals and Headlights
Turn Signal − Push down on the When the light switch is in either of
left lever to signal a left turn and up these positions, the lights on
to signal a right turn. To signal a lane indicator comes on as a reminder.
change, push lightly on the lever and
hold it. The lever will return to the This indicator stays on if you leave
center when you release it or the lights on and turn the ignition
complete a turn. switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or
LOCK (0) position.
Headlights − Turning the switch to
the ‘‘ ’’ position turns on the High Beams − To switch from low
parking lights, taillights, instrument beams to high beams, push the left
panel lights, side-marker lights, and lever forward until you hear a click.
rear license plate lights. The blue high beam indicator will
1. Turn Signal come on (see page 61 ). Pull it back
2. OFF Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’ to return to low beams. To flash the
3. Parking and interior lights position turns on the headlights. high beams, pull the lever back
4. AUTO lightly, then release it. The high
5. Headlights on If you leave the lights on with the beams stay on as long as you hold
6. High Beams key removed from the ignition the lever back.
7. Flash high beams switch, you will hear a reminder
8. Fog lights off chime when you open the driver’s
9. Fog lights on door.
70
AUTO − The automatic lighting Even with the automatic lighting LIGHT SENSOR
feature turns on the headlights and feature turned on, we recommend
all other exterior lights, when it that you turn on the lights manually
senses low ambient light. when driving at night or in a dense
fog, or when you enter dark areas
To turn on automatic lighting, turn such as long tunnels or parking

the light switch to AUTO. The lights facilities.
will come on automatically when the
outside light level becomes low (at Do not leave the light switch in
dusk, for example). The lights on AUTO if you will not be driving the
indicator comes on as a reminder. vehicle for an extended period (a
The lights and indicator will turn off week or more). You should also turn
automatically when the system off the lights if you plan to leave the
senses high ambient light. engine idling or off for a long time. The automatic lighting feature is
controlled by a sensor located on top
The lights will remain on when you of the dashboard. Do not cover this
turn off the ignition switch. They will sensor or spill liquids on it.
turn off automatically when you
remove the key and open the driver’s
door. To turn them on again, either
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position or turn the light switch
to the position.
71
Automatic Lighting Off Feature If you remove the key from the Daytime Running Lights
This feature turns off the headlights, ignition switch with the headlight With the headlight switch off or in
all other exterior lights, and the switch on, but do not open the door, the position, the high beam
instrument panel lights within 15 the lights will turn off after 10 headlights and the high beam
seconds after you remove the key minutes. indicator come on with reduced
and close the driver’s door. brightness when you turn the
If you turn the ignition switch to the ignition switch to the ON (II)
The automatic lighting off feature LOCK (0) position with the lights position and release the parking
activates if you leave the headlight turned on by setting the switch in brake. They remain on until you turn
switch in the ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ the ‘‘AUTO’’ position, but do not the ignition switch off, even if you
position or if the lights are turned on open the door, the lights turn off set the parking brake.
by setting the switch in the ‘‘AUTO’’ after 3 minutes.
position, and you remove the key, The headlights revert to normal
then open and close the driver’s door. The lights will turn on again when operation when you turn them on
you unlock or open the driver’s door. with the switch.
If you unlock the door, but do not
open it within 15 seconds, the lights
will go off. With the driver’s door
open, you will hear a lights-on
reminder chime.
72
Fog Lights, Instrument Panel Brightness
Fog Lights You can use the fog lights only when Instrument Panel Brightness
the headlights are on low beam.
With the light switch in the AUTO
position, you can also use the fog
lights when the headlights turn on
automatically. They will go off when

the headlights turn off, or the
daytime running lights are on.
SELECT/RESET KNOB
Turn the fog lights on and off by The select/reset knob on the
turning the switch next to the instrument panel controls the
headlight switch. brightness of the instrument panel
lights. Turn the knob to adjust the
brightness with the ignition switch in
the ON (II) position and the parking
lights on.
CONTINUED
73
Instrument Panel Brightness, Hazard Warning Button
The instrument panel will illuminate Hazard Warning Button

with reduced brightness when you
unlock and open the driver’s door.
The brightness will increase slightly
when you insert the key in the
ignition switch, then go to normal
brightness when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If you do not insert the key in the

BRIGHTNESS LEVEL ignition switch after opening the
driver’s door, the illumination turns U.S. model is shown.
off about 30 seconds after you close
The level of brightness is shown on the door. Push the button between the center
the information display while you vents to turn on the hazard warning
adjust it. It goes out about 5 seconds If you insert the key but do not turn lights (four-way flashers). This
after you finish adjusting. the ignition switch to the ON (II) causes all four outside turn signals
position, the illumination turns off in and both turn indicators in the
To reduce glare at night, the about 10 seconds. instrument panel to flash. Use the
instrument panel illumination dims hazard warning lights if you need to
when you turn the light switch to park in a dangerous area near heavy
or . Turning the select/ traffic, or if your vehicle is disabled.
reset knob to the right until you hear
a beep will cancel the reduced
brightness.
74
Rear Window Defogger
The defogger wires on the inside of

the rear window can be accidentally
damaged. When cleaning the glass,
always wipe side-to-side.
Pushing this button also turns the

mirror heaters on or off. For more
On models without navigation system On models with navigation system
The rear window defogger will clear The defogger will shut itself off
fog, frost, and thin ice from the within about 10 to 30 minutes
window. Push the defogger button to according to the outside temperature
turn it on and off. The indicator in (over 32°F, 0°C).
the button comes on to show the
defogger is on. It also shuts off when Make sure the rear window is clear
you turn off the ignition switch. You and you have good visibility before
have to turn the defogger on again starting to drive.
when you restart the vehicle.
75
Steering Wheel Adjustments
Make any steering wheel 3. Push the lever up to lock the

adjustments before you start driving. steering wheel in position.
4. Make sure you have securely

locked the steering wheel in place
Adjusting the steering wheel by trying to move it up, down, in,
position while driving may and out.
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only

when the vehicle is stopped.
2. Move the steering wheel up or
down, and in or out, so it points
1. Push the lever under the steering toward your chest, not toward
column all the way down. your face. Make sure you can see
the instrument panel gauges and
indicators.
76
Keys and Locks
You should have received a key These keys contain electronic

KEY MASTER KEY VALET number tag with your keys. You will circuits that are activated by the
NUMBER WITH REMOTE KEY need this key number if you ever immobilizer system. They will not
TAG TRANSMITTER (Gray) have to get a lost key replaced. Use work to start the engine if the
only Honda-approved key blanks. circuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Do not drop the keys or set heavy

objects on them.
The master key fits all the locks on Keep the keys away from liquids.
your vehicle. The valet key works If they get wet, dry them
only in the ignition and the driver’s immediately with a soft cloth.
door lock. You can keep the glove
box locked when you leave your The valet key does not contain a
vehicle and the valet key at a parking battery. Do not try to take it apart.
facility.
77
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system protects If the system repeatedly does not As required by the FCC:
your vehicle from theft. If an recognize the coding of your key, This device complies with Part 15 of the
improperly coded key (or other contact your dealer. FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
device) is used, the engine’s fuel following two conditions: (1) This device
system is disabled. Do not attempt to alter this system may not cause harmful interference, and
or add other devices to it. Electrical (2) this device must accept any
When you turn the ignition switch to problems could result that may make interference received, including
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer your vehicle inoperable. interference that may cause undesired
system indicator should come on operation.
briefly, then go off. If the indicator If you lose your key and you cannot
starts to blink, it means the system start the engine, contact your dealer. Changes or modifications not expressly
does not recognize the coding of the approved by the party responsible for
key. Turn the ignition switch to the compliance could void the user’s
LOCK (0) position, remove the key, authority to operate the equipment.
reinsert it, and turn the ignition Always take the ignition key with you
switch to the ON (II) position again. whenever you leave the vehicle alone. This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
The system may not recognize your Operation is subject to the following two
key’s coding if another immobilizer conditions: (1) this device may not cause
key or other metal object (i.e. key interference, and (2) this device must
chain) is near the ignition switch accept any interference that may cause
when you insert the key. undesired operation of the device.
78
Ignition Switch
If the front wheels are turned, the You will hear a reminder beeper if
anti-theft lock may make it difficult you leave the key in the ignition
to turn the key. Firmly turn the switch in the LOCK (0) or the
steering wheel to the left or right as ACCESSORY (I) position and open
you turn the key. the driver’s door. Remove the key to
turn off the beeper.

ACCESSORY (I) − You can
operate the audio system and the The shift lever must be in Park
accessory power sockets in this before you can remove the key from
position. the ignition switch.
ON (II) − This is the normal key

position when driving. Several of the
The ignition switch has four indicators on the instrument panel
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY come on as a test when you turn the
(I), ON (II), and START (III). ignition switch from the
ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)
LOCK (0) − You can insert or position.
remove the key only in this position.
To turn the key, the shift lever must START (III) − Use this position
be in Park, and you must push the only to start the engine. The switch
key in slightly. returns to the ON (II) position when
you let go of the key.
79
Door Locks
POWER DOOR LOCK MASTER SWITCH LOCK TAB

unlock when you turn the key a
Lock second time within a few seconds.
Lock
You can open or close the windows
Unlock and the moonroof by using the key
in the driver’s door (see page 108 ).
Unlock
To lock any passenger’s door when
getting out of the vehicle, pull the
lock tab rearward and close the door.
To lock the driver’s door, remove the
RED INDICATOR key from the ignition switch, pull the
lock tab rearward or push the front
To lock all doors and the tailgate, The lock tab on each passenger’s of the master switch, then close the
push the front of the master door door locks and unlocks that door. door.
lock switch on either front door, pull
the lock tab rearward on the driver’s When the door is unlocked, you can Locking and unlocking the driver’s
door, or use the key on the outside see the red indicator on the lock tab door will also lock and unlock the
lock on the driver’s door. above the inner door handle. fuel fill door (see page 283 ).
Pushing the rear of either master All doors and the tailgate can be
door lock switch will unlock all doors locked from the outside by using the
and the tailgate. Pushing forward the key in the driver’s door lock. To
lock tab on the driver’s door unlocks unlock only the driver’s door, insert
only that door. the key, turn the key, and release it.
The remaining doors and the tailgate
80
Door Locks
Lockout Prevention Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Auto Door Locking

With any door and the tailgate open Your vehicle has customizable The auto door locking feature has
and the key in the ignition, locking settings for the doors and tailgate to three possible settings:
with the master door lock switch is automatically lock and unlock. There
disabled. The lock tab on the driver’s are default settings for each of these The auto door locking is
door is not disabled if the driver’s features. You can turn off or change deactivated all the time.

door is closed. Pulling the driver’s the settings for these features as
lock tab rearward will lock all doors described on the following pages. The doors and tailgate lock
and the tailgate. If you try to lock an whenever you move the shift lever
open driver’s door by pulling the lock When you customize the setting, out of the Park (P) position.
tab rearward, the lock tab on the make sure your vehicle is parked
driver’s door pops out and unlocks safely, the engine is off, and the The doors and tailgate lock when
the driver’s door. parking brake is applied. Make all the vehicle speed reaches 10 mph
settings before you start driving. (15 km/h).
This is the default setting.
NOTE: When customizing a setting,
use the appropriate remote transmitter
(Driver 1 or Driver 2).
To customize, remove the master key
with the remote transmitter, and press
the UNLOCK button once.
CONTINUED
81
Door Locks
To turn off the Auto Door Lock 3. Push and hold the front of the To program the Park Lock mode:
modes: master door lock switch on the Locks all doors and tailgate when the
driver’s door until you hear a click shift lever is moved out of the Park (P)
(after about 5 seconds). position.
4. Release the switch, and within 20

seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the

Park (P) position.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON Park (P) position.
(II) position, and open the driver’s
door. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.
82
Door Locks
3. Push and hold the front of the To program the Drive Lock mode: 3. Push and hold the brake pedal,
master door lock switch on the Locks all doors and tailgate when the and move the shift lever out of the
driver’s door. You will hear a click. vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph Park (P) position.
Keep holding the switch until you (15 km/h).
hear another click (after about 5 4. Push and hold the front of the
seconds). master door lock switch on the

driver’s door. You will hear a click.
4. Release the switch, and within 20 Keep holding the switch until you
seconds, turn the ignition switch hear another click (after about 5
to the LOCK (0) position. seconds).

to the ACCESSORY (I) position.
Move the shift lever to the Park
(P) position.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the 6. Turn the ignition switch to the
Park (P) position. LOCK (0) position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON

(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.
83
Door Locks
Auto Door Unlocking To turn off the Auto Door Unlock 3. Push and hold the rear of the
The auto door unlocking feature modes: master door lock switch on the
has five possible settings: driver’s door. You will hear a click,
The auto door unlocking is and after about 5 seconds, you will
deactivated all the time. hear another click.
The driver’s door unlocks when 4. Release the switch, and within 20
you move the shift lever to the seconds, turn the ignition switch
Park (P) position with the brake to the LOCK (0) position.
pedal depressed.
This is the default setting.
All doors and tailgate unlock when

you move the shift lever to the
Park (P) position with the brake
pedal depressed. 1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
The driver’s door unlocks
whenever you turn the ignition 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
switch to the ACCESSORY (I) (II) position, and open the driver’s
position. door.
All doors and tailgate unlock

whenever you turn the ignition
switch to the ACCESSORY (I)
position.
84
Door Locks
To program the Park Unlock mode: 3. Push and hold the rear of the To program the Ignition Switch
Unlocks the driver’s door or all doors master door lock switch on the Unlock mode:
and tailgate when the shift lever is driver’s door. You will hear a click. Unlocks the driver’s door or all doors
moved to Park (P) position with the Continue to hold the switch: and tailgate when the ignition switch is
brake pedal depressed. moved out of the ON (II) position.
Until you hear another click

(after about 5 seconds) to
activate driver’s door unlock
feature.
Or, until you hear two more

clicks (after about 10 seconds)
to activate all doors and tailgate
unlock feature.

to the LOCK (0) position.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the 1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position. Park (P) position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to (II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door. close the driver’s door.
CONTINUED
85
Door Locks
3. Push and hold the brake pedal, 5. Release the switch, and within 20 Even if your vehicle’s battery is
then move the shift lever out of seconds, turn the ignition switch removed or goes dead, the system
the Park (P) position. to the ACCESSORY (I) position. keeps the auto door lock/unlock
Move the shift lever to the Park setting which you selected.
4. Push and hold the rear of the (P) position.
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click. 6. Turn the ignition switch to the
Continue to hold the switch: LOCK (0) position.
Until you hear another click

(after about 5 seconds) to
activate driver’s door unlock
feature.
Or, until you hear two more

clicks (after about 10 seconds)
to activate all doors and tailgate
unlock feature.
86
Door Locks, Remote Transmitter
Childproof Door Locks Remote Transmitter UNLOCK − Press this button once
to unlock the driver’s door. Push it
LEVER twice to unlock the remaining doors
LED LOCK and the tailgate. Some exterior lights
BUTTON will flash twice each time you press
the button.

UNLOCK
Unlock BUTTON The ceiling light and the door
activated spotlights come on when
you press the UNLOCK button if the
lights are in the door activated
Lock
PANIC position. If you do not open any door
BUTTON within 30 seconds, the light(s) will
fade out. If you relock the doors with
The childproof door locks are LOCK − Press this button once to the remote transmitter before 30
designed to prevent children seated lock all doors and the tailgate. Some seconds have elapsed, the light(s)
in the rear from accidentally opening exterior lights will flash. When you will go off immediately.
the rear doors. Each rear door has a push LOCK twice within 5 seconds,
lock lever near the edge. With the you will hear a beep to verify that the If you do not open any door or the
lever in the LOCK position (lever is doors and tailgate are locked and the tailgate within 30 seconds, the doors,
down), the door cannot be opened security system has set. This button the tailgate and the fuel fill door
from the inside regardless of the does not work if any door or tailgate automatically relock and the security
position of the lock tab. To open the is not fully closed. system sets.
door, push the lock tab forward and
use the outside door handle.
CONTINUED
87
Remote Transmitter
Locking and unlocking the driver’s Remote Transmitter Care Replacing the Transmitter Battery
door will also lock and unlock the Avoid dropping or throwing the If it takes several pushes on the
fuel fill door (see page 283 ). transmitter. button to lock or unlock the doors
and the tailgate, replace the battery
You can also open all power windows Protect the transmitter from as soon as possible.
and the moonroof from outside the extreme temperatures.
vehicle with the remote transmitter Battery type: CR1616
(see page 108 ). Do not immerse the transmitter in
any liquid.
PANIC − Press this button for
about 2 seconds to attract attention: If you lose a transmitter, the
the horn will sound, and the exterior replacement needs to be
lights will flash for about 30 seconds. reprogrammed by your dealer.
To cancel panic mode, press any
other button on the remote
transmitter, or turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
88
Remote Transmitter
COIN
BATTERY

SCREW
To replace the battery: 3. Inside the transmitter, separate 4. Remove the old battery, and insert
the inner cover from the keypad a new battery into the back of the
1. Remove the screw at the base of by carefully prying on the edge cover with the ＋ side facing down.
the transmitter with a small with a coin.
Phillips-head screwdriver. An improperly disposed of battery
can hurt the environment.
NOTE: Be careful when removing Always confirm local regulations
this screw as the head of the screw for battery disposal.
can strip out.
5. Install the parts in reverse order.
2. Separate the transmitter by prying
its middle seam with your
fingernail. CONTINUED
89
Remote Transmitter
As required by the FCC: Recalling a Memorized Driving Here are the settings activated with
This device complies with Part 15 of the Position the remote:
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the EX-L models
following two conditions: (1) This device Driving position memory
may not cause harmful interference, and (see page 101 ).
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
interference that may cause undesired (see page 81 ).
operation.
When you unlock and open the
Changes or modifications not expressly driver’s door with the remote
approved by the party responsible for transmitter, the driver’s seat (except
compliance could void the user’s the power lumbar feature) and
authority to operate the equipment. outside mirrors start to move to the
positions stored in memory. The
This device complies with Industry indicator in the related memory
Canada Standard RSS-210. When you unlock the door with your button to the remote comes on.
Operation is subject to the following two remote, each remote activates the
conditions: (1) this device may not cause keyless memory settings related to
interference, and (2) this device must that remote. The driver’s ID (Driver
accept any interference that may cause 1 or Driver 2) is shown on the back
undesired operation of the device. of each remote.
90
Tailgate
Keep the tailgate closed at all times

RELEASE while driving to avoid damaging the
tailgate and to prevent exhaust gas
from getting into the interior. See
Carbon Monoxide Hazard on page
51 .

HANDLE
The tailgate locks and unlocks when

you lock and unlock the driver’s door.
To open the tailgate, push the

release, and lift up. To close the
tailgate, use the tailgate handle to
lower it, then press down on the
back edge.
91
Tailgate
Unlocking the Tailgate
COVER RELEASE LEVER
If the power door lock system cannot Push the release lever to the lower
unlock the tailgate, unlock it right as shown.
manually.
If you need to unlock the tailgate
Place a cloth on the top side of the manually, it means there is a
cover to prevent scratches, then use problem with the tailgate. Have the
a small flat-tip screwdriver to remove vehicle checked by your dealer.
the cover on the back of the tailgate.
92
Seats
Front Seat Power Adjustments Moves the whole seat up

See pages 11 − 13 for important safety and forward, or down
information and warnings about how to and backward. The front
properly position the seats and seat- of the seat also tilts up or
backs. down at the same time.
(Driver’s seat only)

The controls for the power
adjustable front seats are on the
outside edge of each seat bottom. Adjusts the seat-back
You can adjust the seats with the angle forward or
ignition switch in any position. Make backward.
all seat adjustments before you start
driving.
Moves the seat forward Driver’s seat only:
The passenger seat has the same and backward. Increases or decreases
adjustments as the driver’s seat but the lumbar support.
without any height and lumbar
adjustments.
Moves the front of the
seat up or down.
Raises or lowers the seat.

93
Seats
Head Restraints Front CUSHION

See page 13 for important safety
information and a warning about
improperly positioning head restraints.
Your vehicle is equipped with head

restraints in all seating positions to
help protect you and your RELEASE
passengers from the likelihood of BUTTON
whiplash and other injuries.
LEGS SEAT-BACK
They are most effective when you Adjusting the Head Restraint
adjust them so the center of the back The head restraints adjust for height.
of the occupant’s head rests against You need both hands to adjust a
the center of the restraint. restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it
while driving. To raise it, pull upward.
To lower the restraint, push the
release button sideways, and push
the restraint down.
94
Seats
Rear CUSHION
Removing the Head Restraint
To remove a head restraint for
cleaning or repair, pull it up as far as Failure to reinstall, or correctly
it will go. Push the release button, reinstall, the head restraints can
then pull the restraint out of the seat- result in severe injury during a
back. crash.

When removing the rear outer head Always replace the head
RELEASE restraints, tilt the rear seat first (see restraints before driving.
BUTTON page 97 ).
LEGS SEAT-BACK When reinstalling a head restraint,

put the legs back in place. Then
When a passenger is seated in the adjust it to the appropriate height
rear seat, the head restraint should while pressing the release button.
be adjusted up or down, to match the
passenger’s height. Make sure the head restraint locks
in position when you reinstall it.
CONTINUED
95
Seats
Active Head Restraints This reduces the distance between For a head restraint system to work
the restraint and the occupant’s head. properly:
It also helps protect the occupants
against the likelihood of whiplash Do not hang any items on the head
and injuries to the neck and upper restraints, or from the restraint
spine. legs.
After a collision, the activated Do not place any object between

restraint should return to its normal an occupant and the seat-back.
position.
Install each restraint in its proper
If the restraints do not return to their location.
normal position, or in the event of a
severe collision, have the vehicle Only use genuine Honda
The driver’s and front passenger’s inspected by a Honda dealer. replacement head restraints.
seats have active head restraints. If
the vehicle is struck severely from
the rear, the occupant properly
secured with the seat belt will be
pushed against the seat-back and the
head restraint will automatically
move forward.
96
Seats
Easy Fold-down 60/40 Split Rear You can fold down the seat-back in How to use the rear seat release
Seatback two ways. lever.
The Easy Fold-down 60/40 Split
Rear Seatback can be folded down 1. Lower the rear head restraints to
for more cargo room. their lowest positions. If you fold
down the left side seat-back, also

Each side folds down separately, so adjust the rear center head
you can still carry one or two restraint to its lowest position.
passengers in the rear seat.
Make sure the rear seat armrest is
Remove any items from the seat stored.
before folding down the seat-back.
RELEASE LEVER
Make sure that the folded seat-back
does not press against the front
passenger’s seat, as this could cause 2. Unlock the seat-back by pulling up
the weight sensors to work the release lever on the outer side
improperly. of each rear seat-back.
3. Fold the seat-back forward.
CONTINUED
97
Seats
How to use the lever on both sides of Do not put any heavy items on the
the cargo room. RED INDICATOR seat-back when it is folded down.
Make sure the seat-back is locked

securely and all rear shoulder belts
are positioned in front of the rear
seat-backs.
Make sure all items in the cargo area

are secured. Loose items can fly
forward and cause injury if you have
to brake hard. See Carrying Cargo
on page 294 .
LEVER
Make sure there are no passengers To prevent spilling the contents of cups,
on the rear seats before folding the remove them bef ore f olding the seat-
seat-backs. back down.
Pull the lever on either side of the To return the seat-back to the
cargo area and the back of the rear upright position, raise the seat-back
seat on that side folds down to make sure it is latched. If the seat-
automatically. back is not latched fully, the seat belt
will not work properly and you will
see the red indicator behind the
release lever as shown.
98
Seats, Seat Heaters
Armrests Seat Heaters

Front Rear Passenger’s
Seat

Driver’s
HEATERS Seat
To use the console lid as an armrest, The rear seat armrest is in the EX-L models
slide it to one of its three positions. center of the rear seat. Pivot it down Both front seats are equipped with
to use it. seat heaters. Because of the sensors
for the side airbag cutoff system,
A beverage holder is located in the there is no heater in the passenger’s
armrest. seat-back. The ignition switch must
be in the ON (II) position to use the
heaters.
CONTINUED
99
Seat Heaters
In the LO setting, the heater runs

continuously. It does not cycle with
temperature changes. Heat induced burns are
possible when using seat
Follow these precautions whenever heaters.
you use the seat heaters:
Persons with a diminished
Do not use the seat heater in the ability to sense temperature
HI setting for an extended period, (e.g., persons with diabetes,
because it draws large amounts of lower-limb nerve damage, or
current from the battery. paralysis) or with sensitive skin
should not use seat heaters.
If the engine is left idling for an
extended period, do not use the
Push the right side of the switch, HI, seat heaters even on the LO
to rapidly heat up the seat. After the setting. It can weaken the battery,
seat reaches a comfortable causing hard starting.
temperature, select LO by pushing
the left side of the switch. This will
keep the seat warm.
In the HI setting, the heater turns off

when the seat gets warm, and turns
back on after the seat’s temperature
drops.
100
Driving Position Memory System
EX-L models Storing a Driving Position in

Your vehicle has a memory feature Memory
for the driver’s seat and outside Store a driver’s seat position only
mirror positions. when the vehicle is parked.
Two seat and outside mirror 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON

positions can be stored in separate (II) position. You cannot add a
memories. You select a memorized new seat position in memory
position by pushing the appropriate unless the ignition switch is in the
button or using the appropriate ON (II) position. You can recall a
remote transmitter (Driver 1 or memorized position with the
Driver 2). ignition switch in any position. SET BUTTON MEMORY BUTTONS
2. Adjust the seat to a comfortable 4. Press and release the SET button.
position (see page 93 ). You will hear a beep. Immediately
press and hold one of the memory
3. Adjust the outside mirrors for best buttons (1 or 2) until you hear two
visibility (see page 105 ). beeps. The indicator in the
memory button will come on. The
current position of the driver’s
seat and outside mirrors are now
stored.
CONTINUED
101
Each memory button stores only one To cancel the storing procedure Selecting a Memorized Position
driving position. Storing a new after pressing the SET button, press
position erases the previous setting the SET button again within 5
stored in that button’s memory. If seconds.
you want to add a new position while
retaining the current one, use the
other memory button.
All stored driving positions will be

lost if your vehicle’s battery goes
dead or is disconnected.
MEMORY BUTTONS
To select a memorized position, do

this:
1. Make sure the parking brake is set

and the shift lever is in Park.
2. Press the desired memory button

(1 or 2) until you hear a beep, then
release the button.
102
The system will move the seat and To stop the system’s automatic If desired, you can use the
outside mirrors to the memorized adjustment, do any of these actions: adjustment switches to change the
positions. The indicator in the positions of the seat or outside
selected memory button will flash Press any button on the control mirrors after they are in their
during movement. When the panel: SET, 1, or 2. memorized positions. If you change
adjustments are complete, you will the memorized position, the

hear two beeps, and the indicator will Push any of the adjustment indicator in the memory button will
remain on. switches for the seat. go out. To keep this driving position
for later use, you must store it in the
Shift out of Park. driving position memory.
Adjust the outside mirrors.
103
Mirrors
Keep the inside and outside mirrors

clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before There is also a sensor on the back of
you start driving. the mirror. Items hung on the mirror
may block this sensor and af f ect its
perf ormance.
SENSOR
INDICATOR
AUTO BUTTON
The inside mirror can automatically

darken to reduce glare. To turn on
this feature, press the button on the
bottom of the mirror. The AUTO
indicator comes on as a reminder.
When it is on, the mirror darkens
when it senses the headlights of a
vehicle behind you, then returns to
normal visibility when the lights are
gone. Press the button again to turn
off this feature.
104
Mirrors
Adjusting the Power Mirrors 3. Push the appropriate edge of the Reverse Tilt Door Mirror
adjustment switch to move the EX-L models
SELECTOR SWITCH mirror right, left, up, or down. Both outside door mirrors have a
reverse tilt feature. When in reverse,
4. When you finish, move the the selected mirror will tilt down
selector switch to the center (off) slightly to improve your view as you

position. This turns the parallel park. Shifting out of reverse
adjustment switch off to keep your will return the mirror to its original
settings. position.
To tilt the driver’s mirror, place

the selector switch in the left
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH position.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON To tilt the passenger’s mirror,

(II) position. place the switch in the right
position.
2. Move the selector switch to L
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s To turn the feature off, place the
side). switch in the center position.
Outside mirror positions can be

stored in the driving position
memory system (see page 101 ).
105
Mirrors, Power Windows
Power Mirror Heaters Power Windows

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/ MAIN SWITCH
INDICATOR Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are

away from the windows before
closing them.
DRIVER’S FRONT
WINDOW PASSENGER’S
Without navigation system is shown. SWITCH WINDOW SWITCH
The outside mirrors are heated to Turn the ignition switch to the ON
remove fog and frost. With the (II) position to raise or lower any
ignition switch in the ON (II) window. To open a window, push the
position, turn on the heaters by switch down and hold it. Release the
pressing the button. The indicator in switch when you want the window to
the button comes on as a reminder. stop. Pull back on the switch and
Press the button again to turn the hold it to close the window.
heaters off. Pressing this button also
turns the rear window defogger on
and off.
106
Power Windows
AUTO − To open either front When you push the main switch in, AUTO REVERSE − If either front
window fully, push the window the indicator comes on and the window senses any obstacle while it
switch firmly down to the second passengers’ windows cannot be is closing automatically, it will
detent, then release it. The window raised or lowered. Use the main reverse direction and then stop. To
automatically goes down all the way. switch when you have children in the close the window, remove the
To stop the window from going all vehicle so they do not injure obstacle, then use the window switch

the way down, pull back on the themselves by operating the again.
window switch briefly. windows unintentionally. To cancel
this feature, push on the switch Auto reverse stops sensing when the
To close either front window fully, again. The switch will pop out and window is almost closed. You should
pull back the window switch firmly the indicator will go off. always check that all passengers and
to the second detent, then release it. objects are away from the window
The window automatically goes all The windows and the main switch before closing it.
the way up. To stop the window from feature will operate for up to 10
going all the way up, push down on minutes after you turn off the NOTE: The driver’s window auto
the window switch briefly. ignition switch. Opening either front reverse function is disabled when
door cancels this function. you continuously pull up the switch.
107
Power Windows
Opening the Windows and 2. Press the UNLOCK button a Opening/Closing the Windows
Moonroof with the Remote second time, and hold it. The and Moonroof with the Key
Transmitter remaining doors unlock, and all
four windows and the moonroof
start to open. To stop the windows
and moonroof, release the button.
3. To open the windows and

UNLOCK moonroof further, press the
BUTTON Open
button again (within 10 seconds of
step 1) and hold it. If the windows
and the moonroof stop before the
Close
desired position, repeat steps 1
and 2.
You cannot close the windows or the You can open and close the windows
You can open all of the windows and moonroof with the remote and moonroof with the key in the
the moonroof from outside with the transmitter. driver’s door lock.
remote transmitter.
To open:
1. Press the UNLOCK button once 1. Insert the key in the driver’s door
to unlock the driver’s door. lock.
2. Turn the key clockwise, then

release it.
108
Power Windows
3. Turn the key clockwise again, and To close:

hold it. All four windows and the 1. Insert the key in the driver’s door
moonroof start to open. To stop lock.
the windows and the moonroof,
release the key. 2. Turn the key counterclockwise,
then release it.

4. To open the windows and the
moonroof further, turn and hold 3. Turn the key counterclockwise
the key again (within 10 seconds again, and hold it. All four
of step 2). windows and the moonroof start to
close. To stop the windows and
NOTE: If the windows and the the moonroof, release the key.
moonroof stop before the desired
position, repeat steps 2 and 3. 4. To close the windows and the
moonroof further, turn and hold
the key again (within 10 seconds
of step 2).
NOTE: If the windows and the

moonroof stop before the desired
position, repeat steps 2 and 3.
109
Moonroof
MOONROOF SWITCH To tilt up the moonroof, push on the AUTO − To open the moonroof
center of the moonroof switch. To fully, pull back the moonroof switch
stop the moonroof from tilting up firmly, then release it. The moonroof
Open
fully, push the switch briefly. automatically opens all the way. To
stop the moonroof from opening,
To open the moonroof, pull back on push the switch briefly.
the switch and hold it. Release the
Tilt
switch when the moonroof reaches To close the moonroof fully, firmly
the desired position. To close the push the moonroof switch forward,
Close moonroof, push the switch forward then release it. The moonroof
and hold it. Release the switch to automatically closes all the way. To
stop the operation. stop the moonroof from closing,
push the switch briefly.
The moonroof can be tilted up in the
back for ventilation, or it can be slid To open or close the moonroof
back into the roof. Use the switch on Opening or closing the partially, lightly pull the switch back
the front ceiling to operate the moonroof on someone’s hands or push it forward and hold it. The
moonroof. You must turn the or fingers can cause serious moonroof will stop when you release
ignition switch to the ON (II) injury. the switch.
position to operate the moonroof.
Make sure all hands and fingers
are clear of the moonroof
before opening or closing it.
110
Moonroof
Auto Reverse You can open and close the Operating the Moonroof with the
If the moonroof runs into any moonroof for up to 10 minutes after Remote Transmitter or the Key
obstacle while it is closing you turn off the ignition switch. You can use the remote transmitter
automatically, it will reverse Opening either front door cancels or the key to operate the moonroof
direction, and then stop. To close the this function. from the outside. Refer to page
moonroof, remove the obstacle, then 108 for details.

use the moonroof switch again.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the If you try to open the moonroof in
moonroof is almost closed. You below-f reezing temperatures, or when
should always check that all it is covered with snow or ice, you can
passengers and objects are away damage the moonroof panel or its
from the moonroof before closing it. motor.
111
Parking Brake
Driving the vehicle with the parking

brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and hubs. A beeper will sound if
the vehicle is driven with the parking
brake on.
PARKING BRAKE LEVER
To apply the parking brake, pull the

lever up fully. To release it, pull up
slightly, push the button, and lower
the lever. The parking brake
indicator on the instrument panel
should go out when the parking
brake is fully released (see page 57 ).
112
Interior Convenience Items
SUNGLASSES HOLDER
DOOR POCKETS
COAT HOOK VANITY MIRROR SUN VISOR
CENTER POCKETS

ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET
FLOOR STORAGE
COMPARTMENTS
GLOVE BOX
ACCESSORY
POWER SOCKET
BEVERAGE HOLDER
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK/
USB ADAPTER CABLE
Hidden Removable BEVERAGE HOLDER in CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
Utility Box REAR SEAT ARMREST
113
Beverage Holders Accessory Power Sockets

Front Rear Front
Be careful when you are using the The rear seat also has a beverage Your vehicle has three accessory
beverage holders. A spilled liquid holder in the center armrest. To use power sockets. These are located on
that is very hot can scald you or your it, pivot the armrest down. the front of the center console, in the
passengers. Spilled liquids can console compartment and left side
damage the upholstery, carpeting, panel in the cargo area.
and electrical components in the
interior. To use an accessory power socket,
the ignition switch must be in the
Open the front beverage holder by ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
pulling up on the lid.
114
Each socket is intended to supply CARGO AREA Console Compartment

power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10 LEVER
amps).
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

COVER
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
None of the sockets will power an
automotive type cigarette lighter To open the console compartment,
element. pull up on the lever and lift the
armrest.
When more than one socket is being Make sure to put the socket cover
used, the combined power rating of back in place to prevent any small To close, lower the armrest, and
the accessories should be 120 watts foreign objects from getting into the push it down until it latches.
or less (10 amps). socket.
CONTINUED
115
Glove Box
DETACHABLE TRAY An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Always keep the glove box

To lock closed while driving.
GLOVE BOX
The console compartment is Open the glove box by pulling the

equipped with a detachable tray. handle to the left. Close it with a firm
push. Lock or unlock the glove box
To remove this tray, slide it forward, with the master key.
then pull it up.
The glove box light comes on when
the parking lights are on.
116
Sunglasses Holder Sun Visors

Push
Slide
SUN VISOR
To open the sunglasses holder, push Some larger styles of sunglasses To use the sun visor, pull it down.
then release the indent. It will may not fit in the holder. When using the sun visor for the
unlatch and swing down. To close it, side window, remove the support rod
push it until it latches. Make sure the You may also store small items in from the clip, and swing it out.
holder is closed while you are driving. this holder. Make sure they are In this position, the sun visor can be
small enough to let the holder close adjusted by moving it on its slider.
and latch, and that they are not Do not use the extended sun visor
heavy enough to cause the holder to over the inside mirror.
pop open while driving.
Make sure you put the sun visor
back in place when you are getting
into or out of the vehicle.
117
Hidden Removable Utility Box

HANDLE HANDLE
REMOVABLE TRAY HOOK HOLE PASS PARTITIONS
To open the removable tray, raise it Then remove the hook, and hook it The utility box under the removable
by lifting it up with the handle. to the hole on the cargo side panel. tray can be partitioned by the pass
partition.
The reverse side of the removable
tray is water-proofed. You can flip
the removable tray to use the water-
proofed side. The maximum load in the utility box is
22.1 lbs on U.S. models, and 10 kg on
Canadian models.
To prevent damage to the utility box, do
not exceed the maximum load.
118
Floor Storage Compartments

HANDLE

UTILITY BOX LID
In addition, the utility box can be To use the storage compartment The reverse side of the lids are
removed to be washed. To remove located on each side of the cargo water-proofed. To use the water-
the utility box, lift it up with the area floor, hold the strap and raise proofed side, replace the right lid
handle. the lid. and left lid.
Do not set the removable tray with
the handle raised. The handle might
be damaged.
Do not leave water, soil, sand, or
perishable foods in the utility box.
Rotting food and dirt on the floor
may cause the breakdown of
electrical equipment.
119
Vanity Mirror Coat Hook Center Pockets
To use the vanity mirror on the back To use a coat hook, slide it out Pull up the lid to open each pocket.
of the sun visor, pull up the cover. slightly, then pull it down.
The vanity mirror lights come on Make sure the coat hook is folded up
when you pull up the cover. when you are not using it. This hook
is not designed for large or heavy
items.
120
Interior Lights
Ceiling Light After all doors are closed tightly, the Spotlights
light dims slightly, then fades out in
DOOR ACTIVATED POSITION about 30 seconds. OFF POSITION
The ceiling light (with the switch in

the center position) comes on when

you remove the key from the ignition
switch. If you do not open a door, the
light stays on, then fades out in
about 30 seconds.
If you leave any door open without

the key in the ignition switch, the DOOR ACTIVATED
ceiling light will go off after about 15
The ceiling light has a three-position minutes. Turn on a spotlight by pushing the
switch: ON, Door Activated, and lens. Push the lens again to turn it
OFF. In the Door Activated (center) off. You can use the spotlights at all
position, the light comes on when times.
you:
Open any door.
Unlock the driver’s door with the

key or remote transmitter.
CONTINUED
121
Interior Lights
The spotlights have a two-position Cargo Area Light Courtesy Lights

switch. In the DOOR position, the The courtesy light in each front door
lights come on when you open any comes on when the door is opened,
door. The lights fade out about 30 and goes out when the door is closed.
seconds after the doors are closed
tightly. In the OFF position, the Your vehicle also has a courtesy light
lights do not come on. in the ignition switch. This light
OFF comes on when you open the driver’s
The spotlights (with the switch in ON door. It fades out in about 30
the DOOR position) also come on seconds after the door is closed.
when you unlock the door with the
key or the remote transmitter, and
when you remove the key from the Driver’s side is shown.
ignition switch.
Your vehicle has a cargo area light
on each side panel in the cargo area.
Each cargo area light has a two
position switch. In the OFF position,
the light does not come on. In the
ON position, the light comes on
when you open the tailgate.
122
Interior Lights
COURTESY LIGHT

The courtesy light between the
spotlights comes on when you turn
the parking lights on. To adjust its
brightness, turn the select/reset
knob on the instrument panel, with
the ignition switch in the ON (II)
position.
123
124
Main Menu
Features
The climate control system in your Climate Control System ................ 126 FM/AM Radio Reception ............. 229
vehicle provides a comfortable Audio System ................................. 134 Protecting Your Discs ................... 231
driving environment in all weather Models without navigation system Remote Audio Controls................. 234
conditions. Audio System ................................. 135 Auxiliary Input Jack ....................... 236
Playing the FM/AM Radio ........... 136 Radio Theft Protection.................. 237
The standard audio system has Playing the XM Radio ................. 143 Setting the Clock ........................... 238
many features. This section Playing Discs .................................. 149 Security System ............................. 241
describes those features and how to Disc Changer Error Messages .... 158 Compass.......................................... 242
Features
use them. Playing an iPod ............................. 159 Cruise Control ................................ 246
iPod Error Messages .................. 167 HomeLink Universal
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio Playing a USB Flash Memory Transceiver................................. 249
system that requires a code number Device ......................................... 168 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink ......... 253
to enable it. USB Flash Memory Device Rearview Camera and Monitor .... 277
Error Messages ......................... 176 Rearview Mirror with Rearview
The security system helps to dis- Models with navigation system Camera Display.......................... 278
courage vandalism and theft of your Audio System ................................. 177
vehicle. Playing the FM/AM Radio ........... 178
Playing the XM Radio ................. 190
Playing Discs .................................. 197
Disc Changer Error Messages .... 208
Playing an iPod ............................. 209
iPod Error Messages .................. 218
Playing a USB Flash Memory
Device ......................................... 219
USB Flash Memory Device
Error Messages ......................... 228
125
Climate Control System
Without navigation system With navigation system

PASSENGER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE TEMPERATURE
DRIVER’S SIDE TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE CONTROL
CONTROL SWITCH SWITCH
AUTO INDICATOR CENTER DISPLAY
DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE DRIVER’S SIDE TEMPERATURE WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER
AUTO BUTTON
INDICATOR MODE CONTROL
BUTTON REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER/
HEATED MIRROR
BUTTON
SYNC
BUTTON
ON/OFF
BUTTON AUTO BUTTON
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER/ RECIRCULATION
BUTTON
AUTO BUTTON AIR CONDITIONING (A/C)
BUTTON FAN CONTROL PASSENGER’S SIDE
ON/OFF BUTTON BUTTONS TEMPERATURE
SYNC BUTTON MODE CONTROL BUTTON CONTROL SWITCH
RECIRCULATION BUTTON WINDSHIELD DEFROSTER
BUTTON DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE AIR CONDITIONING
FAN CONTROL SWITCH CONTROL SWITCH (A/C) BUTTON
U.S. models are shown.
126
Voice Control System Using Automatic Climate Control The system automatically selects
On models with navigation system The automatic climate control the proper mix of conditioned
The climate control system can also system in your vehicle maintains the and/or heated air that will, as
be operated by voice control. See the interior temperature you select, quickly as possible, raise or lower
navigation system manual for removes moisture from the air and the interior temperature to your
complete details. makes the interior dry. The system preference.
also adjusts the fan speed and
airflow levels. Temperature Control
Features
The driver’s side temperature and
1. Press the Auto button. The the passenger’s side temperature can
indicator in the button also comes be set separately. Push up the switch
on as a reminder. You will see of the appropriate temperature
AUTO on the display (in the control to increase the temperature
center display on models with of airflow. Push down the switch to
navigation system). decrease it. Each set temperature is
shown in the display (in the center
2. Set the desired temperature with display on models with navigation
the temperature control switch. system).
You can set the driver’s side
temperature and the passenger’s
side temperature separately.
CONTINUED
127
When you set the temperature to its SYNC Button To Turn Everything Off
lower limit ( ) or its upper limit When you press this button, the To turn the system completely off,
( ), the system runs at full indicator in the button comes on, and press the ON/OFF button.
cooling or heating only. It does not the passenger’s side temperature is
regulate the interior temperature. synchronized to the driver’s side set Keep the system completely off
temperature. Changing the for short periods only.
When you adjust a fan control, the passenger’s side temperature makes
fan is taken out of AUTO mode. the indicator go off and takes the To keep stale air and mustiness
system out of SYNC mode. from collecting, you should have
On models with navigation system the fan running at all times.
In AUTO mode, the vehicle’s interior ON/OFF Button
temperature is independently Each time you press this button, the
regulated for the driver and front climate control system switches
passenger according to each between on and off. Turning on the
adjusted temperature. The system system with this button selects your
also regulates each temperature last climate control selection.
based on the information of the
sunlight sensor and the sun’s
position which is updated
automatically by the navigation’s
global positioning system (GPS). If
one side of the vehicle is getting too
much sun, the system lowers the
temperature only on that side.
128
Semi-automatic Operation Air Conditioning (A/C) Button Recirculation Button

You can manually select various This button turns the air When the indicator in the button is
functions of the climate control conditioning on and off. You will see on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
system when it is in fully automatic A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display. sent through the system again.
mode. All other features remain When the indicator is off, air is
automatically controlled. Making any When you turn the A/C off, the brought in from the outside of the
manual selection causes the word system cannot regulate the inside vehicle (fresh air mode).
AUTO in the display to go out. temperature if you set the
Features
temperature control below the The outside air intakes for the
Fan Control outside temperature. climate control system are at the
On models without navigation system base of the windshield. Keep this
Push the switch up to increase the area clear of leaves and other debris.
fan speed and airflow. Push the
switch down to decrease them. The system should be left in fresh
air mode under almost all conditions.
On models with navigation system Keeping the system in recirculation
Press the ▲ button to increase the mode, particularly with the A/C off,
fan speed and airflow. Press the ▼ can cause the windows to fog up.
button to decrease them.
Switch to recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.
CONTINUED
129
Rear Window Defogger Button Air flows from the center To remove fog from the inside of the
This button turns the rear window and corner vents in the dashboard, windows, set as follows:
defogger on and off (see page 75 ). and the vents on the back of the
center console. 1. Select . The system
Pushing this button also turns the automatically switches to fresh air
power mirror heaters on and off. Windshield Defroster Button mode and turns on the A/C.
This button directs the main airflow 2. Adjust the temperature with the
Mode Control to the windshield for faster driver’s side temperature control
Use the mode control button to defrosting. It also overrides any so the airflow feels warm.
select the vents the air flows from. mode selection you may have made. 3. Select to help clear the
Some air will flow from the rear window.
dashboard vents in all modes. When you select , the system 4. To increase airflow to the
automatically switches to fresh air windshield, close the corner vents.
Airflow is divided between mode and turns on the A/C. For For faster defogging, manually set
the floor and corner vents and the faster defrosting, manually set the the fan speed to high.
defroster vents at the base of the fan speed to high. You can also
windshield. increase airflow to the windshield by For your safety, make sure you have
closing the corner vents on the a clear view through all the windows
Air flows from the floor dashboard. To close the vents, rotate before driving.
vents. the wheel under each corner vent.
When the indicator in the
Airflow is divided between When you turn off by button is on, the SYNC
the vents in the dashboard and the pressing the button again, the indicator also comes on. The front
back of the center console, and the system returns to its former settings. passenger’s temperature cannot be
floor vents. set separately from the driver’s.
130
Dual Temperature Control Without navigation system

Your vehicle has two temperature
control switches, one for the driver,
and one for the front passenger.
The temperatures of the driver’s side

and the front passenger’s side are
controlled independently.
Features
DRIVER’S SIDE SYNC BUTTON PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE
CONTROL SWITCH CONTROL SWITCH
With navigation system
SYNC BUTTON
DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE

TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE
CONTROL SWITCH CONTROL SWITCH
CONTINUED
131
Synchronized Control
The selected temperatures appear in DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE
the display (in the center display on
models with navigation system).
When the indicator in the SYNC
button is on, you can adjust both
sides to the same temperature by
pushing the driver’s side
temperature control switch up or
down.
When you set the temperature to its

upper or lower limit, it is displayed as
or .
REAR POSITION FLOOR VENTS
132
Rear Ventilation Sunlight Sensor/Temperature

Sensor
REAR VENTS
SUNLIGHT SENSOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
DIAL
Open
Features
Close
TABS
The airflow from the rear vents can

be adjusted when the AUTO mode is The climate control system has two
selected or the fan mode is in the sensors: a sunlight sensor on top of
or position. the dashboard, and a temperature
and humidity sensor next to the
You can adjust the direction of the steering column. Do not cover the
airflow by moving the tab on each sensors or spill any liquid on them.
vent up-and-down and side-to-side.
You can also open or close the vents
with the dial between them.
133
Audio System
An audio system is standard on all Audio system without navigation system

models. Read the appropriate pages
(as shown below) to use your Without XM Radio With XM Radio
vehicle’s audio system.
On models without navigation

system, see pages 137 through 178 .
On models with navigation system,

see pages 179 through 230 .
Audio system with navigation system
134
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
Selector Knob The knob turns left and right. Use it Menu Display
to scroll through lists, or to make To select any setting such as the
selections or adjustments to a list or clock, sound adjustment, or the
menu item on the display. When you compass, press the MENU button.
make a selection, push the center of To use any audio system function,
the selector (ENTER) to go to that the ignition switch must be in the
selection. ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
You can select the item by turning
Features
When the audio system is in XM the selector knob. To go back to the
Radio mode or playing discs, pushing previous display, press the RETURN
the selector (ENTER) knob switches button.
RETURN SELECTOR MENU the display between the normal
BUTTON KNOB BUTTON display and the extended display. Pressing the MENU button again
The extended display has three will also cancel the menu display
Most audio system functions can be segments to display the detailed mode.
controlled by standard buttons, bars, information.
and knobs. In addition, you can
access some functions by using the
selector knob on the audio system.
135
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models without navigation system)
Without XM Radio With XM Radio
POWER/ POWER/
VOLUME VOLUME
KNOB KNOB
AM TITLE AM TITLE
BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON
FM FM
BUTTON BUTTON
SCAN SCAN
BUTTON PRESET BUTTON PRESET
BUTTONS BUTTONS
FOLDER BAR SKIP BAR CATEGORY SKIP BAR

SELECTOR A.SEL (AUTO BAR SELECTOR A.SEL (AUTO
KNOB SELECT) BUTTON KNOB SELECT) BUTTON
RETURN BUTTON MENU BUTTON RETURN BUTTON MENU BUTTON
136
To Play the Radio To Select a Station SCAN − The scan function samples
The ignition switch must be in the You can use any of five methods to all stations with strong signals on the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. find radio stations on the selected selected band. To activate it, press
Turn the system on by pushing the band: tune, skip, scan, the preset the SCAN button, then release it.
power/volume knob or the AM or buttons, and auto select. You will see SCAN in the display.
FM button. Adjust the volume by When the system finds a strong
turning the power/volume knob. On the FM band, you can also use signal, it will stop and play that
the features provided by the radio station for about 10 seconds.
Features
The band and frequency that the data system (RDS). For more
radio was last tuned to are displayed. information on the RDS, see page If you do nothing, the system will
To change bands, press the AM or 141 . scan for the next strong station and
FM button. On the FM band, ST will play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
be displayed if the station is TUNE − Use the selector knob to a station that you want to listen to,
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo tune the radio to a desired frequency. press the SCAN button again.
reproduction in AM is not available. Turn the knob right to tune to a
higher frequency, or left to tune to a
On the AM band, AM noise lower frequency.
reduction turns on automatically.
SKIP − The skip function searches
up and down from the current
frequency to find a station with a
strong signal. To activate it, press
and hold the or side of the
SKIP bar until you hear a beep, then
release it.
CONTINUED
137
Preset − Each preset button can AUTO SELECT − If you are To turn off auto select, press the
store one frequency on AM and two traveling and can no longer receive A. SEL (auto select) button. This
frequencies on FM. your preset stations, you can use the restores the presets you originally
auto select feature to find stations in set.
1. Select the desired band, AM or the local area.
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store For information on FM/AM radio
six stations each. Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A-SEL’’ frequencies and reception, see page
flashes in the display, and the system 231 .
2. Use the tune, skip, scan, or RDS goes into scan mode for several
function to tune the radio to a seconds. It stores the frequencies of
desired station. six AM and twelve FM stations in
the preset buttons.
3. Pick a preset button, then press
and hold it until you hear a beep. You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset button if auto
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a select cannot find a strong station for
total of six stations on AM and that preset button.
twelve stations on FM.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons as previously described.
138
Radio Data System (RDS) If the station you are listening to is

On the FM band, you can select a not an RDS station, the display
favorite station and display the continues to show the frequency
program service name provided by with the RDS information display
the radio data system (RDS). function on.
RDS INFO Display When you turn off this function by

The RDS information display pressing the TITLE button, the
Features
function shows the name of the RDS display shows ‘‘RDS INFO OFF.’’
station you are listening to. With the RDS INFO DISPLAY ON
audio system on and the FM band
selected, you can turn this function
on or off.
To switch the function between on
and off, press and release the TITLE
button. With the system on, you will
see the ‘‘RDS INFO ON’’ message on
the display. If the station you are
listening to is an RDS station, the
display shows the station name.
CONTINUED
139
Radio Data System (RDS) Category ALL: All RDS category stations selected RDS category. If you do
ROCK: Rock, classic rock and soft nothing while the RDS category
rock music name is displayed, the selected
RDS CATEGORY COUNTRY: Country music category is canceled.
SOFT: Adult hits and soft music
TOP 40: Top 40 hits RDS Program Search
OLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldies This function searches up and down
R & B: Rhythm and blues, and soft a frequency for the strongest signal
rhythm and blues from the frequencies that carry the
RELIGION: Programs concerned selected RDS category information.
with religion This can help you to find a station in
CLASSIC: Classical music your favorite category. To activate it,
JAZZ: Jazz press and release either side
INFO: News, information, sports, ( or ) of the SKIP bar. You
On the FM band selected, you can talk shows, foreign language, will see the selected RDS category
select the program category personality, public, college, and name blinking while searching it.
provided by the RDS. Press either weather When the system finds a station, the
side (▲ or ▼) of the CATEGORY TRAFFIC: Traffic information selected RDS category name will be
bar (FOLDER bar on models without displayed again for about 5 seconds.
XM Radio) to display and select an Press either side of the CATEGORY
RDS category. The principal RDS bar (FOLDER bar on models without If the system does not find a station,
categories are shown as follows: XM Radio) to select a RDS category. ‘‘NOTHING’’ blinks for about five
The display shows the selected RDS seconds, then the system goes back
category name for about 10 seconds. to the last selected station.
You can use the search or scan
function to find radio stations in the
140
RDS Program SCAN You can use the RDS program Adjusting the Sound
The scan function samples all search or scan function even if the
stations with strong signals on the RDS information display function is Selector knob adjustable
selected RDS category. To activate it, off. direction is shown.
press and release the SCAN button.
You will see SCAN in the display.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal in the selected
Features
RDS category. You will also see the
selected RDS category name
blinking while searching it. When it
finds a strong signal, it will stop and FADER is selectable.
play that station for about 10 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will Press the MENU button to display
scan for the next strong station and the sound settings. Turn the selector
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays knob to select an appropriate setting:
a station that you want to listen to, bass, treble, fader, balance, SUBW
press the SCAN button again. (subwoofer) and SVC (speed-
sensitive volume compensation).
If the system does not find a station, Press the selector knob (ENTER) to
‘‘NOTHING’’ blinks for about five enter the setting, then turn the
seconds, then the system goes back selector knob to adjust the setting.
to the last selected station.
CONTINUED
141
SUBW − Adjusts the strength of Speed-sensitive Volume

sound from the subwoofer speaker. Compensation (SVC)
The SVC mode controls the volume
If the fader adjustment is set to F9 based on vehicle speed. The faster
(maximum front level), the you go, the louder the audio volume
subwoofer is turned off. becomes. As you slow down, the
audio volume decreases.
SVC − Adjusts the volume level
based on the vehicle speed. The SVC has four modes: SVC OFF,
SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
SUBWOOFER is selectable. Each mode is shown in the display as HIGH. Turn the selector knob to
it changes. Turn the selector knob to adjust the setting to your liking. If
adjust the setting to your liking. you feel the sound is too loud,
choose low. If you feel the sound is
BASS − Adjusts the bass. Except SVC adjustment too quiet, choose high.
When the level reaches the center,
TREBLE − Adjusts the treble. you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display. Audio System Lighting
You can use the instrument panel
FADER − Adjusts the front-to-back Wait a few seconds and the display brightness control knob to adjust the
strength of the sound. returns to normal or press the illumination of the audio system (see
RETURN or MENU button. page 73 ). The audio system
BALANCE − Adjusts the side-to- illuminates when the parking lights
side strength of the sound. are on, even if the radio is turned off.
142
Playing the XM Radio (Models without navigation system)
EX-L models
Features
XM RADIO BUTTON TITLE BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME
SCAN BUTTON KNOB
CATEGORY BAR SKIP BAR
RETURN BUTTON MENU BUTTON

SELECTOR KNOB
CONTINUED
143
EX-L models Operating the XM Satellite Radio Each time you press and release the
Your vehicle is capable of receiving To listen to XM Radio, turn the TITLE button, the display changes in
XM Radio anywhere in the United ignition switch to the ACCESSORY the following sequence: name, title,
States and Canada, except Hawaii, (I) or ON (II) position, and press the and category.
Alaska, and Puerto Rico. XM is a button. The last channel you
registered trademark of Sirius XM listened to will show in the display. You can also change the mode from
Radio , Inc. and XM CANADA is a Adjust the volume by turning the the menu items. Press the MENU
registered business name of power/volume knob. button to display the menu items,
Canadian Satellite Radio Inc. then turn the selector knob to select
MODE − To switch between MODE/CATEGORY and press the
XM Radio receives signals from two channel mode and category mode, selector knob (ENTER). Each time
satellites to produce clear, high- press and hold the TITLE button you press and release the selector
quality digital reception. It offers until the mode changes. knob (ENTER), the display changes
many channels in several categories. between CHANNEL and
Along with a large selection of In the channel mode, you can select CATEGORY. To enter the setting,
different types of music, XM Radio all of the available channels. In the press the TITLE button.
allows you to view channel and category mode, such as Jazz, Rock,
category selections in the display. Classical, etc., you can select all of You may experience periods when
the channels within that category. XM Radio does not transmit the
artist’s name and song title
information. If this happens, there is
nothing wrong with your system.
144
TUNE − Turn the selector knob to CATEGORY (▼ or ▲) − Press

change channel selections. Turn the either side of the CATEGORY bar to
knob right for higher numbered select another category.
channels and left for lower
numbered channels. In the category SCAN − The SCAN function gives
mode, you can only select channels you a sampling of all channels while
within that category. in the channel mode. In the category
mode, only the stations within that
Features
category are scanned. To activate
scan, press the SCAN button. The
system plays each channel in
Channel list is shown. numerical order for a few seconds,
then selects the next channel. When
You can also select a channel or you hear a channel you want to
category from the list by using the continue listening to, press the
selector knob. Push the selector button again.
knob (ENTER) to switch the display
to the list displayed with three
segments, then turn the knob to
select a channel or category. Press
the selector knob (ENTER) to set
your selection.
CONTINUED
145
Preset − You can store up to 12 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the ‘‘UPDATING’’ − The encryption
preset channels using the six preset first six channels. code is being updated. Wait until the
buttons. Each button stores one encryption code is fully updated.
channel from the XM1 band and one 5. Press the XM button again. The Channels 0 and 1 should still work
channel from the XM2 band. other XM band will show. Store normally.
the next six channels using steps 2
To store a channel: and 3. ‘‘NO SIGNAL’’ − The signal is
1. Press the button. Either currently too weak. Move the vehicle
XM1 or XM2 will show in the Once a channel is stored, simply to an area away from tall buildings,
display. press and release the proper preset and with an unobstructed view of the
button to tune to it. southern horizon.
2. Use the selector knob, or the
CATEGORY bar or SCAN button XM Radio Display Messages ‘‘ - - - - ’’ − The selected channel
to tune to a desired channel. number does not exist, or is not part
‘‘LOADING’’ − XM is loading the of your subscription, or this channel
In category mode, only channels audio or program information. has no artist or title information at
within that category can be this time.
selected. In channel mode, all ‘‘OFF AIR’’ − The channel
channels can be selected. currently selected is no longer ‘‘NO INFO’’ − The selected
broadcasting. channel has no artist or title
3. Pick the preset button you want information at this time.
for that channel. Press and hold
the button until you hear a beep. ‘‘ANTENNA’’ − There is a problem
with the XM antenna. Please consult
your dealer.
146
The XM satellites are in orbit over

the equator; therefore, objects south Signal may be blocked by Signal weaker in
of the vehicle may cause satellite mountains or large obstacles to these areas.
the south.
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Features
Satellite signals are more likely to be
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator. Carrying SATELLITE
large items on a roof rack can also
block the signal.
Depending on where you drive, you

may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of GROUND REPEATER
these conditions:
Driving on a road beside a vertical Driving on a single lane road
Driving on the north side of an wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south alongside dense trees taller than
east/west mountain road. of you. 50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.
Driving on the north side of a Driving on the lower level of a Large items carried on a roof rack.
large commercial truck on an multi-tiered road.
east/west road.
Driving in tunnels. CONTINUED
147
There may be other geographic Receiving XM Radio Service After you’ve registered with XM
situations that could affect XM Radio If your XM Radio service has expired Radio, keep your audio system in the
reception. or you purchased your vehicle from XM Radio mode while you wait for
a previous owner, you can listen to a activation. This should take about 30
As required by the FCC: sampling of the broadcasts available minutes.
Changes or modifications not expressly on XM Radio. With the ignition
approved by the party responsible for switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or the While waiting for activation, make
compliance could void the user’s ON (II) position, press the sure your vehicle remains in an open
authority to operate the equipment. button. A variety of music area with good reception. Once your
types and styles will play. audio system is activated,
This Category II radiocommunication ‘‘CATEGORY’’ or ‘‘CHANNEL’’ will
device complies with Industry Canada If you decide to purchase XM radio appear in the display, and you’ll be
Standard RSS-310. service, contact XM Radio at able to listen to XM Radio broadcasts.
Operation is subject to the following two www.siriusxm.com, or at XM Radio will continue to send an
conditions: (1) this device may not cause 1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contact activation signal to your vehicle for
interference, and (2) this device must XM CANADA at www.xmradio.ca, or at least 12 hours from the activation
accept any interference, including at 1-877-209-0079. You will need to request. If the service has not been
interference that may cause undesired give them your radio I.D. number activated after 36 hours, contact
operation of the device. and your credit card number. To get XM Radio. In Canada, contact XM
your radio I.D. number, press the CANADA .
button, then turn the
selector knob until ‘‘CH 000’’ appears
in the display. Your I.D. will appear
in the display.
148
Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
Without XM Radio With XM Radio

MP3/WMA INDICATOR MP3/WMA INDICATOR
DISC LOAD DISC LOAD
BUTTON CD BUTTON POWER/VOLUME KNOB BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME KNOB
DISC SLOT TITLE BUTTON DISC SLOT CD/AUX BUTTON

TITLE BUTTON
Features
PRESET PRESET
BUTTONS BUTTONS
DISC DISC
EJECT EJECT
SCAN BUTTON SCAN BUTTON
BUTTON BUTTON
FOLDER BAR SKIP BAR CATEGORY BAR SKIP BAR

SELECTOR SELECTOR
KNOB KNOB
RETURN BUTTON MENU BUTTON RETURN BUTTON MENU BUTTON
149
To Play a Disc This audio system can also play Loading Discs
To load or play discs, the ignition CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in Your vehicle’s in-dash disc changer
switch must be in the ACCESSORY MP3 or WMA formats. The numbers holds up to six discs.
(I) or ON (II) position. of the folder and track playing are
shown in the display on the disc 1. Press the LOAD button until you
You operate the disc changer with player. A disc can support more than hear a beep and see ‘‘LOAD’’ in
the same controls used for the radio. 99 folders, and each folder can hold the display. To load only one disc,
To select the disc changer, press the more than 255 playable files. A disc press and release the LOAD
CD/AUX or CD button. You will see can hold up to 999 files in total. button.
‘‘CD’’ in the display. The disc and
track numbers, and the elapsed time Depending on the software the files 2. The disc number for an empty
are shown in the display. You can were made with, it may not be position begins blinking.
also select the displayed information possible to play some files, or display
with the TITLE button (see page some text data. 3. Insert the disc into the disc slot
153 ). The system will continuously when the green disc load indicator
play a disc until you change modes. Video CDs and DVDs do not work in comes on. Insert it only about
this unit. halfway; the drive will pull it in the
rest of the way. You will see
NOTE: ‘‘BUSY’’ in the display while the
Do not use discs with adhesive labels. If a file on a WMA disc is protected disc load indicator turns red and
The label can curl up and cause the by digital rights management blinks as the disc is loaded.
disc to jam in the unit. (DRM), the audio unit displays
UNSUPPORTED, and then skips to
the next file.
150
You cannot load and play 3-inch Text Data Display Function If the text data has more than 16
(8-cm) discs in this unit. Each time you press the TITLE characters, you will see the first 16
button, the display shows you the characters and the indicator in
4. When the disc load indicator turns text, if the disc was recorded with the display. Press and hold the
green and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in the text data. TITLE button until the next 16
display again, insert the next disc characters are shown. You can see
in the slot. Do not try to insert a You can see the album, artist, and up to 32 characters of the text data.
disc until ‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You track name in the display. If a disc is
Features
could damage the audio unit. recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can If you press and hold the TITLE
see the folder and file name, and the button again, the display shows the
5. Repeat this until all six positions artist, album, and track tag. first 16 characters again.
are loaded. If you are not loading
all six positions, the system begins With the folder name, you will see If any letter is not available, it is
playing the last disc loaded. the FOLDER indicator in the display. replaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the display.
The TRACK indicator is shown with When the disc has no text data, you
You can also load a disc into an the file or track name. will see ‘‘NO INFO’’ on the display.
empty position while a disc is playing
by pressing the appropriate preset When you press and release the
button. The system stops playing the TITLE button while a disc without
current disc and starts the loading text data is playing, you will see ‘‘NO
sequence. It then plays the disc just INFO’’ on the display.
loaded.
The display shows up to 16
characters of selected text data (the
folder name, file name, etc.).
CONTINUED
151
You will also see some text data To Change or Select Tracks/Files Folder Selection
under these conditions: Use the SKIP bar while a disc is
playing to select passages and
When a new folder, file, or track is change tracks (files in MP3 or WMA
selected. mode).
When you change the audio mode In MP3 or WMA mode, use the Press ENTER.
to play a disc with text data or in FOLDER bar (CATEGORY bar on Track Selection
MP3 or WMA. models with XM Radio) to select
folders in the disc and use either
When you insert a disc, and the side of the skip bar to change files.
system begins to play.
To select a different disc, use the
When playing a CD-DA with text appropriate preset buttons (1 In MP3 or WMA mode, you can also
data, the album and track name are through 6). If you select an empty select a folder or track/file from the
shown in the display. With a disc in position, the system will go into the list by using the selector knob. Push
MP3 or WMA, the display shows the loading sequence (see page 152 ). the selector knob (ENTER) to
folder and file name. switch the display to the list
displayed with three segments, then
turn the knob to select a folder.
Press the selector knob (ENTER) to
change the display to the track/file
list, then turn the same knob to
select a track/file. Press the selector
knob (ENTER) to set your selection.
152
SKIP − Each time you press and In MP3 or WMA mode To Select Repeat, Random or Scan
release the side of the SKIP bar, FOLDER SELECTION − To Mode:
the player skips forward to the select a different folder, press either
beginning of the next track (file in side (▲ or ▼) of the FOLDER bar
MP3 or WMA mode). Press and (CATEGORY bar on models with MENU ITEMS
release the side of the bar to XM Radio) to move to the beginning
skip backward to the beginning of of the next folder. Press the ▲ side
the current track. Press it again to to skip to the next folder, and press
Features
skip to the beginning of the previous the ▼ side to skip to the beginning
track. of the previous folder.
To move rapidly within a track or file,

press and hold either side ( or
) of the SKIP bar.
You can select any type of repeat,

random and scan modes by using the
MENU button and the selector knob.
Push the MENU button to display
the menu items, then turn the
selector knob to select ‘‘PLAY
MODE.’’ Press the selector knob
(ENTER) to set the selection.
CONTINUED
153
Turn the selector knob to select an REPEAT ONE TRK − To REPEAT DISC − This feature
appropriate repeat, random or scan continuously replay a track (file in continuously replays the current disc.
mode, then press the selector knob MP3 or WMA mode), select To activate disc repeat, select
(ENTER) to set your selection. REPEAT ONE TRK from the menu REPEAT DISC from the menu items.
items. You will see REPEAT in the You will see D-REPEAT in the
display. Select normal play to turn it display. Select normal play to turn it
off. off.
Pressing either side of the SKIP bar
also turns off the repeat feature. In MP3 or WMA mode
RANDOM IN FLD − This feature,
In MP3 or WMA mode when activated, plays the files within
REPEAT ONE FLD − This feature, the current folder in random order,
when activated, replays all the files rather than in the order they are
on the selected folder in the order compressed in MP3 or WMA. To
PLAY MODE ITEMS
they are compressed in MP3 or activate folder random play, select
WMA. To activate folder repeat RANDOM IN FLD from the menu
mode, select REPEAT ONE FLD items. You will see F-RANDOM in
To cancel the selected mode, press from the menu items. You will see the display. The system will then
the MENU button to show ‘‘PLAY F-REPEAT in the display. The select and play files randomly. This
MODE,’’ then press the selector system continuously replays the continues until you deactivate folder
knob (ENTER). When you see current folder. Select normal play to random play by selecting normal play,
‘‘NORMAL PLAY,’’ press ENTER turn it off. Selecting a different or you select a different folder with
again. folder with the FOLDER bar the FOLDER bar (CATEGORY bar
(CATEGORY bar on models with on models with XM Radio).
XM Radio) also turns off the repeat
feature.
154
RANDOM IN DISC − This feature SCAN TRK − The SCAN function In MP3 or WMA mode
plays the tracks within a disc (the samples all the tracks on the disc in SCAN FLD − This function
files in MP3 or WMA mode) in the order they are recorded on the samples the first file in each folder in
random order. To activate random disc (all files in the selected folder in the order they are stored. To
play, select RANDOM IN DISC from MP3 or WMA mode). To activate the activate the folder scan feature,
the menu items. You will see scan feature, press and release the press and release the SCAN button
RANDOM in the display. Select SCAN button. You will see SCAN in repeatedly. You will see F-SCAN in
normal play to return to normal play. the display. You will get a 10 second the display. You will get a 10 second
Features
sampling of each track/file in the sampling of the first file in each
disc/folder. Press and hold the folder. Press and hold the SCAN
SCAN button to get out of scan button to get out of the folder scan
mode and play the last track sampled. mode and play the last file sampled.
You can also select the scan feature You can also select the folder scan
from the menu items with the feature from the menu items with
selector knob (see page 155 ). the selector knob (see page 155 ).
Pressing either side of the skip bar,

or selecting a different disc (using
the preset buttons) or folder (using
the FOLDER or CATEGORY bar)
turns off the SCAN or F-SCAN
feature.
CONTINUED
155
D-SCAN − This feature, when When the first track on the last disc, To Stop Playing a Disc
activated, samples the first track on or the first file in the last main folder Press the eject button ( ) to
each disc in order (the first file in in the last disc begins to play, the remove the disc. If you eject the disc,
the main folder on each disc in MP3 disc scan mode will be canceled. but do not remove it from the slot,
or WMA mode). To activate the disc Pressing either side of the skip bar the system will automatically reload
scan feature, press and release the or selecting a different folder with the disc after 10 seconds and begin
SCAN button repeatedly until the FOLDER or CATEGORY bar playing.
D-SCAN shows in the display. The also turns off the scan feature.
system will then play the first track/ You can also eject the disc when the
file in the first main folder on the Each time you press and release the ignition switch is off.
first disc for about 10 seconds. If you SCAN button, the mode changes
do nothing, the system will then play from scan, disc scan, then to normal To play the radio when a disc is
the following first track/file for 10 play. playing, press the AM, FM or XM (if
seconds each. When it plays a track/ equipped) button. Press the CD
file that you want to continue In MP3 or WMA mode (CD/AUX on models with XM
listening to, press and hold the Each time you press and release the Radio) button again to switch back to
SCAN button again. SCAN button, the mode changes the disc changer.
from file scan, folder scan, disc scan,
then to normal play. You can also press the MODE
button on the steering wheel to
You can also select the disc scan change modes.
feature from the menu items with
the selector knob (see page 155 ).
156
If you turn the system off while a Removing Discs from the In-dash Protecting Discs
disc is playing, either with the Disc Changer For information on how to handle
power/volume knob or by turning To remove the disc currently in play, and protect compact discs, see page
off the ignition switch, the disc will press the eject button. When a disc is 233 .
stay in the drive. When you turn the removed from a slot, the system
system back on, the disc will begin automatically begins the load
playing where it left off. sequence so you can load another
disc in that position. If you do not
Features
remove the disc from the changer
within 10 seconds, the disc will
reload into the slot. Then the system
returns to the previous mode (AM,
FM, or XM Radio).
To remove a different disc from the

changer, first select it with the
appropriate preset button. When that
disc begins playing, press the eject
button. Continue pressing the eject
button to remove all the discs from
the changer.
You can also eject discs when the

ignition switch is off. The disc that
was last selected is ejected first.
157
Disc Changer Error Messages (Models without navigation system)
The chart on the right explains the

error messages you may see in the Error Message Cause Solution
display while playing a disc.
HEAT ERROR High temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
If you see an error message in the normal.
display while playing a disc, press UNSUPPORTED Track/File format not Current track will be skipped. The next
the eject button. After ejecting the supported supported track or file plays automatically.
disc, check it for damage or BAD DISC Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
deformation. If there is no damage, PLEASE CHECK Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
insert the disc again. OWNERS deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
For additional information on MANUAL PUSH Mechanical error (see page 234). Insert the disc again. If the code
damaged discs, see page 234 . EJECT does not disappear, or the disc cannot be
MECH ERROR removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
The audio system will try to play the CHANGER ERROR force the disc out of the player.
disc. If there is still a problem, the CHECK DISC LOAD
error message will reappear. Press BAD DISC
the eject button, and pull out the disc. PLEASE CHECK Servo error
Insert a different disc. If the new OWNERS
disc plays, there is a problem with MANUAL
the first disc. If the error message Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it, CHECK DISC Disc error deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
take your vehicle to a dealer. (see page 234).
158
Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)
iPod INDICATOR
Features
CD/AUX BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME KNOB
SKIP BAR
SELECTOR KNOB
159
To Play an iPod iPod models confirmed to be This system may not work with all
This audio system can select and compatible with your audio system software versions of these devices.
play the audio files on the iPod with using the USB adapter cable are:
the same controls used for the disc
player. To play an iPod, connect it to Model
the USB adapter cable in the console iPod (5th generation)
compartment by using your dock iPod classic 80 GB/160 GB
connector, then press the CD/AUX iPod classic 120 GB
button. The ignition switch must be iPod classic 160 GB (launch in 2009)
in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) iPod nano
position. The iPod will also be iPod touch
recharged with the ignition switch in
these positions.
The audio system reads and plays

playable sound files on the iPod. The
system cannot operate an iPod as a
mass storage device. The system will
only play songs stored on the iPod
with iTunes.
iPod and iTunes are registered

trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
160
NOTE: Connecting an iPod

Do not connect your iPod using a
hub. USB CONNECTOR DOCK CONNECTOR
Do not keep the iPod in the

vehicle. Direct sunlight and high
heat will damage it.
Features
Do not use an extension cable
between the USB adapter cable
equipped with your vehicle and
your dock connector.
USB ADAPTER CABLE USB CONNECTOR
We recommend backing up your
data before playing it. 1. Pull out the USB connector from 2. Connect your dock connector to
the holder. the iPod correctly and securely.
Some devices cannot be powered
or charged via the USB adapter. If 3. Install the dock connector to the
this is the case, use the accessory USB adapter cable securely.
adapter to supply power to your
device.
CONTINUED
161
If the iPod indicator does not appear Text Data Display Function To Change or Select Files
in the audio display, check the Each time you press the TITLE Use the SKIP bar while an iPod is
connections, and try to reconnect the button the display mode switches playing to select passages and
iPod a few times. between the album name, the song change files.
name, the artist name, or name off
If the audio system still does not (which turns off the text display). SKIP − Each time you press and
recognize the iPod, the iPod may release the side of the SKIP bar,
need to be reset. Follow the If the text data has more than 16 the system skips forward to the
instructions that came with your characters, you will see the first 16 beginning of the next file. Press and
iPod, or you can find reset characters and the indicator in release the side of the bar to
instructions online at www.apple.com/ the display. Press and hold the skip backward to the beginning of
TITLE button until the next 16 the current file. Press it again to skip
characters are shown. You can see to the beginning of the previous file.
up to 32 characters of the text data.
To move rapidly within a file, press
and hold either side ( or )
of the SKIP bar.
Turning the selector knob to the

right or the left also changes the file.
162
To Select a File from iPod Menu Pressing the RETURN button goes
back to the previous display and
pressing the MENU button cancels
this setting mode.
Push ENTER.
Features
You can also select a file from any The display shows items on the
list on the iPod menu: playlists, selected list. Turn the selector knob
artists, albums and songs, by using to select an item, then press ENTER
the selector knob. Push the selector to set your selection.
knob (ENTER) to switch the display
to an iPod menu, then turn the If you select ‘‘ALL,’’ all available files
selector knob to select a desired list. on the selected list are played.
Press ENTER to set your selection.
CONTINUED
163
To Select Repeat or Shuffle Mode: To cancel the selected mode, press

the MENU button and turn the
MENU ITEMS PLAY MODE ITEMS selector knob to show ‘‘PLAY
MODE,’’ then press ENTER. When
you see ‘‘NORMAL PLAY,’’ press
ENTER again.
You can select any type of repeat and Turn the selector knob to select a
shuffle mode by using the MENU play mode: normal play, shuffle off,
button and the selector knob. Press shuffle all, shuffle album, repeat off,
the MENU button to display the or repeat one track, then press
menu items, then turn the selector ENTER to set your selection.
knob to select ‘‘PLAY MODE.’’ Press
ENTER to set the selection.
164
SHUFFLE ALL − This feature REPEAT OFF − This feature turns

plays all available files in a selected off the repeat mode.
list (playlists, artists, albums or
songs) in random order. REPEAT ONE TRK − This
You will see SHUFFLE in the display. feature continuously plays a file. You
Select the normal play mode or will see REPEAT in the display.
SHUFFLE OFF to turn off this Select normal play or REPEAT OFF
feature. to turn it off.
Features
SHUFFLE ALBUM − This feature Pressing either side of the SKIP bar
plays all available albums in a or turning the selector knob changes
selected list (playlists, artists, albums the file while keeping the repeat
or songs) in random order. The files feature.
in each album are played in the
SHUFFLE OFF − This feature recorded order. You will see ALB Pressing either side of the SKIP bar
turns off either of the shuffle modes SHUF in the display. or turning the selector knob changes
(SHUFFLE ALL and SHUFFLE Select the normal play mode or a file while keeping the shuffle
ALBUM). SHUFFLE OFF to turn off this function.
feature.
NOTE:
Available operating functions vary on
models or versions. Some functions
may not be available on the vehicle’s
audio system.
165
To Stop Playing Your iPod Disconnecting an iPod iPod Error Messages

To play the radio, press the AM, FM, You can disconnect the iPod at any If you see an error message in the
or button. Press the CD/ time when you see the ‘‘OK to display, see page 169 .
AUX button to switch between disc disconnect’’ message＊ in the iPod
(if a disc is loaded) and the iPod. display. Always make sure you see
the ‘‘OK to disconnect’’ message in
You can also press the MODE the iPod display before you
button on the steering wheel to disconnect it. Make sure to follow
change modes. the iPod’s instructions on how to
disconnect the dock connector from
the USB adapter cable.
＊ : The displayed message may

vary on models or versions.
On some models, there is no
message to disconnect.
If you reconnect the same iPod, the

system may begin playing where it
left off, depending on what mode the
iPod is in when it is reconnected.
166
iPod Error Messages (Models without navigation system)
If you see an error message on the

audio display while playing an iPod, Error Message Cause Solution
find the solution in the chart to the
right. If you cannot clear the error USB ERROR USB ROM Error There is a problem with the USB adapter unit.
message, take your vehicle to your BAD USB Appears when the overcurrent protection
dealer. DEVICE feature of the system stops supplying power to
PLEASE CHECK Abnormal power USB because an incompatible device is
OWNERS source connected. Disconnect the device. Then, turn
Features
MANUAL the audio system off, and turn it on again. Do
not reconnect the device that caused the error.
iPod NO SONG No files in iPod Appears when the iPod is empty. Store some
files in the iPod.
Appears when an unsupported iPod is
UNSUPPORTED Use of unsupported connected. See page 162 for the specification
VER. iPod information for iPods. If it appears when a
supported iPod is connected, update the iPod
software to the newer version.
CONNECT RETRY Recognition failure of Appears when the system does not
iPod acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.
167
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)
FILE TYPE INDICATOR
USB INDICATOR
CD/AUX BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME KNOB
TITLE BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
168
To Play a USB Flash Memory ＊ : Only AAC format files recorded NOTE:
Device with iTunes are playable on this Do not use a device such as a card
This audio system can select and audio unit. reader or hard drive as the device
play the audio files on a USB flash or your files may be damaged.
memory device with the same The recommended USB flash
controls used for the disc player. To memory devices are 256 MB or Do not connect your USB flash
play a USB flash memory device, higher, and formatted with the FAT memory device using a hub.
connect it to the USB adapter cable file system. Some digital audio
Features
in the console compartment, then players may be compatible as well. Do not use an extension cable to
press the CD/AUX button. The the USB adapter cable equipped
ignition switch must be in the Some USB flash memory devices with your vehicle.
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. (such as devices with security lock-
out features, etc.) will not work in Do not keep a USB flash memory
The audio system reads and plays this audio unit. device in the vehicle. Direct
the audio files on the USB flash sunlight and high heat will damage
memory device in MP3, WMA or it.
AAC＊ formats. Depending on the
format, the display shows MP3, We recommend backing up your
WMA or AAC when a USB flash data before playing a USB flash
memory device is playing. memory device.
CONTINUED
169
Some devices cannot be powered The order of files in USB playback

or charged via the USB adapter. If may be different from the order of
this is the case, use the accessory files displayed in PC or other Combining a low sampling f requency
adapter to supply power to your devices etc. Files are played in the with a low bitrate may result in
device. order stored in USB flash memory extremely degraded sound quality.
device.
Depending on the type and
number of files, it may take some Some versions of MP3, WMA, or
time before they begin to play. AAC format may not be supported. If
an unsupported file is found, the
Depending on the software the audio unit displays UNSUPPORTED,
files were made with, it may not be then skips to the next file.
possible to play some files, or
display some text data.
Depending on the type of

encoding and writing software
used, there may be cases where
character information does not
display properly.
170
Connecting a USB Flash Memory Text Data Display Function

Device Each time you press the TITLE
button, the display mode shows you
USB CONNECTOR in sequence, the folder name, the file
name, the artist name, the album
name, the song name, or name off
(which turns off the text display).
Features
If the text data has more than 16
characters, you will see the first 16
characters and the indicator in
the display. Press and hold the
USB CONNECTOR TITLE button until the next 16
USB ADAPTER CABLE characters are shown. You can see
up to 32 characters of the text data.
1. Pull out the USB connector from 2. Connect the USB flash memory
the holder. device to the USB adapter cable
correctly and securely.
When the USB flash memory device

is connected, the USB indicator is
shown in the display.
CONTINUED
171
To Change or Select Files Folder Selection − To select a To Select a File from Folder and File
Use the SKIP bar while a USB flash different folder, press and release Lists
memory device is playing to select either side of the CATEGORY bar.
passages and change files. Press the ▲ side to skip to the next Folder Selection
folder, and press the ▼ side to skip
SKIP − Each time you press and to the beginning of the previous
release the side of the SKIP bar, folder.
the system skips forward to the
beginning of the next file. Press and Press ENTER.
release the side of the bar to Track Selection
skip backward to the beginning of
the current file. Press it again to skip
to the beginning of the previous file.

and hold either side ( or ) You can also select a folder or file
of the SKIP bar. from the list by using the selector
knob. Push the selector knob
Turning the selector knob to the (ENTER) to switch the display to the
right or the left also changes the file. folder list, then turn the selector
knob to select a folder. Press
ENTER to change the display to the
file list, then turn the same knob to
select a file. Press ENTER to set
your selection.
172
Pressing the RETURN button goes To Select Repeat, Random or Scan Turn the selector knob to select an
back to the previous display and Mode: appropriate repeat, random or scan
pressing the MENU button cancels mode, then press the selector knob
this setting mode. (ENTER) to set your selection.
MENU ITEMS
Features
You can select any type of repeat,
random and scan modes by using the
MENU button and the selector knob. To cancel the selected mode, press
Push the MENU button to display the MENU button and turn the
the menu items, then turn the selector knob to show ‘‘PLAY
selector knob to select ‘‘PLAY MODE,’’ then press ENTER. When
MODE.’’ Press the selector knob you see ‘‘NORMAL PLAY,’’ press
(ENTER) to set the selection. ENTER again.
CONTINUED
173
REPEAT ONE FLD − This feature SCAN TRK − This function

PLAY MODE ITEMS replays all the files on the selected samples all files in the selected
folder in the order they are stored. folder in the order they are stored.
Select normal play to turn it off. To activate the scan feature, press
Pressing either side of the and release the SCAN button. You
CATEGORY bar also turns off this will see SCAN in the display. You will
feature. get a 10 second sampling of each file
in the folder. Press and hold the
RANDOM IN FLD − This feature SCAN button to get out of the scan
plays the files in the selected folder mode and play the last file sampled.
in random order. You will see
F-RANDOM in the display. Select You can also select the scan feature
normal play to turn it off. from the menu items with the
REPEAT ONE TRK − This selector knob (see page 175 ).
feature continuously plays a file. RANDOM ALL − This feature
Select normal play to turn it off. plays all the files in random order.
Pressing either side of the SKIP bar You will see RANDOM in the display.
also turns off this feature. Select normal play to turn it off.
174
SCAN FLD − This function To Stop Playing a USB Flash USB Flash Memory Device Error
samples the first file in each folder in Memory Device Messages
the order they are stored. To To play the radio, press the FM, AM, If you see an error message in the
activate the folder scan feature, or button. Press the CD/ display, see page 178 .
press and release the SCAN button AUX button to switch between disc
repeatedly. You will see F-SCAN in mode (if a disc is loaded) and the
the display. You will get a 10 second USB.
sampling of the first file in each
Features
folder. Press and hold the SCAN You can also press the MODE
button to get out of the folder scan button on the steering wheel to
mode and play the last file sampled. change modes.
You can also select the folder scan If you reconnect the same USB flash
feature from the menu items with memory device, the system will
the selector knob (see page 175 ). begin playing where it left off.
Select normal play to turn either Disconnecting a USB Flash Memory

scan feature off. Pressing either side Device
of the CATEGORY or SKIP bar also You can disconnect the USB flash
turns off the feature. memory device at any time even if
the USB mode is selected on the
audio system. Make sure to follow
the USB flash memory device’s
instructions when you remove it.
175
USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (Models without navigation system)
If you see an error message on the

audio display while playing a USB Error Message Cause Solution
flash memory device, find the
solution in the chart to the right. If USB ERROR USB ROM Error There is a problem with the USB adapter unit.
you cannot clear the error message, BAD USB Appears when the overcurrent protection
take your vehicle to your dealer. DEVICE feature of the system stops supplying power to
Appears when the files in the USB flash
UNPLAYABLE Use of unsupported memory device are DRM or an unsupported
FILE files format. This error message appears for about 3
seconds, then plays the next song.
Appears when the USB flash memory device is
No files in USB flash empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files
USB NO SONG memory device in the USB flash memory device. Save some
MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash
memory device.
Appears when an unsupported device is
Use of unsupported connected. See page 171 for the specification
UNSUPPORTED USB flash memory information for the USB flash memory device.
device If it appears when a supported device is
connected, reconnect the device.
176
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Interface Dial Voice Control System

Most audio system functions can still ENTER
In addition to the standard audio
be controlled by standard buttons, controls, the audio system in your
dials, and knobs, but some functions vehicle can be operated using the
can only be accessed using the voice control system. See the
interface dial. The interface dial has Navigation System Manual for
two parts, a knob and a selector. complete details.
Features
KNOB SELECTOR
The knob turns left and right. Use it

to make selections or adjustments to
a list or menu on the screen.
The selector can be pushed left,

right, up, down, and in. Use the
selector to scroll through lists, to
select menus, and to highlight menu
items. When you make a selection,
press ENTER to go to that selection.
177
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
NAVIGATION SCREEN
POWER/VOLUME KNOB
CENTER DISPLAY
FM/AM BUTTON
SOUND BUTTON

TUNE BAR SCAN/A.SEL
(SCAN/AUTO SELECT) BAR
AUDIO BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL
178
To Play the FM/AM Radio the FM/AM button. You can also To Select a Station
change bands by pushing the You can use any of five methods to
STEREO ICON BAND interface selector up. Each time you find radio stations on the selected
push it up, the band will change to band: tune, skip (seek), scan, the
FM1, FM2, or AM. On the FM bands, preset buttons, and auto select.
STEREO will be shown on the On the FM band, you can also use
navigation screen and ST on the the features provided by the radio
center display, if the station is data system (RDS). For more
Features
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo information on the RDS, see page
reproduction on AM is not available. 184 .
On the AM band, AM noise

reduction turns on automatically.
The ignition switch must be in the

ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position. Press the AUDIO button to
view the audio control display. Turn
the system on by pressing the
power/volume knob or the FM/AM
button. Adjust the volume by turning
the power/volume knob.
The band and frequency that the

radio was last tuned to are shown on
the display. To change bands, press CONTINUED
179
SKIP (SEEK) − The skip (seek)

SCAN ICON
function searches up and down from
the current frequency to find a
station with a strong signal. To
activate it, press either side ( or
) of the SKIP bar, then release
it. You can also activate the skip
function (SEEK is displayed on the
screen) by pushing the interface
selector to the right or left.
TUNE ICON
TUNE − Use the TUNE bar to tune SCAN − The SCAN function
the radio to a desired frequency. samples all stations with strong
Press the right side of the bar to signals on the selected band. To
tune to a higher frequency, or the activate it, press the SCAN side of
left side to tune to a lower frequency. the SCAN/A.SEL bar, then release it.
To tune with the interface dial, push
the selector down, and turn the knob To scan with the interface dial, push
to the TUNE icon. Then press the selector down, and then push it
ENTER on the selector, and turn the to the right. You will see SCAN
knob to the desired frequency. To flashing on the screen.
exit the TUNE mode, press ENTER
on the selector, then push the
selector up.
180
When the system finds a strong 2. Use the tune, skip (seek), scan, or
A.SEL ICON
signal, it will stop and play that RDS function to tune the radio to a
station for about 10 seconds. If you desired station.
do nothing, the system will then scan
for the next strong station and play it 3. Press the preset button, and hold
for 10 seconds. When it plays a it until you hear a beep. You can
station that you want to listen to, also store frequencies with the
press the scan side of the bar again, interface dial. Select the preset
Features
or push the interface selector to the icon you want to store the
right again. frequency on, then press ENTER
on the interface selector, and hold PRESET ICON
Preset − Each preset button or it for more than 2 seconds. A.SEL ICON
preset icon can store one frequency
on AM and two frequencies on FM. 4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a AUTO SELECT − If you are
total of six stations on AM and traveling and can no longer receive
To store a preset memory location: twelve stations on FM. your preset stations, you can use the
1. Select the desired band, AM or auto select feature to find stations in
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store the local area.
two sets of FM frequencies with
the preset buttons (on-screen Push the interface selector down to
icons). scroll down the screen, highlight
A.SEL, then press ENTER on the
interface selector. You will see
A.SEL on the screen, and the system
goes into scan mode for several
seconds. CONTINUED
181
To turn off auto select, press ENTER To turn off auto select, press the Radio Data System (RDS)
on the interface selector. A. SEL side of the bar. This restores On the FM band, you can select a
the presets you originally set. favorite station and display the
You can also press the A.SEL side of program service name provided by
the SCAN/A.SEL bar. You will see For information on FM/AM radio the radio data system (RDS).
A.SEL on the screen, and the system frequencies and reception, see page
goes into scan mode for several 231 . RDS INFO Display
seconds. The system stores the The RDS INFO display function
frequencies of six AM and twelve shows the name of the station you
FM stations in the preset buttons. are listening to. With the audio
system on and the FM band selected,
You will see ‘‘0’’ displayed if auto you can turn this function on or off.
select cannot find a strong station for
every preset button.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons (icons) as previously
described.
182
If the station you are listening to is Radio Data System (RDS) Category
not an RDS station, the audio screen
and the center display continue to
show the frequency.
When you turn off this function by

pressing the TITLE button, the
center display shows ‘‘RDS INFO
Features
OFF.’’
RDS INFO DISPLAY ON
RDS SEARCH ICON

To switch the function between on
and off, press and release the TITLE With the FM band selected, you can
button. With the system on, you will select the program type provided by
see the ‘‘RDS INFO ON’’ message on the RDS. Press the AUDIO button to
the display. If the station you are display the radio information on the
listening to is an RDS station, the screen. Push down the selector on
display shows the station name. the interface dial, then turn the knob
to select RDS SEARCH icon. Press
ENTER to set your selection. The
principal RDS categories are shown
as follows:
CONTINUED
183
ALL: All RDS category stations

ROCK: Rock, classic rock and soft
rock music
COUNTRY: Country music
SOFT: Adult hits and soft music
TOP 40: Top 40 hits
OLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldies
R & B: Rhythm and blues, and soft
rhythm and blues
RELIGION: Programs concerned
with religion
CLASSIC: Classical music RDS CATEGORY
JAZZ: Jazz RDS CATEGORY U.S. model is shown.
INFO: News, information, sports,
talk shows, foreign language, Turn the selector to select an RDS You can also select an RDS category
personality, public, college, and category. You can use the search or with the CATEGORY bar. Press
weather scan function to find radio stations either side (▲ or ▼) of the
TRAFFIC: Traffic information on the selected RDS category by CATEGORY bar to display an RDS
pressing the selector to the right category in the center display. Select
repeatedly. Press ENTER to set your a category by pressing either side of
selection. If you do nothing while the the bar.
RDS category is selected, the
selected category is canceled.
184
RDS Program Search

SEEK/SCAN ICON
Turn the knob to the desired RDS
This function searches up and down category.
a frequency for the strongest signal
from the frequencies that carry the While the RDS category is selected,
selected RDS category information. move the selector knob to the right
This can help you to find a station in to select SEEK in the upper right
your favorite category. To activate it, corner of the screen. Then press
press and release either side ENTER to activate the seek function.
Features
( or ) of the SKIP bar. You
will also see the selected RDS RDS Program SCAN
category name blinking in the center RDS CATEGORY LIST The scan function samples all
display while searching it. When the SEEK is selected. stations with strong signals on the
system finds a station, the selected selected RDS category. To activate it,
RDS category name will be displayed To activate RDS program search press and release the SCAN side of
again for about 5 seconds in the with the interface dial, push the the SCAN/A.SEL bar. You will see
center display. AUDIO button to display the FM SCAN in the center display. The
radio information on the screen. system will scan for a station with a
If the system does not find a station, Push the selector down, and turn the strong signal in the selected RDS
‘‘NOTHING’’ blinks for about five knob to select the RDS SEARCH category. You will also see the
seconds, then the system goes back icon. Press ENTER on the selector. selected RDS category name
to the last selected station. The screen shows you the RDS blinking in the center display while
program category list. searching it. When the system finds
one, it will stop and play that station
for about 10 seconds.
CONTINUED
185
If you do nothing, the system will SEEK/SCAN ICON

Turn the knob to the desired RDS
scan for the next strong station and category.
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to, While the RDS category is selected,
press the SCAN side of the SCAN/ move the selector knob to the right
A.SEL bar again. to select SCAN in the upper right
corner of the screen. Then press
If the system does not find a station, ENTER to activate the scan function.
‘‘NOTHING’’ blinks for about five
seconds, then the system goes back You can use the RDS program
to the last selected station. RDS CATEGORY LIST search or scan function even if the
SCAN is selected. RDS information display function is
off. In this case, the display shows a
To activate RDS program scan with frequency in place of a RDS station
the interface dial, push the AUDIO name.
button to display the FM radio
information on the screen. Push the
selector down, and turn the knob to
select the RDS SEARCH icon. Press
ENTER on the selector. The screen
shows you the RDS category list.
186
Radio Text Display

This function displays the radio text TEXT INDICATOR
information of the selected RDS
station.
If the selected RDS station has the

radio text information, you will see The text is displayed according
to the information from RDS.
the text indicator on the screen.
Features
RADIO TEXT ICON
To activate radio text display, use The display shows up to 64

the interface dial. Push the selector characters on the selected RDS
down, and turn the knob to select station.
RADIO TEXT icon. Press ENTER on
the selector to enter the setting.
187
Adjusting the Sound

BASS, TREBLE, FADER, and
BALANCE are each adjustable. You
can also adjust the strength of the
sound coming from the subwoofer
speaker. In addition, you can set the
speed-sensitive volume
compensation (SVC).
These adjustments can be made by

the SOUND button or the interface
dial. SOUND ICON
To adjust them, press the AUDIO You can also adjust the sound by
button, push the interface selector pushing the SOUND button
down, and turn the interface knob to repeatedly. Each mode is shown in
SOUND. Then press ENTER on the the center display as it changes.
selector. Turn the power/volume knob to
adjust the setting to your liking.
Select the mode you want to adjust When the level reaches the center,
by turning the interface dial. you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.
The system will return to the audio
playing mode in the center display
about 10 seconds after you stop
adjusting a mode.
188
BASS/TREBLE − To adjust bass SUBWOOFER − To adjust the Speed-sensitive Volume

and treble, select BASS or TREBLE, strength of the sound from the Compensation (SVC)
and press ENTER on the interface subwoofer speaker, select it and The SVC mode controls the volume
selector. The current setting is press ENTER on the interface based on vehicle speed. The faster
shown on the display. Turn the selector. Turn the interface knob to you go, the louder the audio volume
interface knob to the desired level, the desired level, and enter your becomes. As you slow down, the
and enter your selection by pressing selection by pressing ENTER on the audio volume decreases.
ENTER on the interface selector. interface selector.
Features
The SVC has four modes: SVC OFF,
FADER/BALANCE − These If the fader adjustment is set to F9 SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
modes adjust the strength of the (maximum front level), the HIGH. To change the SVC mode,
sound coming from each speaker. subwoofer is turned off. select SVC, then press ENTER on
Fader adjusts the front-to-back the interface selector. The current
strength, while balance adjusts the setting is shown on the screen. Turn
side-to-side strength. To adjust fader the interface knob to the desired
and balance, select FADER or level, and enter your selection by
BALANCE, then press ENTER on pressing ENTER on the interface
the interface selector. The current selector. If you feel the sound is too
setting is shown on the screen. Turn loud, choose low. If you feel the
the interface knob to the desired sound is too quiet, choose high.
level, and enter your selection by
pressing ENTER on the interface
selector. To equalize the fader or
balance, turn the interface knob until
the marks on the sound grid come to
the center of the adjustment bar.
189
Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)
XM RADIO BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON POWER/VOLUME KNOB
PRESET BUTTONS
TUNE BAR SCAN/A.SEL
AUDIO BUTTON INTERFACE DIAL
190
Your vehicle is capable of receiving Operating the XM Radio Push the AUDIO button to display
XM Radio anywhere in the United XM information on the screen. You
States and Canada, except Hawaii, can operate the XM Radio system
Alaska, and Puerto Rico. XM is a with the interface dial.
registered trademark of Sirius XM
Radio , Inc. and XM CANADA is a
registered business name of
Canadian Satellite Radio Inc.
Features
XM Radio receives signals from two
satellites to produce clear, high-
quality digital reception. It offers
many channels in several categories.
Along with a large selection of
different types of music, XM Radio To listen to XM Radio, turn the
also allows you to view channel and ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
category selections in the audio (I) or ON (II) position, and press the
display. button. The last channel you
listened to will show in the audio
screen and the center display. Adjust
the volume by turning the power/
volume knob.
CONTINUED
191
MODE − To switch between the On the screen, you will see the CHANNEL LIST − Push down the
category mode and channel mode, selected CHANNEL (number), interface selector to select AUDIO
press and hold the TITLE button CATEGORY, NAME (artist name), MENU, then turn the interface knob
until the mode changes. The and TITLE (music title). to select CHANNEL LIST and press
CATEGORY or CHANNEL mode is ENTER on the selector. Turn the
displayed on the screen. To switch TUNE − Press either side of the interface knob to select a channel,
the mode with the interface dial, TUNE bar to change channel then press ENTER to set your
push down the interface selector to selections. Press the side of the selection.
select AUDIO MENU, then turn the bar for higher numbered channels
knob to select MODE, and press and the side for lower
ENTER on the selector repeatedly. numbered channels. You can also
change channels with the interface
In the category mode, such as Jazz, selector, push down the interface
Rock, Classical, etc., you can selector to select AUDIO MENU,
navigate through all of the channels then turn the interface knob to
within that category. In the channel choose TUNE and press ENTER on
mode, you can select all of the the selector. Turn the interface knob
available channels. to the appropriate direction. In the
category mode, you can only select
Each time you press and release the channels within that category.
TITLE button, the center display
changes in the following sequence:
NAME (artist name), TITLE (music
title), and CHANNEL NAME
(channel name).
192
CATEGORY (▼ or ▲) − Press 2. Use the tune, skip (seek), or scan

either side of the bar to select function to tune to a desired
another category. You can also channel.
XM BAND
change a category by pushing the
interface selector left or right. In category mode, only channels
within that category can be
SCAN − The scan function gives selected. In channel mode, all
you a sampling of all channels while channels can be selected.
Features
in the channel mode. In the category
mode, only the channels within that 3. Pick the preset button you want
category are scanned. To activate for that channel. Press and hold
SCAN, press the SCAN side of the the preset button until you hear a
SCAN/A.SEL bar. To scan with the beep. You can also pick the
interface dial, scroll down, and push number with the interface dial.
the interface selector to the right. Preset − You can store up to 12 Select your desired number and
You will see SCAN on the screen and preset channels using the six preset press and hold ENTER on the
center display. buttons. Each button stores one interface selector.
channel from the XM1 band and one
The system plays each channel in channel from the XM2 band. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
numerical order for a few seconds, first six channels.
then selects the next channel. When To store a channel:
you hear a channel you want to 1. Press the button or scroll
continue listening to, push the up by pushing the interface
interface selector to the right again selector up. Either XM1 or XM2
or press the SCAN side of the bar to will be shown on the display.
cancel. CONTINUED
193
5. Press the button or scroll XM Radio Display Messages away from tall
up again. The other XM band will buildings, and
be shown. Store the next six with an
channels using steps 2 and 3. ‘‘LOADING’’ − XM is loading the unobstructed view
audio or program of the southern
Once a channel is stored, press information. horizon.
and release the proper preset
button to tune to it. ‘‘OFF AIR’’ − The channel ‘‘ - - - - ’’ − The selected channel
currently selected is number does not exist, or
no longer is not part of your
broadcasting. subscription, or this
channel has no artist or
‘‘UPDATING’’ − The encryption title information at this
code is being time.
updated. Wait
until the ‘‘NO INFO’’ − The selected
encryption code is channel has no artist
fully updated. or title information
Channels 0 and 1 at this time.
should still work
normally. ‘‘ANTENNA’’ − There is a problem
with the XM
‘‘NO SIGNAL’’ − The signal is antenna. Please
currently too consult your dealer.
weak. Move the
vehicle to an area
194
The XM satellites are in orbit over

Signal may be blocked by Signal weaker in
the equator; therefore, objects south
mountains or large obstacles to these areas. of the vehicle may cause satellite
the south. reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Satellite signals are more likely to be
Features
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator.
Depending on where you drive, you

may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of
these conditions:
SATELLITE
Driving on the north side of an
east/west mountain road.
Driving on the north side of a

large commercial truck on an
east/west road.
GROUND REPEATER Driving in tunnels.
CONTINUED
195
Driving on a road beside a vertical Receiving XM Radio Service After you’ve registered with XM
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south If your XM Radio service has expired Radio, keep your audio system in the
of you. or you purchased your vehicle from XM Radio mode while you wait for
Driving on the lower level of a a previous owner, you can listen to a activation. This should take about 30
multi-tiered road. sampling of the broadcasts available minutes.
Driving on a single lane road on XM Radio. With the ignition
alongside dense trees taller than switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or the While waiting for activation, make
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you. ON (II) position, press the sure your vehicle remains in an open
There may be other geographic button. A variety of music area with good reception. Once your
situations that could affect XM Radio types and styles will play. audio system is activated, CAT
reception. (category) or CH (channel) will
If you decide to purchase XM radio appear in the center display, and
As required by the FCC: service, contact XM Radio at you’ll be able to listen to XM Radio
Changes or modifications not expressly www.siriusxm.com, or at broadcasts. XM Radio will continue
approved by the party responsible for 1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contact to send an activation signal to your
compliance could void the user’s XM CANADA at www.xmradio.ca, or vehicle for at least 12 hours from the
authority to operate the equipment. at 1-877-209-0079. You will need to activation request. If the service has
This Category II radiocommunication give them your radio I.D. number not been activated after 36 hours,
device complies with Industry Canada and your credit card number. To get contact XM Radio. In Canada,
Standard RSS-310. your radio I.D. number, press the contact XM CANADA .
Operation is subject to the following two side of the TUNE bar until ‘‘0’’
conditions: (1) this device may not cause appears in the display. Your I.D. will
interference, and (2) this device must appear in the display.
accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
196
Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
NAVIGATION SCREEN
Features
CENTER DISPLAY
POWER/VOLUME KNOB
TITLE BUTTON CD BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
SKIP BAR
SCAN/A.SEL
CATEGORY BAR (SCAN/AUTO SELECT) BAR
DISC LOAD BUTTON DISC EJECT BUTTON
DISC SLOT
AUDIO BUTTON INTERFACE DIAL

CONTINUED
197
Your vehicle’s audio system has an The disc packages or jackets should NOTE:
in-dash disc changer with the same have one of these marks. If a file on a WMA disc is protected
controls used for the radio. To by digital rights management
operate the disc changer, the ignition (DRM), the audio unit displays
switch must be in the ACCESSORY UNSUPPORTED, and then skips to
(I) or the ON (II) position. the next file.
The disc changer can play these disc Video CDs and DVDs do not work in
formats: this unit.
CD (CD-DA)
MP3/WMA Some CD-DA and CD-ROM mixed
discs are not playable.
You cannot load and play 3-inch

(8-cm) discs in this system.
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.

The changer can also play MP3 or The label can curl up and cause the
WMA format (see page 206 ). disc to jam in the unit.
When playing a disc in MP3, you will

see ‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMA
format, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in the
display.
198
Loading Discs in the Changer 4. Repeat this until all six positions Do not try to insert a disc until
To load multiple discs in one are loaded. If you are not loading ‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You could damage
operation: all six positions, the system will the audio unit.
then begin playing the last disc
1. With the ignition in the loaded. You can select the position to load a
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) disc. Turn the interface knob or
position, press and hold the LOAD If you stop loading discs before all press a preset button to select the
button until you hear a beep and six positions are filled, the system position, then press ENTER on the
Features
see ‘‘LOAD’’ in the center display, will wait for 10 seconds, stop the load selector. This starts the loading
then release the button. operation, and begin playing the last sequence. If you do not select the
disc loaded. position, the system loads the disc to
2. Insert a disc into the slot. Insert it the first empty position in numerical
only about halfway; the drive will To load a single disc: order.
pull it in the rest of the way. You 1. Press and release the LOAD
will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in the center button. If you press the LOAD button while
display. When you insert the first a disc is playing, the system will stop
disc, the changer will start to play 2. ‘‘NO DISC’’ is shown on the screen playing that disc and start the
the disc. for an empty position in the loading sequence. It will then play
changer. When the green load the disc just loaded.
3. When ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in the indicator comes on and you see
center display again, insert the ‘‘LOAD’’ in the center display,
next disc into the slot. insert the disc into the slot. Insert
Do not try to insert a disc until it only about halfway; the drive will
‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You could pull it in the rest of the way.
damage the audio unit.
199
To Play a Disc The player can play CD-TEXT, MP3, To Change Tracks
and WMA formats. Each time you press and release the
side of the skip bar or push the
When you play CD-TEXT, you will interface selector to the right, the
see the track name, artist name, and player skips forward to the
album name on the screen. When beginning of the next track. Press
you play MP3/WMA discs, you will and release the side of the skip
see the track name and folder name bar or push the interface selector to
on the screen. If the disc was not the left to skip backward to the
recorded with this information, it will beginning of the current track. Press
not be displayed. the side or push the interface
selector to the left again to skip to
CURRENT DISC the previous track. To move rapidly
within a track, press and hold either
Select the changer by pressing the side of the skip bar.
CD button. The system will begin
playing the last selected disc in the
disc changer. You will see the
current disc position highlighted.
To select a different disc, press the

corresponding number on the preset
buttons, or turn the interface knob to
highlight the desired disc number,
then press ENTER on the interface
selector.
200
To Choose a Track To exit the track list display, press Disc Scan
the AUDIO button, or push the When you press the SCAN side of
interface selector to the left. the SCAN/A. SEL bar repeatedly
until you see D-SCAN in the center
Track Scan display, or push the interface
When you press the SCAN side of selector to the right, the first track of
the SCAN/A. SEL bar or scroll down the current disc plays for about 10
and push the interface selector to seconds. You will see SCAN next to
Features
the left, the next track of the current DISC on the screen. The disc
track plays for about 10 seconds. number is blinking and SCAN is also
You will see SCAN next to TRACK shown in the center display. To listen
on the screen and center display. To to the rest of the disc, press and hold
listen to the rest of the track, press the SCAN side of the bar until you
and hold the SCAN side of the bar hear a beep, or push the interface
You can also choose a track directly until you hear a beep or push the selector to the right again within 10
from a track list. Press ENTER on interface selector to the left again seconds.
the interface selector, and the track within 10 seconds.
list screen will be shown. If there are If you don’t, the system advances to
no track names, track numbers are If you don’t, the system advances to the next disc, plays about 10 seconds
displayed. You will see the current the next track, plays about 10 of its first track, and continues
track is highlighted. Turn the seconds of it, and continues through through the rest of the discs the
interface knob to select the desired the rest of the tracks the same way. same way. When the system reaches
track, then press ENTER on the the last disc, DISC SCAN is canceled,
interface selector. and that disc continues to play.
201
To Select Repeat or Random Track Repeat

Mode: To replay the current track
continuously, select TRACK
REPEAT, and press ENTER on the
interface selector. As a reminder,
you will see REPEAT next to
TRACK on the screen. To turn this
feature off, highlight TRACK
REPEAT (if not already highlighted),
and press ENTER on the interface
selector again.
Push down the selector. AUDIO MENU SCREEN
You can select any type of repeat and Turn the interface knob to select a
random modes by using the desired repeat or random mode, then
interface dial. press ENTER to set your selection.
Push the AUDIO button to display
the audio information on the screen, To cancel the selected repeat or
then scroll down by pushing down random mode, have the selected
the selector to select the audio menu. mode highlighted, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
202
Disc Repeat Random Play To Stop Playing a Disc

To replay the current disc To play the tracks on the current To take the system out of disc mode,
continuously, select DISC REPEAT, disc in random order, select TRACK press the FM/AM button, the
and press ENTER on the interface RANDOM, and press ENTER on the button, or the AUX button (if
selector. As a reminder, you will see interface selector. As a reminder, an appropriate unit is connected). To
REPEAT next to DISC on the screen. you will see RANDOM next to return to disc mode, press the CD
To turn this feature off, highlight TRACK on the screen. To turn this button.
DISC REPEAT (if not already feature off, highlight TRACK
Features
highlighted), and press ENTER on RANDOM (if not already You can also press the MODE
the interface selector again. highlighted), and press ENTER on button on the steering wheel to
the interface selector again. change modes.
If you turn the system off while a

disc is playing, either with the
power/volume knob or the ignition
switch, play will continue at the same
point when you turn it back on.
203
Playing an MP3/WMA Disc Depending on the software the files Changing the Folders
The changer plays MP3/WMA discs were made with, it may not be While playing an MP3/WMA disc,
in recorded order. Maximum possible to play some files, or display you can select a folder within the
playable file layers are 8, and total some text data. disc by pressing either side of the
playable tracks are 255. If your disc category bar. Each time you press
has a complex structure, the changer To play an MP3/WMA disc, use the either side of the bar, the folder title
takes some time to read the disc disc controls previously described, and its first file’s information appear
before beginning play. along with the following information. in the display in recorded order.
204
Changing and Selecting the Folders/

Files
CURRENT TRACK
Features
MP3/WMA INDICATOR CURRENT FOLDER
Using the interface selector, you can Push ENTER on the selector to You can see the list of all the files in
see the list of all the files and folders show the folder list. Turn the the selected folder. Turn the selector
within a disc. While playing a MP3/ selector knob, highlight the folder knob, then press ENTER to set your
WMA disc, press the AUDIO button. you want to see the information selection.
The currently playing folder and file within, and press ENTER.
information comes on the screen. If the root folder has some additional
folders in the lower layer, they will
be listed on the screen.
205
Folder Scan Folder Repeat Folder Random

This feature, when activated, This feature, when activated, replays This feature, when activated, plays
samples the first file in each folder all files in the selected folder. To all files in the current folder in
for 10 seconds. To scan a folder, activate folder repeat mode, select random order. To activate folder
press the SCAN side of the SCAN/ FOLDER REPEAT by using the random play, select FOLDER
A. SEL bar repeatedly. You will see interface knob, and press ENTER on RANDOM by using the interface
SCAN next to FOLDER and the the interface selector. You will see knob, and press ENTER on the
folder number blinking. REPEAT next to FOLDER on the interface selector. You will see
screen. To turn this feature off, RANDOM next to FOLDER on the
To listen to the rest of the folder, highlight FOLDER REPEAT (if not screen. To turn this feature off,
press and hold the SCAN side of the already highlighted), and press highlight FOLDER RANDOM (if not
bar until you hear a beep. If you do ENTER on the interface selector already highlighted), and press
nothing, the system advances to the again. ENTER on the interface selector
next folder, plays 10 seconds of it, again.
and continues with the remaining To select any type of the repeat
folders in the same way. When the modes, use the interface dial. For To select any type of the random
system has finished sampling the more information, see page 204 . modes, use the interface dial. For
first file in all folders, folder scan is more information, see page 204 .
canceled, and the last file played
continues to play.
206
Removing Discs from the To remove a different disc from the You can also eject discs when the
Changer changer, first select it by pressing ignition switch is off:
To remove the disc that is currently the corresponding number on the To eject one disc, press and release
playing, press the eject button. You preset button or turning the the eject button.
will see ‘‘EJECT’’ in the center interface knob, and pressing ENTER To eject all discs, press and hold the
display. When you remove the disc on the interface selector. When that eject button until the first disc begins
from the slot, the system disc begins playing, press the eject to eject.
automatically enters the previous button.
Features
mode AM, FM1, FM2, or XM Radio.
The system also begins the load When you press the eject button
sequence so you can load another while listening to the radio, or with
disc. If you do not load another disc, the audio system turned off, the disc
the load sequence is canceled, and that was last selected is ejected.
the system continues playing in the After that disc is ejected, pressing
previous mode. the eject button again will eject the
next disc in numerical order. By
If you do not remove the disc from doing this six times, you can remove
the slot, the system will reload the all the discs from the changer.
disc after 10 seconds. To begin
playing the disc, press the CD button.
207
Disc Changer Error Messages (Models with navigation system)
The chart on the right explains the

error messages you may see in the Error Message Cause Solution
center display while playing a disc.
HEAT ERROR High Temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
If you see an error message in the normal.
center display while playing a disc, UNSUPPORTED Track/File format not Current track will be skipped. The next
press the eject button. After ejecting supported supported track or file plays automatically.
the disc, check it for damage or BAD DISC Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc(s).
deformation. If there is no damage, PLEASE CHECK Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
insert the disc again. OWNERS Mechanical Error deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
For additional information on MANUAL (see page 234). Insert the disc again. If the code
damaged discs, see page 234 . PUSH EJECT does not disappear, or the disc(s) cannot be
MECH ERROR removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
The audio system will try to play the BAD DISC force the disc out of the player.
disc. If there is still a problem, the PLEASE CHECK Servo Error
error message will reappear. Press OWNERS
the eject button, and pull out the disc. MANUAL
Insert a different disc. If the new Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
disc plays, there is a problem with CHECK DISC Disc Error deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
the first disc. If the error message (see page 234).
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
208
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
NAVIGATION SCREEN
Features
iPod INDICATOR CENTER DISPLAY
POWER/VOLUME KNOB
AUX BUTTON
MAP BUTTON SKIP BAR
CANCEL BUTTON
AUDIO BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL
209
To Play an iPod The audio system reads and plays iPod models confirmed to be
This audio system can operate the playable sound files on the iPod. The compatible with your audio system
audio files on the iPod with the system cannot operate an iPod as a using the USB adapter cable are:
same controls used for the in-dash mass storage device. The system will
disc changer. To play an iPod, only play songs stored on the iPod Model
connect it to the USB adapter cable with iTunes. iPod (5th generation)
in the console compartment by using iPod classic 80 GB/160 GB
your dock connector, then press the iPod and iTunes are registered iPod classic 120 GB
AUX button. The ignition switch trademarks owned by Apple Inc. iPod classic 160 GB (launch in 2009)
must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or iPod nano
ON (II) position. The iPod will also Voice Control System iPod touch
be recharged with the ignition switch You can select the AUX mode by
in these positions. using the navigation system voice This system may not work with all
control buttons, but cannot operate software versions of these devices.
the play mode functions.
210
NOTE: Connecting an iPod

Do not connect your iPod using a
hub. USB CONNECTOR
USB CONNECTOR
Do not keep the iPod in the
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high
heat will damage it.
Features
Do not use an extension cable
between the USB adapter cable
equipped with your vehicle and
your dock connector.
USB ADAPTER CABLE DOCK CONNECTOR
We recommend backing up your
data before playing it. 1. Pull out the USB connector from 2. Connect your dock connector to
the holder. the iPod correctly and securely.
or charged via the USB adapter. If 3. Install the dock connector to the
this is the case, use the accessory USB adapter cable securely.
device.
CONTINUED
211
If the iPod indicator does not appear The current file number and total of To Change or Select Files
in the audio display, check the the selected playable files are Use the SKIP bar while an iPod is
connections, and try to reconnect the displayed in the center display. playing to select passages and
iPod a few times. Pressing the AUDIO button displays change files.
the artist, album and track (file)
If the audio system still does not names on the navigation screen. SKIP − Each time you press and
recognize the iPod, the iPod may release the side of the SKIP bar,
need to be reset. Follow the the system skips forward to the
instructions that came with your beginning of the next file. Press and
iPod, or you can find reset release the side of the bar to
instructions online at www.apple.com/ skip backward to the beginning of
the current file. Press it again to skip

and hold either side ( or )
of the SKIP bar.
212
To Select a File from iPod Menu
Features
You can also change files with the
interface dial. Press the AUDIO You can also select a file from any of Push ENTER on the selector to
button to show the audio control the iPod menus: playlists, artists, display the items on that list, then
display on the navigation screen. albums and songs, by using the turn the knob on the interface dial to
Push the selector to the right side to interface dial. Press the AUDIO select a desired list. Pushing the
skip forward and to the left side to button to display the audio control selector up or down moves a
skip backward. display on the navigation screen. selection to the top or bottom of the
Push up the interface selector to screen items. Press ENTER to set
display the iPod menu. Turn the your selection.
knob on the interface dial to select a
desired list.
CONTINUED
213
If you select ‘‘ALL’’ on either the To Select Repeat or Random Mode: To cancel the selected mode, press
artists or albums list, all available ENTER again while the highlighted
files on the selected list are played. mode is selected on the audio control
display.
Press the AUDIO button to go back
to the normal audio playing display.
Pressing the CANCEL button goes
back to the previous screen, and
pressing the MAP button cancels the
audio control display on the screen.
Push down the selector.
You can select any type of repeat and

random mode on the audio menu.
Press the AUDIO button to display
the audio control screen, then push
down the selector to display the
audio menu. Turn the knob on the
interface dial to select an audio
mode: repeat, album random, and
track random. Press ENTER to set
your selection.
214
TRACK RANDOM − This feature

plays all available files from the
selected items in the iPod menu list
(playlists, artists, albums or songs)
in random order. You will see
TRACK RANDOM on the screen.
To turn it off, have this mode
Features
highlighted and press ENTER again.
REPEAT − This feature ALBUM RANDOM − This feature

continuously plays a file. plays all available albums from the
To turn it off, press ENTER again. selected items in the iPod menu list
(playlists, artists, albums or songs)
Pressing either side of the SKIP bar in random order. The files in each
changes the file while keeping the album are played in the recorded
repeat feature. order. You will see ALBUM
RANDOM on the screen.
CONTINUED
215
To turn it off, have this mode To Stop Playing Your iPod Disconnecting an iPod
highlighted and press ENTER again. To play the radio, press the FM/AM, You can disconnect the iPod at any
or button. Press the CD button time when you see the ‘‘OK to
You can also select another list from to switch to the disc mode. Press the disconnect’’ message＊ in the iPod
the iPod menu while keeping the AUX button to switch back to the display. Always make sure you see
random function. iPod. the ‘‘OK to disconnect’’ message in
the iPod display before you
NOTE: disconnect it. Make sure to follow
Available operating functions vary on the iPod’s instructions on how to
models or versions. Some functions disconnect the dock connector from
may not be available on the vehicle’s the USB adapter cable.
audio system.
＊ : The displayed message may
vary on models or versions. On
some models, there is no
message to disconnect.
When you disconnect the iPod while

it is playing, the center display and
the audio screen (if selected) show
NO DATA.
216
If you reconnect the same iPod, the iPod Error Messages

system may begin playing where it If you see an error message in the
left off, depending on what mode the center display, see page 220 .
iPod is in when it is reconnected.
Features
217
iPod Error Messages (Models with navigation system)
If you see an error message in the

center display while playing an iPod, Error Message Cause Solution
find the solution in the chart to the
right. If you cannot clear the error USB ERROR USB ROM error There is a problem with the USB adapter unit.
message, take your vehicle to your BAD USB Appears when the overcurrent protection
dealer. DEVICE feature of the system stops supplying power to
iPod NO SONG No files in iPod Appears when the iPod is empty. Store some
files in the iPod.
Appears when an unsupported iPod is
UNSUPPORTED Use of unsupported connected. See page 212 for specification
VER. iPod information on iPods. If it appears when a
supported iPod is connected, update the iPod
software to the newer version.
CONNECT RETRY Recognition failure of Appears when the system does not
iPod acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.
218
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
NAVIGATION SCREEN
Features
USB INDICATOR CENTER DISPLAY
POWER/VOLUME KNOB
AUX BUTTON
CATEGORY BAR
SKIP BAR
MAP BUTTON SCAN/A.SEL
CANCEL BUTTON
AUDIO BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL
219
To Play a USB Flash Memory The recommended USB flash NOTE:

Device memory devices are 256 MB or Do not use a device such as a card
This audio system can operate the higher, and formatted with the FAT reader or hard drive as the device
audio files on a USB flash memory file system. Some digital audio or your files may be damaged.
device with the same controls used players may be compatible as well.
for the in-dash disc changer. To play Do not connect your USB flash
a USB flash memory device, connect Some USB flash memory devices memory device using a hub.
it to the USB adapter cable in the (such as devices with security lock-
console compartment, then press the out features, etc.) will not work in Do not use an extension cable to
AUX button. The ignition switch this audio unit. the USB adapter cable equipped
must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or with your vehicle.
ON (II) position.
Do not keep a USB flash memory
The audio system reads and plays device in the vehicle. Direct
the audio files on the USB flash sunlight and high heat will damage
memory device in MP3, WMA or it.
AAC＊ formats. Depending on the
format, the display shows MP3, We recommend backing up your
WMA or AAC when a USB flash data before playing a USB flash
memory device is playing. memory device.
＊ : Only AAC format files recorded Depending on the type and

with iTunes are playable on this number of files, it may take some
audio unit. time before they begin to play.
220
Depending on the software the Some versions of MP3, WMA, or Voice Control System
files were made with, it may not be AAC format may not be supported. If You can select the AUX mode by
possible to play some files, or an unsupported file is found, the using the navigation system voice
display some text data. audio unit displays UNSUPPORTED, control buttons, but cannot operate
then skips to the next file. the play mode functions.
Depending on the type of
encoding and writing software
used, there may be cases where
Features
character information does not Combining a low sampling f requency
display properly. with a low bitrate may result in
extremely degraded sound quality.
The order of files in USB playback
may be different from the order of
files displayed in PC or other
devices etc. Files are played in the
order stored in USB flash memory
device.

or charged via the USB adapter. If
this is the case, use the accessory
device.
CONTINUED
221
Connecting a USB Flash Memory When the USB device is connected

Device and the USB mode is selected on the
audio system, the USB indicator is
USB CONNECTOR shown in the center display. It also
shows the folder and file numbers.
Pressing the AUDIO button displays
the folder and file names, and the
elapsed time in the navigation screen.
USB CONNECTOR
USB ADAPTER CABLE
1. Pull out the USB connector from 2. Connect the USB flash memory
the holder. device to the USB adapter cable
correctly and securely.
222
To Change or Select Files Folder Selection − To select a

Use the SKIP bar while a USB flash different folder, press and release
memory device is playing to select either side of the CATEGORY bar.
passages and change files. Press the ▲ side to skip to the next
folder, and press the ▼ side to skip
SKIP − Each time you press and to the beginning of the previous
release the side of the SKIP bar, folder.
the system skips forward to the
Features
beginning of the next file. Press and
release the side of the bar to
skip backward to the beginning of
the current file. Press it again to skip SKIP DIRECTION SKIP DIRECTION
You can also change files with the
To move rapidly within a file, press interface dial. Press the AUDIO
and hold either side ( or ) button to show the audio control
of the SKIP bar. display on the navigation screen.
Push the selector knob to the right
side to skip to the beginning of the
next file, and to the left side to skip
to the beginning of the current file.
Pushing it to the left again skips to
the beginning of the previous file.
CONTINUED
223
To Select a File from Folder and File

Lists
You can also select a folder or file Push up the selector on the interface Press ENTER to change the display
from the list by using the interface dial to switch the display to the to the file list, then turn the knob on
dial. Press the AUDIO button to folder list, then turn the knob on the the interface dial to select a file.
show the audio control display on the interface dial to select a folder. Press ENTER to set your selection.
navigation screen.
To go back to the normal playing
display, press the AUDIO button.
Pressing the CANCEL button goes
back to the previous screen and
pressing the MAP button cancels the
audio mode display.
224
To Select Repeat, Random or Scan highlighted play mode, then press

Mode: ENTER to turn off that selected
mode.
TRACK RANDOM − This feature

plays all the files in random order.
FOLDER RANDOM − This
Features
feature plays the files in the selected
folder in random order.
TRACK REPEAT − This feature

continuously plays a file. Pressing
either side of the SKIP bar also turns
off this feature.
You can select any type of repeat, Turn the knob on the interface dial
random and scan modes on the audio to select a play mode: folder random, FOLDER REPEAT − This feature
menu screen. Press the AUDIO track random, folder repeat, track replays all the files in the selected
button to show the audio control repeat. Press ENTER to set your folder in the order they are stored.
display on the navigation screen. selection. Pressing either side of the
Push down the selector on the CATEGORY bar also turns off this
interface dial to display the audio To cancel the selected mode, push feature.
menu items. down the selector to display the
audio menu on the audio control
display. Turn the knob on the
interface dial to select the CONTINUED
225
TRACK SCAN − This function FOLDER SCAN − This function Pressing either side of the
samples all files in the selected samples the first file in each folder in CATEGORY or SKIP bar also turns
folder in the order they are stored. the order they are stored. To off the feature.
To activate the scan feature, push activate the folder scan feature, push
the selector to the right. You will see the selector to the right repeatedly.
TRACK SCAN on the screen. You You will see FOLDER SCAN on the
will also see SCAN on the center screen. You will also see SCAN on
display and the file number blinking. the center display and the folder
You will get a 10 second sampling of number blinking. You will get a 10
each file in the folder. Push the second sampling of the first file in
selector repeatedly to get out of the each folder. Push the selector
scan mode. The system plays the last repeatedly to get out of the scan
file sampled. mode. The system plays the last file
sampled.
You can also select the scan feature
with the SCAN side of the SCAN/ You can also select the folder scan
A.SEL bar on the control panel. feature with the SCAN side of the
Press and release the SCAN side of SCAN/A.SEL bar on the control
the bar. Press and hold the SCAN panel. Press and release the SCAN
side of the bar to get out of the scan side of the bar repeatedly.
mode and play the last file sampled. Press and hold the SCAN side of the
bar to get out of the folder scan
mode and play the last file sampled.
226
To Stop Playing a USB Flash Disconnecting a USB Flash Memory USB Flash Memory Device Error
Memory Device Device Messages
To play the radio, press the FM/AM, You can disconnect the USB flash If you see an error message in the
or button. Press the CD button memory device at any time even if center display, see page 230 .
to switch to the disc mode. Press the the USB mode is selected on the
AUX button to switch back to the audio system. Make sure to follow
USB. the USB flash memory device’s
instructions when you remove it.
Features
If you reconnect the same USB flash
memory device, the system will When you disconnect the USB flash
begin playing where it left off. memory device while it is playing,
the center display and the audio
screen (if selected) show NO DATA.
227
USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (Models with navigation system)
If you see an error message in the

center display while playing a USB Error Message Cause Solution
flash memory device, find the
solution in the chart to the right. If USB ERROR USB ROM error There is a problem with the USB adapter unit.
you cannot clear the error message, BAD USB Appears when the overcurrent protection
take your vehicle to your dealer. DEVICE feature of the system stops supplying power to
Appears when the files in the USB flash
UNPLAYABLE FILE Use of unsupported memory device are DRM or an unsupported
files format. This error message appears for about 3
seconds, then plays the next song.
Appears when the USB flash memory device is
No files in USB flash empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files
USB NO SONG memory device in the USB flash memory device. Save some
MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash
memory device.
Appears when an unsupported device is
Use of unsupported connected. See page 222 for the specification
UNSUPPORTED USB flash memory information for the USB flash memory device.
device If it appears when the supported device is
connected, reconnect the device.
228
FM/AM Radio Reception
FM/AM Radio Frequencies FM/AM Radio Reception

The radio can receive the complete How well the radio receives stations
AM and FM bands. is dependent on many factors, such
Those bands cover these frequen- as the distance from the station’s
cies: transmitter, nearby large objects,
and atmospheric conditions.
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz A radio station’s signal gets weaker
Features
as you get farther away from its
Radio stations on the AM band are transmitter. If you are listening to an
assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz AM station, you will notice the sound
apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the volume becoming weaker, and the
FM band are assigned frequencies at station drifting in and out. If you are
least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3). listening to an FM station, you will Driving very near the transmitter of
see the stereo indicator flickering off a station that is broadcasting on a
Stations must use these exact and on as the signal weakens. frequency close to the frequency of
frequencies. It is fairly common for Eventually, the stereo indicator will the station you are listening to can
stations to round-off the frequency in go off and the sound will fade also affect your radio’s reception.
their advertising, so your radio could completely as you get out of range of You may temporarily hear both
display a frequency of 100.9 even the station’s signal. stations, or hear only the station you
though the announcer may identify are close to.
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
CONTINUED
229
FM/AM Radio Reception
As required by the FCC:

Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Radio signals, especially on the FM Radio reception can be affected by

band, are deflected by large objects atmospheric conditions such as
such as buildings and hills. Your thunderstorms, high humidity, and
radio then receives both the direct even sunspots. You may be able to
signal from the station’s transmitter, receive a distant radio station one
and the deflected signal. This causes day and not receive it the next day
the sound to distort or flutter. This is because of a change in conditions.
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving. Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
230
Protecting Your Discs
General Information Protecting Discs

When using CD-R or CD-RW discs, When a disc is not being played,
use only high quality discs labeled store it in its case to protect it from
for audio use. dust and other contamination. To
prevent warpage, keep discs out of
When recording a CD-R or direct sunlight and extreme heat.
CD-RW, the recording must be
closed for it to be used by the disc To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
Features
changer. Wipe across the disc from the center
to the outside edge.
Play only standard, round, 5-inch
(12 cm) discs. Smaller or odd- A new disc may be rough on the
shaped discs may jam in the drive inner and outer edges. The small
or cause other problems. plastic pieces causing this roughness Handle a disc by its edges; never
can flake off and fall on the touch either surface. Do not place
Handle your discs properly to recording surface of the disc, stabilizer rings or labels on the disc.
prevent damage and skipping. causing skipping or other problems. These, along with contamination
Remove these pieces by rubbing the from finger prints, liquids, and felt-
inner and outer edges with the side tip pens, can cause the disc to not
of a pencil or pen. play properly, or possibly jam in the
Do not use discs with adhesive labels. drive.
The label can curl up and cause the Never try to insert foreign objects in
disc to jam in the unit. the disc changer.
231
Additional Information on 1. Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and excessively thick discs

Recommended Discs
The in-dash disc player/changer has
a sophisticated and delicate
mechanism. If you insert a damaged
disc as indicated in this section, it
may become stuck inside and
damage the audio unit.
Examples of these discs are shown Bubbled/ With Label/ Using Printer Sealed With Plastic
to the right: Wrinkled Sticker Label Kit Ring
2. Damaged discs 3. Poor quality discs
Chipped/ Warped Burrs

Cracked
232
4. Small, irregular shaped discs 5. Discs with scratches, dirty discs Recommended discs are printed
with the following logo.
Features
3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape Audio unit may not play the
Fingerprints, scratches, etc. following formats.
CD-R or CD-RW may not play due

to the recording conditions.
Scratches and fingerprints on the

discs may cause the sound to skip.
This audio unit cannot play a Dual-

disc .
Can Shape Arrow Shape
233
Remote Audio Controls
MODE BUTTON The VOL button adjusts the volume If you are listening to the radio, use
up (▲) or down (▼). Press the top the CH button to change stations.
or bottom of the button, hold it until Each time you press the top (＋) of
the desired volume is reached, then the button, the system goes to the
release it. next preset station on the band you
are listening to. Press the bottom
The MODE button changes the (−) to go back to the previous
mode. preset station. If you press and hold
the CH button (＋) or (−), the
On vehicles without navigation system system goes into the skip (seek)
Pressing the MODE button mode. It stops when it finds a station
VOL BUTTON CH BUTTON repeatedly cycles through all with a strong signal.
possible media sources whether they
Three controls for the audio system are present or not.
are mounted in the steering wheel
hub. These let you control basic On vehicles with navigation system
functions without removing your Pressing the MODE button
hand from the wheel. repeatedly cycles through all present,
connected media sources. Media
sources that are not present or
connected will not appear when
cycling with the MODE button.
234
Remote Audio Controls
If you are playing a disc, the system In MP3 or WMA mode, you can use If you are playing a USB flash
skips to the beginning of the next the skip function to select folders. memory device or iPod with the USB
track (file in MP3 or WMA format) Press and hold the top (＋) of the adapter cable, press and release the
each time you press the top (＋) of CH button until you hear a beep, to top (＋) of the CH button to skip
the CH button. Press the bottom skip forward to the first file in the forward to the beginning of the next
(−) to return to the beginning of the next folder. Press the bottom (−) to file. Press the bottom (−) to skip
current track/file. Press it twice to skip backward to the previous folder. backward to the beginning to the
return to the previous track/file. current file. Press it twice to return
Features
If you are playing a conventional CD to the previous file.
(without the text data and not
compressed in MP3 or WMA), you When playing a USB flash memory
can use the skip function to select device, you can also use the seek
discs. Press and hold the top (＋) of function to skip the folder. To
the CH button until you hear a beep, activate this, press and hold either
to skip forward to the next disc. side of the CH button until you hear
Press and hold the bottom (−) to a beep.
skip backward to the previous disc.
235
Auxiliary Input Jack
The auxiliary input jack is inside the

console compartment. The system
will accept auxiliary input from
standard audio accessories using a
1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo miniplug.
When a compatible audio unit is

connected to the jack, press the AUX
or CD/AUX button to select it.
236
Radio Theft Protection
If your vehicle’s battery is must then leave the system on for Canadian Owners
disconnected or goes dead, the audio one hour before trying again. If you lose the Anti-theft
system disables itself. If this happens, Identification Card, you must obtain
you will see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the The system will retain your AM and the code from your dealer. To do this,
frequency display next time you turn FM presets even if power is you will need the audio system’s
on the system. Use the preset disconnected. serial number. If you do not have the
buttons to enter the five-digit code. serial number with you, ask your
The code is on the Anti-theft U.S. Owners dealer how to retrieve it.
Features
Identification Card included in your We recommend that you register the
owner’s manual kit. When it is security code at Owner Link (owners. Models with navigation system
entered correctly, the radio will start honda.com.) If you lose the Anti- You need to enter a separate code
playing. theft Identification Card before for the navigation system to
registering the code at Owner Link, reactivate. The Anti-theft Card also
The Anti-theft Identification Card you must obtain the code from your lists the navigation system’s security
also lists your audio serial number. It dealer or https://radio-navicode.honda. code and serial number. Follow the
is best to store the card in a safe com/. To do this, you will need the same procedure to retrieve the serial
place at home. In addition, you audio system’s serial number. If you number and obtain the code, and
should write the audio system’s do not have the serial number with read the navigation system manual
serial number in this owner’s manual. you, ask your dealer or go to https:// for details.
radio-navicode.honda.com/ for
If you make a mistake entering the information on how to retrieve it.
code, do not start over; complete the
five-digit sequence, then enter the
correct code. You have ten tries to
enter the correct code. If you are
unsuccessful in ten attempts, you
237
Setting the Clock
On models without navigation system On models without navigation system

To set the time, press the CLOCK
button until you hear a beep. The
displayed time begins to blink.
Change the hours by pressing the H

(hour) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time. Change R (RESET)
the minutes by pressing the M BUTTON
(minute) button until the numbers CLOCK BUTTON
advance to the desired time.
Press the CLOCK button again to

enter the set time.
H (HOUR) BUTTON M (MINUTE) BUTTON
You can quickly set the time to the U.S. model is shown.
nearest hour. If the displayed time is
before the half hour, press and hold For example: On models with navigation system
the CLOCK button, then press the R 1:06 would RESET to 1:00. The navigation system receives
(reset) button to set the time back to 1:52 would RESET to 2:00. signals from the global positioning
the previous hour. If the displayed system (GPS), and the displayed
time is after the half hour, the same time is updated automatically by the
procedure sets the time forward to GPS. Refer to the navigation system
the beginning of the next hour. manual for how to adjust the time.
238
Setting the Clock
On models without navigation system

Adjusting the Clock with MENU
Button
You can also adjust the clock and
switch the clock display between
24-hours and 12-hours in the menu
mode.
Features
To adjust the clock setting:
1. Press and release the MENU

button. The display shows you the
menu items.
2. Turn the selector knob to select 4. Turn the selector knob to select
You can adjust the clock setting ‘‘CLOCK ADJUST.’’ the item which you want to adjust.
with the ignition switch in the Turning the selector knob will
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) 3. Press the selector knob (ENTER) change the selected item between
position. to enter your selection. The the clock display setting, hours,
display changes to the clock minutes, and SET. The selected
adjusting display. item is indicated with △ in the
display.
CONTINUED
239
Setting the Clock
While setting the clock, pressing

the RETURN button will go back
to the previous display.
Pressing the MENU button again
will cancel this setting mode.
MINUTE SETTING
5. Turn the selector knob to change 7. To set the time, turn the selector
the setting between 12H and 24H. knob and select the hours or the
minutes, then press the knob to
6. Press the selector knob (ENTER) enter your selection. The display
to enter your selection. The changes to the setting display.
display will return to the clock 10. To enter the clock setting, turn
adjusting display. 8. Turn the selector knob to count the selector knob to select ‘‘SET,’’
the numbers up or down. then press the knob. The display
will return to the menu item
9. Press the selector knob (ENTER) display.
to enter your selection. The
display will return to the clock 11. Press either the RETURN or
adjusting display. MENU button to go back to the
normal display.
240
Security System
The security system helps to protect SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR The security system does not set if
your vehicle and valuables from theft. any door, the tailgate, or hood is not
The horn sounds and a combination fully closed. Before you leave the
of headlights, parking lights, side vehicle, make sure the doors,
marker lights and taillights flashes if tailgate, and hood are securely
someone attempts to break into your closed.
vehicle or remove the audio unit.
This alarm continues for two To see if the system sets after you
Features
minutes, then the system resets. To exit the vehicle, press the LOCK
deactivate the system before the two button on the remote transmitter
minutes have elapsed, unlock the within five seconds. If the system is
driver’s door with the key or the set, the horn will beep once.
remote transmitter.
Once the security system sets, Do not attempt to alter this system
The security system automatically opening any door, the tailgate, or or add other devices to it.
sets 15 seconds after you lock the hood without using the key or the
doors, hood, and the tailgate. For the remote transmitter, will cause the
system to activate, you must lock the alarm to activate. It also activates if
doors and the tailgate from the the ignition switch is turned to the
outside with the key, driver’s lock ON (II) position, the audio unit is
tab, door lock master switch, or removed from the dashboard, or the
remote transmitter. The security wiring is cut.
system indicator on the instrument
panel starts blinking immediately to
show you the system is setting itself.
241
Compass
On models without navigation system Compass Calibration

Compass Operation
Compass operation can be affected
by driving near power lines or
stations, across bridges, through
tunnels, over railroad crossings, past
large vehicles, or driving near large
objects that can cause a magnetic
disturbance. It can also be affected
by accessories such as antennas and
roof racks that are mounted by
COMPASS
magnets. COMPASS SETTING MENU ITEMS
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the compass is The compass may need to be NOTE: Do this procedure in an open
self-calibrating, then the compass manually calibrated after exposure to area, away from buildings, power
display is shown in the display. a strong magnetic field. If the lines, and other vehicles.
compass seems to be continually
showing the wrong direction and is 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
not self-calibrating, or the compass (II) position.
display is blinking with the CAL
indicator on, do the following 2. Press and hold the MENU button
procedure. for about 5 seconds until you hear
a beep. The display shows you the
compass setting menu items.
242
Compass
5. Press the selector knob (ENTER).

The compass display is blinking
and the CAL indicator is shown.
6. Drive the vehicle slowly in two

complete circles.
When the calibration is successfully
Features
completed, the CAL indicator goes
off and the compass display will stop
blinking and show an actual heading.
The audio system is not related to

the compass system. Even if the
3. Turn the selector knob to select 4. Press the selector knob (ENTER) compass system is calibrating, the
‘‘CALIBRATION.’’ to enter your selection. The display returns to the normal display
display shows you ‘‘PUSH CAL which you last selected.
START.’’
While setting the compass,

pressing the RETURN button will
go back to the previous display.
Pressing the MENU button will
cancel the compass setting mode.
243
Compass
Compass Zone Selection

In most areas, there is a variation
between magnetic north and true
north. Zone selection is required so
the compass can compensate for this
variation. To check and select the
zone, do this:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON

(II) position.
ZONE NUMBER
2. Press and hold the MENU button
for about 5 seconds until you hear
a beep. The display shows you the 4. Find the zone for your area on the 5. Once the correct zone is displayed,
compass setting menu items. map (see page 248 ). If the correct press the selector knob. The
zone is not shown, turn the display then returns to normal.
3. Turn the selector knob to select selector knob to cycle the zone
‘‘ZONE.’’ Press the selector knob lists up or down.
(ENTER) to enter your selection.
The display shows you the If necessary, press the RETURN
currently selected zone number. button to return to the previous
display. Pressing the MENU
button will cancel the compass
setting mode.
244
Compass
The audio system is not related to Zone Map

the compass system. Even if the
compass system is in the zone
setting mode, the display returns to
the normal display which you last
selected.
＊ Guam Island: Zone 8
Features
＊ Puerto Rico: Zone 11
245
Cruise Control
Cruise control allows you to maintain Using the Cruise Control 3. Press and release the SET/
a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h) DECEL button on the steering
without keeping your foot on the CRUISE BUTTON wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL
accelerator pedal. It should be used RES/ indicator on the instrument panel
ACCEL
for cruising on straight, open BUTTON comes on to show the system is
highways. It is not recommended for now activated.
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.
Improper use of the cruise CANCEL BUTTON SET/DECEL

control can lead to a crash. BUTTON
Use the cruise control only 1. Push in the CRUISE button on the
when traveling on open steering wheel. The CRUISE
highways in good weather. MAIN indicator on the instrument
panel comes on.
The cruise control system can be

left on, even when it is not in use.
2. Accelerate to the desired cruising

speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
246
Cruise Control
Cruise control may not hold the set Changing the Set Speed You can decrease the set cruising
speed when you are going up and You can increase the set cruising speed in any of these ways:
down hills. If your speed increases speed in any of these ways:
going down a hill, use the brakes to NOTE: If you need to decrease your
slow down to the desired speed. This Press and hold the RES/ACCEL speed quickly, use the brakes as you
will cancel cruise control. To resume button. When you reach the normally would.
the set speed, press the RES/ desired cruising speed, release the
ACCEL button. The CRUISE button. Press and hold the SET/DECEL
Features
CONTROL indicator on the button. Release the button when
instrument panel comes on. Push on the accelerator pedal. you reach the desired speed.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed, then press the SET/ To slow down in very small
DECEL button. amounts, tap the SET/DECEL
button repeatedly. Each time you
To increase the speed in very do this, your vehicle will slow
small amounts, tap the RES/ down about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
ACCEL button. Each time you do
this, your vehicle will speed up Tap the brake pedal lightly with
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). your foot. The CRUISE
CONTROL indicator on the
instrument panel goes out. When
the vehicle slows to the desired
speed, press the SET/DECEL
button.
CONTINUED
247
Cruise Control
Even with the cruise control turned Canceling Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed
on, you can still use the accelerator You can cancel cruise control in any When you push the CANCEL button
pedal to speed up for passing. After of these ways: or tap the brake pedal, the system
completing the pass, take your foot remembers the previously set speed.
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle Tap the brake pedal. To return to that speed, accelerate to
will return to the set cruising speed. above 25 mph (40 km/h), then press
Push the CANCEL button on the and release the RES/ACCEL button.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal steering wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
causes cruise control to cancel. comes on. The vehicle accelerates to
Push the CRUISE button on the the same speed as before.
steering wheel.
Pressing the CRUISE button turns
the system completely off and erases
the previous cruising speed.
248
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
EX-L models If your garage door was Units manufactured between April 1,
The HomeLink universal manufactured before April 1, 1982, 1982 and January 1, 1993 may be
transceiver built into your vehicle you may not be able to program equipped with safety stop and
can be programmed to operate up to HomeLink to operate it. These units reverse features. If your unit does
three remotely controlled devices do not have safety features that not have an external entrapment
around your home, such as garage cause the motor to stop and reverse protection system, an easy test to
doors, lighting, or home security it if an obstacle is detected during confirm the function and
systems. closing, increasing the risk of injury. performance of the safety stop and
Features
Do not use HomeLink with any reverse feature is to lay a 2 × 4
General Information garage door opener that lacks safety under the closing door. The door
Before programming your stop and reverse features. should stop and reverse upon
HomeLink to operate a garage door contacting the piece of wood.
opener, confirm that the opener has As an additional safety feature,
an external entrapment protection garage door openers manufactured
system, such as an ‘‘electronic eye,’’ after January 1, 1993 are required to
or other safety and reverse stop have external entrapment protection
features. systems, such as an electronic eye,
which detect an object obstructing
the door.
249
Important Safety Precautions Training HomeLink

Refer to the safety information that Before you begin − If you just
came with your garage door opener received your vehicle and have not
to test that the safety features are trained any of the buttons in
functioning properly. If you do not HomeLink before, you should erase
have this information, contact the any previously learned codes before
manufacturer of the equipment. training the first button. To do this,
Before programming HomeLink to a press and hold the two outside
garage door or gate opener, make buttons on the HomeLink
sure that people and objects are out transceiver for about 10−20 seconds,
of the way of the device to prevent until the red indicator flashes.
potential injury or damage. Release the buttons, then proceed to
When programming a garage door step 1.
opener, park just outside the garage.
250
If you are training the second or third buttons, go directly to step 1.
Features
CONTINUED
251
HomeLink is a registered As required by the FCC:

trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc. This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.

This device complies with Industry

Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
252
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) Using HFL

allows you to place and receive HFL Buttons
phone calls using voice commands,
without handling your cell phone. HFL TALK BUTTON HFL TALK BUTTON
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-

compatible cell phone. For a list of
compatible phones, pairing
Features
procedures, and special feature
capabilities: NAVI VOICE
CONTROL
BUTTONS
In the U.S., visit handsfreelink.honda.
com or call (888) 528-7876. HFL BACK BUTTON HFL BACK BUTTON
On models with navigation system On models without navigation system
In Canada, visit www.handsfreelink.ca,
or call (888) 528-7876. HFL Talk button − Press and
release to give a command or answer
a call.
HFL Back button − Press and

release to end a call, go back to the
previous command, or cancel the
command.
CONTINUED
253
Voice Control Tips Press and release the HFL Talk Many commands can be spoken
button each time you want to together. For example, you can
make a command. After the beep, say ‘‘Call 123-456-＃＃＃＃’’ or
speak in a clear, natural tone. ‘‘Dial Peter.’’
Try to reduce all background When HFL is in use, navigation

noise. If the microphone picks up voice commands cannot be
voices other than yours, recognized.
commands may be misinterpreted.
To change the volume level of
HFL, use the audio system volume
knob or the steering wheel volume
MICROPHONE controls.
Air or wind noise from the

dashboard and side vents and all
windows may interfere with the
microphone. Adjust or close them
as necessary.
254
Help Features Information Display

To hear general HFL information,
including help on pairing a phone BLUETOOTH INDICATOR
or setting up the system, say
‘‘Tutorial.’’
For help at any time, including a

list of available commands, say
Features
‘‘Hands free help.’’
PHONE NUMBER BLUETOOTH INDICATOR

U.S. model with navigation system is
On models without navigation system shown.
When there is an incoming call, or On models with navigation system

HFL is in use, ‘‘HANDSFREELINK’’ A notification that there is an
will appear on the display. incoming call, or HFL is in use, will
appear on the navigation screen
‘‘ ’’ indicator will be displayed on when the audio system is on.
the audio display when a phone is
linked.
255
How to Use HFL

The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
‘‘Pair’’ Pair a phone to the system (See page 259)
‘‘Edit’’ Edit the name of a paired phone (See page 260)
‘‘Phone Setup’’ ‘‘Delete’’ Delete a paired phone from the system (See page 260)
‘‘List’’ Hear a list of all phones paired to the system (See page 260)
Press HFL Hear which paired phone is currently linked to the system
‘‘Status’’ (See page 261)
Talk button
‘‘Next Phone’’ Search for another previously paired phone to link to (See page 261)
‘‘Set Pairing Set the pairing code to a ‘‘Fixed’’ or ‘‘Random’’ number

Code’’ (See page 261)
Once a phonebook entry is stored, you can say a name here.

‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial’’ ‘‘Jim Smith’’ (See page 262)
‘‘123-456-＃＃＃＃’’ Enter desired phone number (See page 262)
Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you give a command.
256
‘‘Redial’’ Redial the last number called (See page 263)
‘‘Transfer’’ Transfer a call from HFL to your phone, or from your phone to HFL (See page 266)
Features
‘‘Mute’’ Mute your voice to the person at the other end of the call (See page 267)
‘‘Send’’ Send numbers or names during a call (See page 267)
Press HFL
Talk button ‘‘Store’’ Store a phonebook entry (See page 268)
‘‘Edit’’ Edit the number of an existing phonebook entry (See page 268)
‘‘Phonebook’’ ‘‘Delete’’ Delete a phonebook entry (See page 269)
‘‘Receive If your phone supports this function, use this to transfer contacts from
Contact’’ your phone to HFL (See page 269)
‘‘List’’ Hear a list of all stored phonebook entries (See page 269)
CONTINUED
257
‘‘Security’’ Apply a security passcode to the system that must be input at each key
cycle to access the system (See page 274)
‘‘Change Passcode’’ Change your security passcode (See page 275)

‘‘System Set how you would like to be notified of an incoming call
Set up’’ ‘‘Call Notification’’
(See page 275)
‘‘Auto Transfer’’ Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you
enter the vehicle (See page 275)
Press HFL
Talk button ‘‘Clear’’ Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries and security
passcode (See page 276)
‘‘Change Language’’ Change language from English to French (See page 276)＊
‘‘Tutorial’’ Hear a tutorial for general rules on using the system (See page 255)
‘‘Hands Free Help’’ Hear a list of available commands and additional information describing each command
(See page 255)
＊ : Canadian models
258
To use HFL, you need to pair your Phone Setup To pair a cell phone:
Bluetooth-compatible cell phone to This command group is available for 1. Press and release the HFL Talk
the system. paired cell phones. button. If you are pairing a phone
for the first time, HFL will give
Phone pairing tips you information about the pairing
You cannot pair your phone while process. If it is not the first phone
the vehicle is moving. you are pairing, say ‘‘Phone
setup’’ and say ‘‘Pair.’’
Features
Your phone must be in discovery
or search mode to pair. Refer to 2. Follow the HFL prompts and put
your phone’s manual. your phone in discovery or search
mode. HFL will give you a 4-digit
Up to six phones can be paired. pairing code and begin searching
for your phone.
Your phone’s battery may drain
faster when it is paired to HFL. 3. When your phone finds a
Bluetooth device, select HFL from
If after three minutes your phone the options and enter the 4-digit
is not ready to pair or a phone is code from the previous step.
not found, the system will time out
and return to idle. 4. Follow the HFL prompts and
name the newly paired phone.
CONTINUED
259
To rename a paired phone: To delete a paired phone: To hear the names of all paired
Press and release the HFL Talk Press and release the HFL Talk phones:
button before a command. button before a command. Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
1. Say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ 1. Say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
1. Say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
2. Say ‘‘Edit ’’ after the prompts. 2. Say ‘‘Delete’’ after the prompts.
2. Say ‘‘List ’’ after the prompts.
3. If there is more than one phone 3. HFL will ask you which phone you
paired to the system, HFL will ask want to delete. Follow the HFL 3. HFL will read out all the paired
you which phone’s name you want prompts to continue with the phone’s names.
to change. Follow the HFL deletion.
prompts and rename the phone.
260
To hear which paired phone is To change from the currently linked To change the pairing code setting:
currently linked: phone to another paired phone: Press and release the HFL Talk
Press and release the HFL Talk Press and release the HFL Talk button before a command.
button before a command. button before a command.
1. Say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
1. Say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ 1. Say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
2. Say ‘‘Set pairing code’’ after the
2. Say ‘‘Status’’ after the prompts. 2. Say ‘‘Next phone’’ after the prompts.
Features
prompts.
3. HFL will tell you which phone is 3. If you want HFL to create a
linked to the system. 3. HFL disconnects the linked phone random code each time you pair a
and searches for another paired phone, say ‘‘Random.’’ If you want
phone. to choose your own 4-digit code to
be used each time, say ‘‘Fixed’’
4. Once another phone is found, it is and follow the HFL prompts.
linked to the system. HFL will
inform you which phone is now
linked.
If no other phones are found or

paired, HFL will inform you that the
original phone is linked again.
261
Making a Call To make a call using a name in the To make a call using a phone
You can make calls using a name in HFL phonebook: number:
the HFL phonebook or any phone Press and release the HFL Talk Press and release the HFL Talk
number. You can also redial the last button before a command. button before a command.
number called.
1. Say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ 1. Say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’
Bluetooth is the wireless technology
that links your phone to HFL. HFL 2. Follow the HFL prompts and say 2. Follow the HFL prompts and say
uses a Class 2 Bluetooth, which the name stored in the HFL the phone number you want to dial.
means the maximum range between phonebook that you want to call.
your phone and vehicle is 30 feet (10 3. Follow the HFL prompts to
meters). 3. Follow the HFL prompts to confirm the number and say
confirm the name and make the ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’
During a call, HFL allows you to talk call.
up to 30 minutes after you remove Once connected, you will hear the
the key from the ignition switch. person you called through the audio
However, this may weaken the speakers.
vehicle’s battery.
262
To redial the last number called by To make a call from an imported

HFL: phonebook:
Press and release the HFL Talk
button and say ‘‘Redial.’’
Features
On models with navigation system 3. Select a phonebook you want to
1. Press the INFO button, then select choose a phone number from.
‘‘Cellular Phone.’’
If the phonebook you select is PIN-
2. Select ‘‘Search Imported protected, you will need to enter the
Phonebook .’’ PIN to access it. See page 275 for
more information.
CONTINUED
263
If you choose ‘‘Store in

HandsFreeLink,’’ the phone
number will be stored in HFL, so
Push up the interface selector to that you can call it using HFL’s name
show a list. tag by voice.
To search for a specific name in the 4. Select the name. All the phone
phonebook, enter the keyword for numbers stored for that name will
either the first or last name. be listed.
To display all names in the 5. Select the phone number and push
phonebook, select the ‘‘List ’’ option. the interface selector, HFL begins
dialing.
264
To make a call using the navigation

display (on models with navigation
system):
Features
1. Press the INFO button, and the 2. From the INFO screen, select 3. The navigation display will change
INFO screen will be shown. ‘‘Cellular Phone,’’ then select ‘‘Dial.’’ as shown above. Enter a call
number.
4. To make a call, press the selector

on the interface dial to the right.
5. To end the call, press the HFL

Back button.
265
Receiving a Call Call Waiting Transferring a Call

When you receive a call, an incoming If your phone has Call Waiting, press You can transfer a call from HFL to
call notification (if activated) will and release the HFL Talk button to your phone, or from your phone to
play and interrupt the audio system put the original call on hold and HFL.
if it is on. answer the incoming call.
Press and release the HFL Talk
Press the HFL Talk button to answer To return to the original call, press button and say ‘‘Transfer.’’
the call, or the HFL Back button to the HFL Talk button again. If you
hang up. don’t want to answer the incoming
call, disregard it and continue with
your original call. If you want to hang
up the original call and answer the
new call, press the HFL Back button.
266
Muting a Call Send Numbers or Names During Phonebook

You can mute your voice to the a Call You can store up to 50 names with
person you are talking to during a HFL allows you to send numbers or their associated numbers in HFL.
call. names during a call. This is useful The numbers you store can be not
when you call a menu-driven phone only phone numbers but other types,
To mute your voice during a call, system. such as account numbers or
press and release the HFL Talk passwords, which can be sent during
button and say ‘‘Mute.’’ To send a name or number during a a menu-driven call.
Features
call:
To unmute your voice, press and Press and release the HFL Talk
release the HFL Talk button and say button before a command.
‘‘Mute’’ again.
1. Say ‘‘Send.’’
2. Follow the HFL prompts and say

the name or number you want to
send.
3. Follow the HFL prompts to send

the tones and continue the call.
NOTE: To send a pound (＃), say

‘‘pound.’’ To send a star (*), say ‘‘star.’’
CONTINUED
267
To store a phonebook entry: NOTE: To edit the number stored in a name:

Press and release the HFL Talk Avoid using duplicate name Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command. entries. button before a command.
1. Say ‘‘Phonebook .’’ Avoid using ‘‘home’’ as a name 1. Say ‘‘Phonebook .’’
entry.
2. Say ‘‘Store’’ after the prompts. 2. Say ‘‘Edit ’’ after the prompts.
It is easier for HFL to recognize a
3. Say a name you want to list as your multisyllabic or longer name. For 3. Follow the HFL prompts and say
phonebook entry. example, use ‘‘Peter’’ instead of the name entry you want to edit.
‘‘Pete,’’ or ‘‘John Smith’’ instead of
4. Say the number you want to store ‘‘John.’’ 4. When asked, say the new number
for the name entry. for that name.
5. Follow the HFL prompts and say 5. Follow the HFL prompts to
‘‘Enter’’ to store the entry. complete the edit.
268
To delete a name: To list all names in the phonebook: To store a specific phone number
Press and release the HFL Talk Press and release the HFL Talk from your cell phone directly to the
button before a command. button before a command. HFL phonebook (available on some
phones):
1. Say ‘‘Phonebook .’’ 1. Say ‘‘Phonebook .’’ Press and release the HFL Talk
2. Say ‘‘Delete’’ after the prompts. 2. Say ‘‘List ’’ after the prompts.
1. Say ‘‘Phonebook .’’
Features
3. Say the name you want to delete 3. HFL begins reading the names in
and follow the HFL prompts to the order they were stored. 2. Say ‘‘Receive contact ’’ after the
complete the deletion. prompts.
4. If you hear a name you want to call,
immediately press the HFL Talk 3. Follow the HFL prompts, select a
button and say ‘‘Call.’’ number from your cell phone, and
send it to HFL.
4. Follow the HFL prompts and

name the number, or say
‘‘Discard’’ if it is not the number
you want to store.
5. Follow the HFL prompts if you

want to store another number.
269
Cellular Phonebook Import Cellular Phonebook: Search Imported Phonebook:

(available on some phones) The entire phonebook data of the Once a phonebook has been
cell phone that is linked to HFL can imported, you can search the phone
On models with navigation system be imported to the navigation system. numbers by the person’s name.
If you select Cellular Phone from
the Information screen menu, you PIN ICON
will see five HFL options.
For a list of cell phones that are

compatible with this feature:
In the U.S., visit handsfreelink.honda.

com or call (888) 528-7876.
In Canada, visit www.handsfreelink.ca, IMPORTED

or call (888) 528-7876. PHONEBOOK IMPORTED DATE
Select ‘‘Import Cellular Select ‘‘Search Imported

Phonebook ,’’ and HFL will begin Phonebook ,’’ and a list of imported
importing the phonebook. Select phonebooks will be displayed.
‘‘OK ’’ after the import is completed.
Select a phonebook from the list.
270
Push up the interface selector to

Select a person from the list. Up to
show a list. three category icons are displayed in
the left side of the list:
Preference Fax
Home Car
Features
Cell phone Voice
Work Other
If the phonebook is PIN-protected, To search for a specific name in the
you will need to enter the 4-digit PIN. phonebook, enter the keyword for
Pager
either the first or last name.
To display all names in the These indicate how many numbers

phonebook, select the ‘‘List ’’ option. are stored for the name. If a name
has more than three category icons,
‘‘…’’ is displayed.
Select the person’s number you want

to call, and press the HFL Talk
button.
CONTINUED
271
Delete Imported Phonebook: After making a selection, the PIN Number

You can delete any imported following screen will appear. You can add, change, or remove a
phonebook. PIN number from any phonebook.
Select ‘‘Delete Imported

Phonebook ,’’ and a list of imported
phonebooks will be displayed.
Select a phonebook you want to

delete. If the phonebook is PIN-
protected, you will need to enter the
4-digit PIN number.
Select ‘‘Yes,’’ then ‘‘OK ’’ to complete

the deletion. To add a PIN:
If you have selected a phonebook
without a PIN, you will see the above
display.
Enter the new 4-digit PIN. You will

have to re-enter the PIN for
confirmation.
272
To change the PIN to a new number: To remove a PIN:

Select ‘‘PIN number,’’ then select
‘‘Do not use PIN’’ after you enter
the current PIN.
Features
Select the phonebook you want. The The display will change as shown
display will change as shown above. above.
Enter the current PIN for this Enter the new 4-digit PIN number.
phonebook. You will be asked to re-enter the PIN
for verification.
273
System Setup To set a 4-digit passcode to lock the NOTE: Once a passcode is set, you
This command group allows you to HFL system for security purposes: will need to enter it to use HFL each
change or customize HFL basic Press and release the HFL Talk time you start the vehicle. If you
settings. button before a command. forget the code, your dealer will have
to reset it for you, or you will have to
1. Say ‘‘System setup.’’ clear the entire system (see page
279 ).
2. Say ‘‘Security’’ after the prompts.
3. Follow the HFL prompts and say

the 4-digit passcode you want to
set.
4. Follow the HFL prompts to

confirm the number.
274
To change your security passcode: To select either a ring tone or a To activate or deactivate the auto
Press and release the HFL Talk prompt as the incoming call transfer function:
button before a command. notification＊: If you get into the vehicle while you
Press and release the HFL Talk are on the phone, the call can be
1. Say ‘‘System setup.’’ button before a command. automatically transferred to HFL
with the ignition switch in the
2. Say ‘‘Change passcode’’ after the 1. Say ‘‘System setup.’’ ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
prompts.
Features
2. Say ‘‘Call notification’’ after the Press and release the HFL Talk
3. Follow the HFL prompts and say prompts. button before a command.
the new 4-digit passcode.
3. Follow the HFL prompts and say 1. Say ‘‘System setup.’’
4. Follow the HFL prompts to ‘‘Ring tone’’ or ‘‘Prompt .’’ You
confirm the number. can also say ‘‘Off ’’ for no audible 2. Say ‘‘Auto transfer’’ after the
incoming call notification. prompts.
＊ : The default setting is a ring tone. 3. HFL will let you know if auto
transfer is on or off, depending on
the previous setting. Follow the
HFL prompts to change the
setting.
CONTINUED
275
To clear the system: Quick Language Selection Change Language

This operation clears the passcodes, Canadian models only Canadian models only
paired phones, all names in the HFL To quickly change the language: To change the system language
phonebook, and all imported Press and release the HFL Talk between English and French:
phonebook data. button before a command. Press and release the HFL Talk
Press and release the HFL Talk 1. Say the language you want to
button before a command. change to in that language. 1. Say ‘‘Change language.’’
1. Say ‘‘System setup.’’ 2. Follow the HFL prompts. 2. Follow the HFL prompts to
change the language to English or
2. Say ‘‘Clear’’ after the prompts. French.
3. Follow the HFL prompts to If you have not named your paired
continue to complete the clearing phone in the language you just
procedure. selected, HFL will ask you to name it
in the current language.
You can also clear the system when
you have forgotten the passcode and When French is your currently
cannot access HFL. When HFL asks selected language, you can give voice
you for the passcode, say ‘‘System commands in French.
clear.’’ Paired phones, all names in
the HFL phonebook and all imported
phonebook data will be lost.
276
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink , Rearview Camera and Monitor
Bluetooth Wireless Technology As required by the FCC: Rearview Camera and Monitor
The Bluetooth name and logos are This device complies with Part 15 of the On models with navigation system
registered trademarks owned by FCC rules. Operation is subject to the Refer to the navigation system
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of following two conditions: (1) This device manual for operation of the rearview
such marks by Honda Motor Co., may not cause harmful interference, and camera.
Ltd. is under license. Other (2) this device must accept any
trademarks and trade names are interference received, including
those of their respective owners. interference that may cause undesired
Features
operation.

This device complies with Industry

Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
277
Rearview Mirror with Rearview Camera Display
SENSOR If the engine has just been started, it

may take a short time for the system
to display the rear view.
The camera display brightness is

automatically adjusted by sensors. If
you use the camera display
continuously at high temperatures,
the image will gradually dim and
eventually turn off. If you change to
REARVIEW POWER another shift position, the display
CAMERA DISPLAY BUTTON REARVIEW CAMERA will come on again when you return
to reverse.
If equipped For the best picture, always keep the
You can turn the camera display on rearview camera clean, and do not The inside mirror will be hot when
and off by pressing the power button cover the camera lens. To avoid you use the monitor for an extended
when the shift lever is in reverse. scratching the lens when you clean it, period of time.
The camera display turns on every use a moist, soft cloth.
time you shift to reverse, even if you If a bright light (such as sunlight) is
turned it off the last time. Since the rearview camera display reflected on the mirror, the image
area is limited, you should always may be difficult to see.
Whenever you shift to reverse (R) back up slowly and carefully, and
with the ignition switch in the ON look behind you for obstacles.
(II) position, the rear view appears
on a display in the rearview mirror.
278
Rearview Mirror with Rearview Camera Display
Rearview Camera Guide Lines The camera display has parking To turn off the guide lines, press and
guide lines that indicate distance hold the power button for more than
SCREEN DISPLAY from your vehicle. 3 seconds. The guide lines appear
every time you shift to reverse, even
1st line 0.35 m if you turned them off the last time.
2nd line 1m
3rd line 2m
4th line 3m
Features
NOTE:
The rearview camera has a unique
ACTUAL DISTANCE lens that makes objects appear
closer than they actually are.
The rearview camera display has a

limited coverage, and the size and
position of objects may appear
different than they actually are.
Make sure to check the
1st line surrounding area carefully.
2nd line
3rd line
4th line
279
280
Main Menu
Before Driving
Before you begin driving your Break-in Period .............................. 282

vehicle, you should know what Fuel Recommendation .................. 282
gasoline to use and how to check the Service Station Procedures .......... 283
levels of important fluids. You also Refueling..................................... 283
need to know how to properly store Check Fuel Cap Message ......... 285
luggage or packages. The Opening and Closing
information in this section will help the Hood ................................. 287
you. If you plan to add any Oil Check .................................... 288
accessories to your vehicle, please Engine Coolant Check .............. 288
read the information in this section Fuel Economy ................................ 289
Before Driving
first. Accessories and Modifications .... 292
Carrying Cargo .............................. 294
281
Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation

Help assure your vehicle’s future Your vehicle is designed to operate
reliability and performance by paying on unleaded gasoline with a pump To help prevent harmf ul f uel system
extra attention to how you drive octane number of 87 or higher. Use and engine deposits, use high quality
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km). of a lower octane gasoline can cause f uel containing detergent and additives.
During this period: a persistent, heavy, metallic rapping In addition, in order to maintain good
noise that can lead to engine damage. perf ormance, f uel economy, and
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid emissions control, we strongly
acceleration. recommend the use of gasoline that
does NOT contain harmf ul manganese-
Do not change the oil until the based f uel additives such as MMT, if
scheduled maintenance time. such gasoline is available.
Avoid hard braking for the first

200 miles (300 km).
Do not tow a trailer.
You should also follow these

recommendations with an
overhauled or exchanged engine, or
when the brakes are replaced.
282
Fuel Recommendation, Service Station Procedures
Use of gasoline with these additives Because the level of detergency and For further important fuel-related
may adversely affect performance, additives in gasoline vary in the information for your vehicle, or
and cause the malfunction indicator market, Honda endorses the use of information on gasoline that does not
lamp on your instrument panel to ‘‘TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline’’ contain MMT, visit Owner Link at
come on. If this happens, contact where available to help maintain the owners.honda.com. In Canada, visit
your dealer for service. Some performance and reliability of your www.honda.ca for additional
gasoline today is blended with vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent information on gasoline.
oxygenates such as ethanol. Your Gasoline meets a new gasoline
vehicle is designed to operate on standard jointly established by
oxygenated gasoline containing up to leading automotive manufacturers to
Before Driving
10% ethanol by volume. Do not use meet the needs of today’s advanced
gasoline containing methanol. If you engines. Qualifying gasoline retailers
notice any undesirable operating will, in most cases, identify their
symptoms, try another service gasoline as having met ‘‘TOP TIER
station or switch to another brand of Detergent Gasoline’’ standards at the
gasoline. retail location. This fuel is
guaranteed to contain the proper
level of detergent additives and be
free of metallic additives. The proper
level of detergent additives, and
absence of harmful metallic additives
in gasoline, help avoid build-up of
deposits in your engine and emission
control system.
CONTINUED
283
Service Station Procedures
Refueling The vehicle doors and the fuel fill

door will automatically relock if
FUEL FILL DOOR the remote transmitter unlock Gasoline is highly flammable
function is used. In this instance, and explosive. You can be
the security relock function can be burned or seriously injured
Push deactivated by briefly opening when handling fuel.
then closing the driver’s door.
Stop the engine, and keep
3. Outside of the vehicle, push on the heat, sparks, and flame away.
right side edge of the fuel fill door Handle fuel only outdoors.
in the middle. The fuel fill door Wipe up spills immediately.
will pop up slightly. Pull it outward
Pull out to open it.
1. Park with the driver’s side closest

to the service station pump.
2. Make sure the driver’s door is

unlocked. The fuel fill door always
locks or unlocks in conjunction
with the driver’s door.
284
5. Stop filling the tank after the fuel 6. Screw the fuel fill cap back on
HOLDER FUEL FILL CAP nozzle automatically clicks off. Do until it clicks at least once. If you
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. This do not properly tighten the cap,
leaves some room in the fuel tank you will see a ‘‘CHECK FUEL
for the fuel to expand with CAP’’ message on the information
temperature changes. display. If the system still detects
an evaporative system leak after
If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off retightening the cap, the
even though the tank is not full, malfunction indicator lamp may
there may be a problem with your come on (see page 387 ).
Before Driving
vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery
TETHER system. The system helps keep 7. Push the fuel fill door closed until
fuel vapor from going into the it latches. If the door won’t close
4. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. atmosphere. Try filling at another fully, do not force it. Unlock the
You may hear a hissing sound as pump. If this does not fix the drivers door first.
pressure inside the tank equalizes. problem, consult your dealer.
The fuel fill cap is attached to the
fuel filler with a tether. Place the
cap in the holder on the fuel fill The f uel door and its latching
door. mechanism can be permanently
damaged if the f uel door is f orced
closed when the driver’s door is locked.
CONTINUED
285
Check Fuel Cap Message Turn the engine off, and confirm the If the system still detects a leak in
fuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosen your vehicle’s evaporative emissions
it, then retighten it until it clicks at system, the malfunction indicator
least once. The message should go lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fill
off after several days of normal cap was not already tightened, turn
driving once you tighten or replace the engine off, and check or
the fuel fill cap. To scroll to another retighten the fuel fill cap until it
display, press the select/reset knob. clicks at least once. The MIL should
go off after several days of normal
The ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message driving once the cap is tightened or
will appear each time you restart the replaced. If the MIL does not go off,
engine until the system turns the have your vehicle inspected by a
message off. dealer. For more information, see
page 387 .
Your vehicle’s onboard diagnostic
system will detect a loose or missing
fuel fill cap as an evaporative system
leak. The first time a leak is detected
a ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message
appears on the information display.
286
Opening and Closing the Hood

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE LATCH
Before Driving
1. Park the vehicle, and set the 2. Put your fingers under the front Lift the hood up most of the way.
parking brake. Pull the hood edge of the hood near the center. The hydraulic supports will lift it up
release handle located under the Slide your hand to the left until the rest of the way and hold it up.
lower left corner of the dashboard. you feel the hood latch handle.
The hood will pop up slightly. Slide this handle to the right to To close the hood, lower it to about a
release the hood. Lift up the hood. foot (30 cm) above the fender, then
press down firmly with your hands.
If the hood latch handle moves stiffly, Make sure the hood is securely
or if you can open the hood without latched.
lifting the handle, the mechanism
should be cleaned and lubricated.
287
Oil Check Engine Coolant Check

MAX RESERVE TANK
UPPER MARK
DIPSTICK LOWER MARK
(orange loop) MIN
Wait a few minutes after turning the 4. Remove the dipstick again, and Look at the coolant level in the
engine off before you check the oil. check the level. It should be radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the upper and lower between the MAX and MIN lines. If
1. Remove the dipstick (orange loop). marks. it is below the MIN line, see Adding
Engine Coolant on page 337 for
2. Wipe off the dipstick with a clean If it is near or below the lower mark, information on adding the proper
cloth or paper towel. see Adding Engine Oil on page 333 . coolant.
3. Insert the dipstick all the way back Refer to Owner’s Maintenance
into its hole. Checks on page 330 for information
about checking other items on your
vehicle.
288
Fuel Economy
Actual Mileage and EPA Fuel

Economy Estimates Comparison. City MPG Highway MPG
Fuel economy is not a fixed number.
It varies based on driving conditions,
driving habits, and vehicle condition.
Therefore, it is not possible for one
set of estimates to predict fuel
economy precisely for all drivers in
all environments. Combined Fuel Estimated Annual
Economy Fuel Cost
Before Driving
The EPA fuel economy estimates
shown in the example to the right (Sample U.S. EPA label shown)
are a useful tool for comparison
when buying a vehicle. EPA achieved is also provided. Estimated Annual Fuel Cost −
estimates include: Provides an estimated annual fuel
Combined Fuel Economy − cost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000
City MPG − Represents urban Represents a combination of city and km) per year multiplied by the cost
driving in light traffic. A range of highway driving. The scale per gallon (based on EPA fuel cost
miles per gallon achieved is also represents the range of combined data) divided by the combined fuel
provided. fuel economy for other vehicles in economy.
the class.
Highway MPG − Represents a For more information on fuel
mixture of rural and interstate economy ratings and factors that
driving, in a warmed-up vehicle, affect fuel economy, visit www.
typical of longer trips in free-flowing fueleconomy.gov (Canada: Visit www.
traffic. A range of miles per gallon vehicles.gc.ca)
289
Fuel Economy
Fuel Economy Factors Use the recommended viscosity Drive Efficiently

The following factors can lower your motor oil, displaying the API Drive moderately − Rapid
vehicle’s fuel economy: Certification Seal (see page acceleration, abrupt cornering,
Aggressive driving (hard 334). and hard braking increase fuel
acceleration and braking) consumption.
Excessive idling, accelerating and Maintain proper tire inflation
braking in stop-and-go traffic − An underinflated tire increases Observe the speed limit −
Cold engine operation (engines ‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reduces Aerodynamic drag has a big effect
are more efficient when warmed fuel economy. on fuel economy at speeds above
up) 45 mph (75 km/h). Reduce your
Driving with a heavy load or the Avoid carrying excess weight in speed and you reduce the drag.
air conditioner running your vehicle − It puts a heavier Trailers, car top carriers, roof
Improperly inflated tires load on the engine, increasing fuel racks and bike racks are also big
consumption. contributors to increased drag.
Improving Fuel Economy
Keep your vehicle clean − In Avoid excessive idling − Idling
Vehicle Maintenance particular, a build-up of snow or results in 0 miles per gallon (0 kms
A properly maintained vehicle mud on your vehicle’s underside per liter).
maximizes fuel economy. Poor adds weight and rolling resistance.
maintenance can significantly reduce Frequent cleaning helps your fuel
fuel economy. Always maintain your economy.
vehicle according to the maintenance
messages displayed on the
information display (see Owner’s
Maintenance Checks on page 330 ).
For example:
290
Fuel Economy
Minimize the use of the air Checking Your Fuel Economy

conditioning system − The A/C
puts an extra load on the engine
which makes it use more fuel. Use
the fresh-air ventilation when
possible. Gallons of Miles per
Miles driven fuel Gallon
Plan and combine trips −
Combine several short trips into
one. A warmed-up engine is more
Before Driving
fuel efficient than a cold one. 100 Liter Kilometers L per 100 km
Calculating Fuel Economy
Measuring Techniques
Direct calculation is the
recommended source of information 1) Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.
about your actual fuel economy. 2) Reset trip counter to zero.
Using frequency of fill-ups or taking 3) Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.
fuel gauge readings are NOT 4) Follow one of the simple calculations above.
accurate measures of fuel economy.
Fuel economy may improve over the
first several thousand miles
(kilometers).
291
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying your vehicle, or installing Before installing any accessory:

non-Honda accessories, may make
your vehicle unsafe. Before you Improper accessories or Make sure the accessory does not
make any modifications or add any modifications can affect your obscure any lights, or interfere
accessories, be sure to read the vehicle’s handling, stability, and with proper vehicle operation or
following information. performance, and cause a performance.
crash in which you can be hurt
Accessories or killed. Be sure electronic accessories do
Your dealer has Honda accessories not overload electrical circuits
that allow you to personalize your Follow all instructions in this (see page 390 ) or interfere with
vehicle. These accessories have owner’s manual regarding the proper operation of your
been designed and approved for your accessories and modifications. vehicle.
vehicle, and are covered by warranty.
Before installing any electronic
Although non-Honda accessories When properly installed, cellular accessory, have the installer
may fit on your vehicle, they may not phones, alarms, two-way radios, and contact your dealer for assistance.
meet factory specifications, and low-powered audio systems should If possible, have your dealer
could adversely affect your vehicle’s not interfere with your vehicle’s inspect the final installation.
handling, stability, and reliability. computer controlled systems, such
as your airbags, anti-lock brakes, and Do not install accessories on the
tire pressure monitoring system. side pillars or across the rear
windows. Accessories installed in
these areas may interfere with
proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
292
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying Your Vehicle Non-Honda wheels, because they

Removing parts from your vehicle, are a universal design, can cause
or replacing components with excessive stress on suspension
non-Honda components could components, and are not
seriously affect your vehicle’s compatible with the tire pressure
handling, stability, and reliability. monitoring system (TPMS).
Here are some examples: Larger or smaller wheels and tires

Lowering the vehicle with a non- can interfere with the operation of
Honda suspension kit that your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
Before Driving
significantly reduces ground other systems.
clearance can allow the
undercarriage to hit speed bumps Modifying your steering wheel or
or other raised objects, which any other part of your vehicle’s
could cause the airbags to deploy. safety features can make the
systems ineffective.
Raising your vehicle with a
non-Honda suspension kit can If you plan to modify your vehicle,
affect the handling, stability, and consult your dealer.
reliability.
293
Carrying Cargo
Your vehicle has several convenient

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT storage areas:
DOOR POCKETS CENTER POCKETS Glove box
Door and seat-back pockets
Center pockets
Console compartment
Cargo area
Roof-rack (if installed)
However, carrying too much cargo,

or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.
GLOVE BOX
CARGO AREA SEAT-BACK POCKETS
294
Carrying Cargo
Load Limits (4)The resulting figure equals the

The maximum load for your vehicle available amount of cargo and
is 850 lbs (385 kg). Overloading or improper luggage load capacity. For
loading can affect handling and example, if the ‘‘XXX’’ amount
See Tire And Loading Information stability and cause a crash in equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be
label attached to the driver’s which you can be hurt or killed. five 150 lb. passengers in your
doorjamb. vehicle, the amount of available
Follow all load limits and other cargo and luggage load capacity is
Label Example loading guidelines in this 650 lbs.
manual. (1,400 − 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)
Before Driving
Steps for Determining Correct Load (5)Determine the combined weight
Limit − of luggage and cargo being loaded
(1)Locate the statement ‘‘The on the vehicle. That weight may
combined weight of occupants and not safely exceed the available
cargo should never exceed XXX cargo and luggage load capacity
kg or XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle’s calculated in Step 4.
This figure includes the total weight placard.
of all occupants, cargo, and (6)If your vehicle will be towing a
accessories, and the tongue load if (2)Determine the combined weight trailer, load from your trailer will
you are towing a trailer. of the driver and passengers that be transferred to your vehicle.
will be riding in your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
(3)Subtract the combined weight of cargo and luggage load capacity of
the driver and passengers from your vehicle.
XXX kg or XXX lbs. CONTINUED
295
Carrying Cargo
In addition, the total weight of the

vehicle, all occupants, accessories,
cargo, and trailer tongue load must
not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Example 1
Max Load 850 lbs Passenger Weight Cargo Weight Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross
(385 kg) 150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs 550 lbs Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both
(68 kg x 2 = 136 kg) (249 kg) are on a label on the driver’s
doorjamb.
Example 2
Max Load 850 lbs Passenger Weight Cargo Weight
(385 kg) 150 lbs x 4 = 600 lbs 250 lbs
(68 kg x 4 = 272 kg) (113 kg)
Example 3
Max Load 850 lbs Passenger Weight Cargo Weight
(385 kg) 150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs 100 lbs
(68 kg x 5 = 340 kg) (45 kg)
296
Carrying Cargo
Carrying Items in the Passenger Be sure items placed on the floor Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Area
Compartment behind the front seats cannot roll or on a Roof Rack
Store or secure all items that could under the seats and interfere with Distribute cargo evenly on the
be thrown around and hurt the driver’s ability to operate the floor of the cargo area, placing the
someone during a crash. pedals, the operation of the seats, heaviest items on the bottom and
or the operation of the sensors as far forward as possible. Tie
under the seats. down items that could be thrown
about the vehicle during a crash or
Keep all cargo below the bottom sudden stop.
of the windows. If it is higher, it
Before Driving
could interfere with the proper If you fold down the back seat, tie
operation of the side curtain down items that could be thrown
airbags. about the vehicle during a crash or
sudden stop.
Keep the glove box closed while
driving. If it is open, a passenger If you carry large items that
could injure their knees during a prevent you from closing the
crash or sudden stop. tailgate, exhaust gas can enter the
passenger area. To avoid the
possibility of carbon monoxide
poisoning, follow the instructions
on page 51 .
CONTINUED
297
Carrying Cargo
If you carry any items on a roof Cargo Hooks

rack, be sure the total weight of
the rack and the items does not FLOOR CARGO HOOK
exceed 121 lbs (55 kg).
The total weight of the roof rack

and the items should also be
included in the maximum load
limits for your vehicle.
SIDE CARGO HOOK
The four hooks can be used to install

a net for securing items. Each hook
is designed to hold up to 56.2 lbs
(25.5 kg) of weight.
298
Main Menu
Driving
This section gives you tips on Preparing to Drive ......................... 300

starting the engine under various Starting the Engine........................ 301
conditions, and how to operate the Automatic Transmission............... 302
automatic transmission. It also Parking ............................................ 307
includes important information on Braking System.............................. 308
parking your vehicle, the braking Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ................ 309
system, the vehicle stability assist Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ),
(VSA ) system, the tire pressure aka Electronic Stability Control
monitoring system (TPMS), and (ESC), System........................ 311
facts you need if you are planning to Tire Pressure Monitoring
tow a trailer. System (TPMS) ......................... 313
Towing a Trailer ............................ 316
Driving
299
Preparing to Drive
You should do the following checks 5. Check the seat adjustment (see 10. When you start the engine, check
and adjustments before you drive page 93 ). the gauges and indicators in the
your vehicle. instrument panel (see page 55 ).
6. Check the adjustment of the
1. Make sure all windows, mirrors, inside and outside mirrors (see
and outside lights are clean and pages 104 and 105 ).
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice. 7. Check the steering wheel
adjustment (see page 76 ).
2. Check that the hood is fully closed.
8. Make sure the doors and the
3. Visually check the tires. If a tire tailgate are securely closed and
looks low, use a gauge to check its locked.
pressure.
9. Fasten your seat belt. Check that
4. Check that any items you may be your passengers have fastened
carrying are stored properly or their seat belts (see page 14 ).
fastened down securely.
300
Starting the Engine
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. In cold weather, turn off all The immobilizer system protects your The engine is harder to start in cold
electrical accessories to reduce vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at
the drain on the battery. coded key (or other device) is used, the altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400
engine’s f uel system is disabled. For meters) adds to this problem.
3. Make sure the shift lever is in more inf ormation, see page 78 .
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
4. Without touching the accelerator

pedal, turn the ignition key to the
START (III) position. Do not hold
Driving
the key in the START (III)
position for more than 15 seconds
at a time. If the engine does not
start right away, pause for at least
10 seconds before trying again.
301
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lever Position Indicators The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a Shifting
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II) SHIFT LEVER
position. If it flashes while driving (in
any shift position), it indicates a
possible problem in the transmission.
If the malfunction indicator lamp

comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem with the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
have the transmission checked by RELEASE BUTTON
your dealer as soon as possible.
These indicators between the To shift from Park to any position,
tachometer and speedometer show press firmly on the brake pedal, and
which position the shift lever is in. press the release button on the front
of the shift lever, then move the
lever. You cannot shift out of Park
when the ignition switch is in the
LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I)
position.
302
To shift from: Do this: Park (P) − This position mechani- Reverse (R) − Press the brake
Press the brake pedal and cally locks the transmission. Use pedal and the release button on the
P to R press the shift lever release Park whenever you are turning off or front of the shift lever to shift from
button. starting the engine. To shift out of Park to reverse. To shift from
R to P Park, you must press on the brake reverse to neutral, come to a
N to R Press the shift lever release pedal and have your foot off the complete stop, and then shift. Press
D to D3 button. accelerator pedal. Press the release the release button before shifting
D3 to 2 button on the front of the shift lever into reverse from neutral.
2 to 1 to move it.
1 to 2 Neutral (N) − Use neutral if you
2 to D3 If you have done all of the above and need to restart a stalled engine, or if
D3 to D Move the shift lever. still cannot move the lever out of it is necessary to stop briefly with
Driving
D to N Park, see Shift Lock Release on the engine idling. Shift to the Park
N to D page 305 . position if you need to leave your
R to N vehicle for any reason. Press on the
You must also press the release brake pedal when you are moving
button to shift into Park. To avoid the shift lever from neutral to
transmission damage, come to a another gear.
complete stop before shifting into
Park. The shift lever must be in Park
before you can remove the key from
the ignition switch.
CONTINUED
303
Drive (D) − Use this position for Second (2) − To shift to second, First (1) − To shift from second to
your normal driving. The press the release button on the front first, press the release button on the
transmission automatically selects a of the shift lever. This position locks front of the shift lever. This position
suitable gear (1 through 5) for your the transmission in second gear. It locks the transmission in first gear.
speed and acceleration. does not downshift to first gear By upshifting and downshifting
when you come to a stop. through 1, 2, D3, and D, you can
Drive (D3) − To shift from D to D3, operate this transmission much like
press the shift lever release button. Use second gear: a manual transmission without a
This position is similar to D, except clutch pedal.
only the first three gears are For more power when climbing.
selected. Use D3 when towing a
trailer in hilly terrain, or to provide To increase engine braking when
engine braking when going down a going down steep hills.
steep hill. D3 can also keep the
transmission from cycling between For starting out on a slippery
third and fourth gears in stop-and-go surface or in deep snow.
driving.
To help reduce wheel spin.
When driving downhill with a

trailer.
304
Engine Speed Limiter Shift Lock Release COVER

If you exceed the maximum speed This allows you to move the shift
for the gear you are in, the engine lever out of Park if the normal
speed will enter into the tachometer’s method of pushing on the brake
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel pedal and pressing the release
the engine cut in and out. This is button does not work.
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will 1. Set the parking brake.
run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone. 2. Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
Driving
3. Put a cloth on the edge of the shift
lock release slot cover to prevent
scratches. Use a small flat-tip
screwdriver or metal fingernail file
to carefully pry up the edge of the
cover and remove it from the slot.
4. Insert the key in the shift lock

release slot.
CONTINUED
305
RELEASE BUTTON 6. Remove the key from the shift

lock release slot, then reinstall the
cover. Make sure the notch on the
cover is on the right side. Insert
the key into the ignition switch,
press the brake pedal, and restart
the engine.
If you need to use the shift lock

release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have it
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT checked by your dealer.
5. Push down on the key while you

press the release button on the
front of the shift lever and move
the shift lever out of Park to
neutral.
306
Parking
Always use the parking brake when Parking Tips If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
you park your vehicle. Make sure Make sure the moonroof and the the front wheels away from the
the parking brake is set firmly, or windows are closed. curb.
your vehicle may roll if it is parked
on an incline. Turn off the lights. If the vehicle is facing downhill,
turn the front wheels toward the
Set the parking brake before you put Place any packages, valuables, etc., curb.
the transmission in Park. This keeps where they cannot be seen from
the vehicle from moving and putting outside the vehicle or take them Make sure the parking brake is
pressure on the parking mechanism with you. fully released before driving away.
in the transmission. Driving with the parking brake
Lock the doors and the tailgate. partially set can overheat or
Driving
damage the rear brakes.
Check the indicator on the
instrument panel to verify that the
security system is set.
Never park over dry leaves, tall

grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.
307
Braking System
Your vehicle is equipped with disc Constant application of the brakes Braking System Design
brakes at all four wheels. A power when going down a long hill builds The hydraulic system that operates
assist helps reduce the effort needed up heat and reduces their effective- the brakes has two separate circuits.
on the brake pedal. The emergency ness. Use the engine to assist the Each circuit works diagonally across
brake assist system increases the brakes by taking your foot off the the vehicle (the left-front brake is
stopping force when you depress the accelerator and downshifting to a connected with the right-rear brake,
brake pedal hard in an emergency lower gear. etc.). If one circuit should develop a
situation. The anti-lock brake system problem, you will still have braking
(ABS) helps you retain steering Check the brakes after driving at two wheels.
control when braking very hard. through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel Brake Pad Wear Indicators
Resting your foot on the pedal keeps normal. If not, apply them gently and The front and rear disc brakes on all
the brakes applied lightly, builds up frequently until they do. Be extra models have audible brake pad wear
heat, reduces their effectiveness and cautious in your driving. indicators.
reduces brake pad life. In addition,
fuel economy can be reduced. It also If the brake pads need replacing, you
keeps your brake lights on all the will hear a distinctive, metallic
time, confusing drivers behind you. screeching sound when you apply
the brake pedal. If you do not have
the brake pads replaced, they will
screech all the time. It is normal for
the brakes to occasionally squeal or
squeak when you apply them.
308
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system (ABS) You will feel a pulsation in the brake ABS Indicator
helps prevent the wheels from pedal when the ABS activates, and
locking up, and helps you retain you may hear some noise. This is If this indicator comes on, the anti-
steering control by pumping the normal: it is the ABS rapidly lock function of the braking system
brakes rapidly, much faster than a pumping the brakes. On dry has shut down. The brakes still work
person can do it. pavement, you will need to press on like a conventional system, but
the brake pedal very hard before the without anti-lock. You should have
The electronic brake distribution ABS activates. However, you may your dealer inspect your vehicle as
(EBD) system, which is part of the feel the ABS activate immediately if soon as possible.
ABS, also balances the front-to-rear you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
braking distribution according to If the ABS indicator comes on while
vehicle loading. driving, test the brakes as shown on
Driving
page 388 .
You should never pump the brake pedal.
Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal. This is sometimes
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’
CONTINUED
309
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
If the ABS indicator and the brake Important Safety Reminders A vehicle with ABS may require a
system indicator come on together, ABS does not reduce the time or longer distance to stop on loose or
and the parking brake is fully distance it takes to stop the uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
released, the EBD system may also vehicle. It only helps with the snow, than a vehicle without anti-
be shut down. steering control during braking. lock.
Test your brakes as instructed on ABS will not prevent a skid that
page 388 . If the brakes feel normal, results from changing direction
drive slowly and have your vehicle abruptly, such as trying to take a
repaired by your dealer as soon as corner too fast or making a sudden
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking lane change. Always drive at a safe
which could cause the rear wheels to speed for the road and weather
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of conditions.
control.
ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability. Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
310
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
The vehicle stability assist (VSA) VSA OFF Indicator If the low tire pressure indicator or
system helps to stabilize the vehicle TPMS indicator comes on, the VSA
during cornering if the vehicle turns When VSA is off, the VSA OFF system automatically turns on even if
more or less than desired. It also indicator comes on as a reminder. the VSA system is turned off by
assists you in maintaining traction pressing the VSA OFF switch (see
while accelerating on loose or Vehicle Stability Assist page 312 ). If this happens, you
slippery road surfaces. It does this (VSA) System Indicator cannot turn the VSA system off by
by regulating the engine’s output and When VSA activates, you will see the pressing the VSA OFF switch again.
by selectively applying the brakes. VSA system indicator blink.
Without VSA, your vehicle will have
When VSA activates, you may notice If this indicator comes on while normal braking and cornering ability,
that the engine does not respond to driving, pull to the side of the road but it will not have VSA traction and
Driving
the accelerator in the same way it when it is safe, and turn off the stability enhancement.
does at other times. There may also engine. Reset the system by
be some noise from the VSA restarting the engine. If the VSA
hydraulic system. You will also see system indicator stays on or comes
the VSA system indicator blink. back on while driving, have the VSA
system inspected by your dealer.
The VSA system cannot enhance the
vehicle’s driving stability in all NOTE: The main function of the
situations and does not control your VSA system is generally known as
vehicle’s entire braking system. It is Electronic Stability Control (ESC).
still your responsibility to drive and The system also includes a traction
corner at reasonable speeds and to control function.
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
311
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
VSA OFF Switch VSA is turned on every time you VSA and Tire Sizes
start the engine, even if you turned it Driving with varying tire or wheel
VSA OFF SWITCH off the last time you drove the sizes may cause the VSA to
vehicle. malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are of the same size
In certain unusual conditions when and type as your original tires (see
your vehicle gets stuck in shallow page 365 ).
mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the VSA temporarily If you install winter tires, make sure
switched off. When the VSA system they are the same size as those that
is off, the traction control system is were originally supplied with your
also off. You should only attempt to vehicle. Exercise the same caution
free your vehicle with the VSA off if during winter driving as you would if
you are not able to free it when the your vehicle was not equipped with
This switch is under the driver’s side VSA is on. VSA.
vent. To turn the VSA system on and
off, press and hold it until you hear a Immediately after freeing your
beep. vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on
again. We do not recommend driving
When VSA is off, the VSA OFF your vehicle with the VSA and
indicator comes on as a reminder. traction control systems switched off.
Press and hold the switch again. It
turns the system back on.
312
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire Low Tire Pressure Driving on a significantly under
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) Indicator inflated tire causes the tire to
that turns on every time you start the When the low tire pressure indicator overheat and can lead to tire failure.
engine and monitors the pressure in is on, one or more of your tires is Underinflation also reduces fuel
your tires while driving. significantly underinflated. You efficiency and tire tread life, and may
should stop and check your tires as affect the vehicle’s handling and
Each tire has its own pressure soon as possible, and inflate them to stopping ability.
sensor (not including the spare tire). the proper pressure as indicated on
If the air pressure of a tire becomes the vehicle’s tire information placard. Because tire pressure varies by
significantly low while driving, the temperature and other conditions,
sensor in that tire immediately sends If you think you can safely drive a the low tire pressure indicator may
a signal that causes the low tire short distance to a service station, come on unexpectedly.
Driving
pressure indicator to come on. proceed slowly, and inflate the tire to
the recommended pressure shown
on the driver’s doorjamb.
If the tire is flat, or if the tire

pressure is too low to continue
driving, replace the tire with the
compact spare tire (see page 372 ).
If you cannot make the low tire

pressure indicator go out after
inflating the tires to the specified
values, have your dealer check the
system as soon as possible. CONTINUED
313
For example, if you check and fill information label and in the owner’s When you restart the vehicle with
your tires in a warm area, then drive manual (see page 360 ). the compact spare tire, the TPMS
in extremely cold weather, the tire indicator may also come on and stay
pressure will be lower than Tire Pressure Monitoring on after driving several miles
measured and could be underinflated System (TPMS) Indicator (kilometers).
and cause the low tire pressure This indicator comes on and stays on
indicator to come on. Or, if you if there is a problem with the tire
check and adjust your tire pressure pressure monitoring system.
in cooler conditions, and drive into
extremely hot conditions, the tire If this happens, the system will shut
may become overinflated. However, off and no longer monitor tire
the low tire pressure indicator will pressures. Have the system checked
not come on if the tires are by your dealer as soon as possible.
overinflated.
If the low tire pressure indicator or
Refer to page 359 for tire inflation TPMS indicator comes on, the VSA
guidelines. system automatically turns on even if
the VSA system is turned off by
Although your tire pressure is pressing the VSA OFF switch (see
monitored, you must manually check page 312 ). If this happens, you
the tire pressures monthly. cannot turn the VSA system off by
pressing the VSA OFF switch again.
Each tire, including the spare, should
be checked monthly when cold, and
set to the recommended inflation
pressure as specified on the tire
314
Changing a Tire with TPMS The low tire pressure indicator or As required by the FCC:
If you have a flat tire, the low tire the TPMS indicator will go off, after This device complies with Part 15 of the
pressure indicator will come on. several miles (kilometers) driving, FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
Replace the flat tire with the when you replace the spare tire with following two conditions: (1) This device
compact spare tire (see page 372 ). the specified regular tire equipped may not cause harmful interference, and
with the tire pressure monitor sensor. (2) this device must accept any
Each wheel (except the compact interference received, including
spare tire wheel) is equipped with a Never use a puncture-repairing agent interference that may cause undesired
tire pressure sensor. You must use in a flat tire. If used, you will have to operation.
TPMS specific wheels. It is replace the tire pressure sensor.
recommended that you always have Have the flat tire repaired by your Changes or modifications not expressly
your tires serviced by your dealer or dealer as soon as possible. approved by the party responsible for
Driving
qualified technician. compliance could void the user’s
After you replace the flat tire with
the compact spare tire, the low tire This device complies with Industry
pressure indicator stays on. This is Canada Standard RSS-210.
normal; the system is not monitoring Operation is subject to the following two
the spare tire pressure. Manually conditions: (1) this device may not cause
check the spare tire pressure to be interference, and (2) this device must
sure it is correct. After several miles accept any interference that may cause
(kilometers) driving with the undesired operation of the device.
compact spare tire, the TPMS
indicator comes on and the low tire
pressure indicator goes off.
315
Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle has been designed Load Limits

primarily to carry passengers and
their cargo. You can also use it to
tow a trailer if you carefully observe
the load limits, use the proper
equipment, and follow the guidelines
in this section.
Break-In Period
Avoid towing a trailer during your
vehicle’s first 600 miles (1,000 km)
(see page 282 ).
Total Trailer Weight: The Tongue Load: The weight that the
Exceeding any load limit or maximum allowable weight of the tongue of a fully-loaded trailer puts
improperly loading your vehicle trailer and everything in or on it on the hitch should be approximately
and trailer can cause a crash in must not exceed 1,500 lbs (680 kg). 10% of the total trailer weight. Too
which you can be seriously hurt Towing a load that is too heavy much tongue load reduces front-tire
or killed. can seriously affect your vehicle’s traction and steering control. Too
handling and performance. It can little tongue load can make the
Check the loading of your also damage the engine and trailer unstable and cause it to sway.
vehicle and trailer carefully drivetrain.
before starting to drive.
316
Towing a Trailer
To achieve a proper tongue load, Gross Axle Weight Rating Checking Loads
start by loading 60% of the load (GAWR): The best way to confirm that all
toward the front of the trailer and The maximum allowable weight at loads are within limits is to check
40% toward the rear, then re-adjust the vehicle axles is: them at a public scale. For public
the load as needed. scales in your area, check your local
2WD models: phone book, or contact your trailer
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 2,623 lbs (1,190 kg) dealer or rental agency for
(GVWR): on the front axle assistance.
The maximum allowable weight of 2,381 lbs (1,080 kg)
the vehicle, all occupants, all on the rear axle If you cannot get to a public scale,
accessories, all cargo, and the you can estimate the total trailer
tongue load is: 4WD models: weight by adding the weight of your
Driving
2,668 lbs (1,210 kg) trailer (as quoted by the
2WD models: on the front axle manufacturer) with everything in or
4,938 lbs (2,240 kg) 2,513 lbs (1,140 kg) on the trailer.
4WD models: on the rear axle
5,115 lbs (2,320 kg) If you normally pull the same load
each time you tow a trailer, you can
use a suitable scale or a special
tongue load gauge to check the
tongue load the first time you set up
a towing combination (a fully loaded
vehicle and trailer), then recheck the
tongue load whenever the conditions
change.
317
Towing a Trailer
Towing Equipment and Hitches Trailer Brakes

Accessories Any hitch used on your vehicle must There are two common types of
Towing can require a variety of be properly bolted to the underbody. trailer brakes: surge and electric.
equipment, depending on the size of Surge brakes are common for boat
your trailer, how it will be used, how Safety Chains trailers, since the brakes will get wet.
much load you are towing, and Always use safety chains when you
where you tow. tow a trailer. Make sure the chains If you choose electric brakes, be
are secured to the trailer and hitch, sure they are electronically actuated.
Discuss your needs with your trailer and that they cross under the tongue Do not attempt to tap into your
sales or rental agency, and follow the and can catch the trailer if it vehicle’s hydraulic system. No
guidelines in the rest of this section. becomes unhitched. Leave enough matter how successful it may seem,
Also make sure that all equipment is slack to allow the trailer to turn any attempt to attach trailer brakes
properly installed and that it meets corners easily, but do not let the to your vehicle’s hydraulic system
federal, state, provincial, territorial, chains drag on the ground. will lower braking effectiveness and
and local regulations. create a potential hazard.
See your trailer dealer or rental

agency for more information on
installing electric brakes.
318
Towing a Trailer
Trailer Lights GROUND TRAILER LEFT TURN Since lighting and wiring vary by
Trailer lights and equipment must (BLACK) (YELLOW) SIGNAL (BLUE) trailer type and brand, you should
comply with federal, state, provincial, have a qualified technician install a
territorial, and local regulations. suitable connector between the
Check with your local trailer dealer vehicle and the trailer. Improper
or rental agency for the equipment or installation can cause
requirements in the area where you damage to your vehicle’s electrical
plan to tow, and use only equipment system and affect your vehicle
designed for your vehicle. warranty.
RIGHT TURN BRAKE TAILLIGHT
SIGNAL LIGHT (RED)
(GREEN) (LIGHT
Driving
GREEN)
Your vehicle has a trailer lighting

connector located behind the left
side panel in the cargo area. Refer to
the drawing above for the wiring
color code and purpose of each pin.
If you use a non-Honda trailer

lighting harness and converter, you
can get the connector and pins that
mate with the connector in your
vehicle from your dealer.
CONTINUED
319
Towing a Trailer
Additional Towing Equipment Pre-Tow Checklist The lights and brakes on your
Many states and Canadian When preparing to tow, and before vehicle and the trailer are working
provinces/territories require special driving away, be sure to check the properly.
outside mirrors when towing a trailer. following:
Even if they don’t, you should install Your vehicle tires and spare are
special mirrors if you cannot clearly The vehicle has been properly properly inflated, and the trailer
see behind you, or if the trailer serviced, and the suspension and tires and spare are inflated as
creates a blind spot. the cooling system are in good recommended by the trailer
operating condition. maker.
Ask your trailer sales or rental
agency if any other items are The trailer has been properly
recommended or required for your serviced and is in good condition.
towing situation.
All weights and loads are within
limits.
The hitch, safety chains, and any

other attachments are secure.
All items in or on the trailer are

properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.
320
Towing a Trailer
Driving Safely With a Trailer Making Turns and Braking When driving down hills, reduce
The added weight, length, and Make turns more slowly and wider your speed, and shift down to second
height of a trailer will affect your than normal. The trailer tracks a gear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, and
vehicle’s handling and performance, smaller arc than your vehicle, and it remember, it will take longer to slow
so driving with a trailer requires can hit or run over something the down and stop when towing a trailer.
some special driving skills and vehicle misses. Allow more time and
techniques. distance for braking. Do not brake or If you must stop when facing uphill,
turn suddenly as this could cause the use the foot brake or parking brake.
For your safety and the safety of trailer to jackknife or turn over. Do not try to hold the vehicle in
others, take time to practice driving place by pressing on the accelerator,
maneuvers before heading for the Driving on Hills as this can cause the automatic
open road, and follow the guidelines When climbing hills, closely watch transmission to overheat.
Driving
in this section. your temperature gauge. If it nears
the red (Hot) mark, turn the air Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting
Towing Speeds and Gears conditioning off, reduce speed and, if Crosswinds and air turbulence
Drive slower than normal in all necessary, pull to the side of the caused by passing trucks can disrupt
driving situations, and obey posted road to let the engine cool. your steering and cause the trailer to
speed limits for vehicles with trailers. sway. When being passed by a large
Use the D position when towing a If the automatic transmission shifts vehicle, keep a constant speed, and
trailer on level roads. D3 is the frequently while going up a hill, shift steer straight ahead. Do not try to
proper shift lever position to use to D3. make quick steering or braking
when towing a trailer in hilly terrain. corrections.
(See ‘‘Driving on Hills’’ in the
following column for additional gear
information.)
321
Towing a Trailer
Backing Up Towing Your Vehicle

Always drive slowly and have Your vehicle is not designed to be
someone guide you when backing up. towed behind a motor home. If your
Grip the bottom of the steering wheel, vehicle needs to be towed in an
then turn the wheel to the left to get emergency, see page 397 .
the trailer to move to the left. Turn
the wheel to the right to move the
trailer to the right.
Parking
Follow all normal precautions when
parking, including firmly setting the
parking brake and putting the
transmission in Park. Also, place
wheel chocks at each of the trailer’s
tires.
322
Main Menu
Maintenance
This section explains why it is U.S. Vehicles: Maintenance Safety ....................... 324
important to keep your vehicle well Maintenance, replacement, or Maintenance MinderTM.................. 325
maintained and how to follow basic repair of emissions control Fluid Locations............................... 332
maintenance safety precautions. devices and systems may be done Adding Engine Oil ......................... 333
by any automotive repair Changing the Engine Oil and
This section also includes establishment or individual using Filter ............................................ 335
instructions on how to read the parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA Engine Coolant ............................... 337
Maintenance Minder messages on standards. Windshield Washers ..................... 339
the information display, and Transmission Fluid ........................ 340
instructions for simple maintenance Automatic Transmission........... 340
tasks you may want to take care of Brake Fluid ..................................... 342
yourself. Power Steering Fluid..................... 343
Timing Belt ..................................... 343
If you have the skills and tools to Lights .............................................. 344
Maintenance
perform more complex maintenance Cleaning the Seat Belts ................. 353
tasks on your vehicle, you may want Floor Mats ...................................... 353
to purchase the service manual. See Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 354
page 419 for information on how to Audio Antenna ............................... 355
obtain a copy, or see your dealer. Wiper Blades .................................. 355
Tires ................................................ 359
Checking the Battery .................... 367
Vehicle Storage .............................. 368
Interior Care ................................... 369
323
Maintenance Safety
All service items not detailed in this Injury from moving parts. Do
section should be performed by a not run the engine unless
certified technician or other qualified Improperly maintaining this instructed to do so.
mechanic. vehicle, or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
Important Safety Precautions cause a crash in which you can
To eliminate potential hazards, read be seriously hurt or killed. Failure to properly follow
the instructions before you begin, maintenance instructions and
and make sure you have the tools Always follow the inspection precautions can cause you to
and skills required. and maintenance be seriously hurt or killed.
Make sure your vehicle is parked recommendations and
on level ground, the parking brake schedules in this owner’s Always follow the procedures
is set, and the engine is off. manual. and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
To clean parts, use a commercially
available degreaser or parts Potential Vehicle Hazards
cleaner, not gasoline. Carbon Monoxide poison Some of the most important safety
from engine exhaust. Be sure precautions are given here. However,
To reduce the possibility of fire or there is adequate ventilation we cannot warn you of every
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, whenever you operate the conceivable hazard that can arise in
and flames away from the battery engine. performing maintenance. Only you
and all fuel-related parts. can decide whether or not you
Burns from hot parts. Let the should perform a given task.
Wear eye protection and engine and exhaust system cool
protective clothing when working down before touching any parts.
with the battery or compressed air.
324
Maintenance MinderTM
Your vehicle displays engine oil life Engine Oil Life Display The remaining engine oil life is
and maintenance service items on shown on the display according to
the information display to show you SELECT/RESET KNOB this table:
when you should have your dealer do
engine oil replacement and indicated Calculated Engine Displayed
maintenance service. Oil Life (%) Engine Oil Life (%)
100% − 91% 100%
Based on the engine operating 90% − 81% 90%
conditions, the onboard computer in 80% − 71% 80%
your vehicle calculates the remaining 70% − 61% 70%
engine oil life and displays it as a 60% − 51% 60%
percentage. ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR 50% − 41% 50%
U.S. model is shown. 40% − 31% 40%
30% − 21% 30%
Maintenance
To see the current engine oil life, 20% − 16% 20%
turn the ignition switch to the ON 15% − 11% 15%
(II) position, then press and release 10% − 6% 10%
the select/reset knob repeatedly 5% − 1% 5%
until the engine oil life indicator 0% 0%
appears (see page 64 ).
CONTINUED
325
MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR
ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR

MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE(S)
If the remaining engine oil life is 15 The 15 and 10 percent oil life When the remaining engine oil life is
to 6 percent, you will see the engine indicators remind you that your 5 to 1 percent, you will see a
oil life indicator every time you turn vehicle will soon be due for ‘‘SERVICE’’ message along with the
the ignition switch to the ON (II) scheduled maintenance. same maintenance item code(s),
position. The Maintenance Minder every time you turn the ignition
indicator will also come on, and the switch to the ON (II) position.
maintenance item code(s) for other
scheduled maintenance items
needing service will be displayed
next to the engine oil life indicator.
326
The maintenance item code or codes

indicate the main and sub items
required at the time of the oil change
(see page 331 ).
You can switch the information

display from the engine oil life
display to the odometer or the trip
meter. Press and release the select/
reset knob on the instrument panel.
When the engine oil life is 15 to 1

percent, the Maintenance Minder NEGATIVE DISTANCE TRAVELED
indicator ( ) comes on every
Maintenance
time you turn the ignition switch to When the remaining engine oil life is If you do not perform the indicated
the ON (II) position, then it goes out 0 percent, the engine oil life indicator maintenance, negative distance
if you switch the information display. will blink. The display comes on traveled is displayed and begins to
every time you turn the ignition blink after the vehicle has been
When you see this message, have switch to the ON (II) position. The driven 10 miles (10 km) or more.
the indicated maintenance Maintenance Minder indicator
performed by your dealer as soon as ( ) also comes on and remains Negative distance traveled means
possible. on in the instrument panel. When your vehicle has passed the
you see this message, immediately maintenance required point.
have the indicated maintenance done Immediately have the indicated
by your dealer. maintenance done by your dealer.
CONTINUED
327
To change the information display Maintenance Main Items and Sub Resetting the Engine Oil Life
from the engine oil life display to the Items Display
odometer or the trip meter, press Your dealer will reset the display
and release the select/reset knob. MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE after completing the required
MINDER INDICATOR MAIN ITEM
maintenance service. You will see
When the engine oil life is 0 percent ‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the information
or negative distance traveled, the display the next time you turn the
Maintenance Minder indicator ignition switch to the ON (II)
( ) remains on even if you position.
change the information display.
If maintenance service is done by
Immediately have the service someone other than your dealer,
performed, and make sure to reset MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM(S) reset the Maintenance Minder as
the display as described as follows. U.S. model is shown. follows:
All maintenance items displayed on 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON

the information display are in code. (II) position.
For an explanation of these
maintenance codes, see page 331 . 2. Press the select/reset knob
repeatedly until the engine oil life
indicator is displayed.
328
Important Maintenance
Precautions
If you have the required service
done but do not reset the display, or
reset the display without doing the
service, the system will not show the
correct maintenance intervals. This
can lead to serious mechanical
problems because you will no longer
have an accurate record of when
maintenance is needed.
Your authorized Honda dealer

3. Press the select/reset knob for 4. Press the select/reset knob for knows your vehicle best and can
Maintenance
about 10 seconds. The engine oil another 5 seconds. The provide competent, efficient service.
life and the maintenance item maintenance item code(s) will
code(s) will blink. disappear, and the engine oil life
will reset to ‘‘100.’’
CONTINUED
329
However, service at a dealer is not U.S. Vehicles: Engine oil level − Check every
mandatory to keep your warranties According to state and federal time you fill the fuel tank. See
in effect. Maintenance may be done regulations, failure to perform page 288 .
by any qualified service facility or maintenance on the items marked
person who is skilled in this type of with ＃ will not void your emissions Engine coolant level − Check the
automotive service. Make sure to warranties. However, all radiator reserve tank every time
have the service facility or person maintenance services should be you fill the fuel tank. See page 288 .
reset the display as previously performed in accordance with the
described. Keep all receipts as proof intervals indicated by the Automatic transmission − Check
of completion, and have the person information display. the fluid level monthly. See page
who does the work fill out your 340 .
Honda Service History or Canadian Owner’s Maintenance Checks
Maintenance Log. Check your You should check the following Brakes − Check the fluid level
warranty booklet for more items at the specified intervals. If monthly. See page 342 .
information. you are unsure of how to perform
any check, turn to the appropriate Tires − Check the tire pressure
We recommend using Honda parts page listed. monthly. Examine the tread for
and fluids whenever you have wear and foreign objects. See page
maintenance done. These are 359 .
manufactured to the same high
quality standards as the original Lights − Check the operation of
components, so you can be confident all the lights monthly. See page
of their performance and durability. 344 .
330
Symbol Maintenance Main Items Symbol Maintenance Sub Items

A Replace engine oil＊1 1 Rotate tires
B Replace engine oil＊1 and oil filter 2 Replace air cleaner element
Inspect front and rear brakes If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000
Check parking brake adjustment miles (24,000 km).
Inspect these items: Replace dust and pollen filter
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high
Suspension components concentrations of soot in the air from industry and from
Driveshaft boots diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA) (24,000 km).
Maintenance Minder
All fluid levels and condition of fluids Inspect drive belt
Exhaust system＃ 3 Replace transmission and transfer fluid (4WD only)
Fuel lines and connections＃ 4 Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
＊1 : If the message ‘‘SERVICE’’ does not appear more than 12 months after the If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over
display is reset, change the engine oil every year. 110°F, 43°C), in very low temperatures (under −20°F,
−29°C) or tow a trailer, replace every 60,000 miles
＃ : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the center (U.S.)/100,000 km (Canada).
column on page 330 . Inspect valve clearance
5 Replace engine coolant
NOTE: Independent of the Maintenance Minder information, replace the brake 6 Replace rear differential fluid (4WD only)
fluid every 3 years.
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.
331
Fluid Locations
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK

(Orange loop) BRAKE FLUID
(Black cap)
POWER STEERING FLUID AUTOMATIC

(Red cap) TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
ENGINE COOLANT
RESERVOIR RADIATOR CAP
332
Adding Engine Oil
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and Recommended Engine Oil
tighten it securely. Wait a few Oil is a major contributor to your
minutes, and recheck the oil level on engine’s performance and longevity.
the engine oil dipstick. Do not fill Always use a premium-grade 0W-20
above the upper mark; you could detergent oil displaying the API
damage the engine. Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
Unscrew and remove the engine oil
Maintenance
fill cap on top of the valve cover.
Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any
spills immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
CONTINUED
333
Adding Engine Oil
Honda Motor Oil is the preferred The oil viscosity or weight is Synthetic Oil
0W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is provided on the container’s label. You may use a synthetic motor oil if
highly recommended that you use 0W-20 oil is formulated for year- it meets the same requirements
Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for round protection of your vehicle to given for a conventional motor oil: it
optimum engine protection. Make improve cold weather starting and displays the API certification seal,
sure the API Certification Seal says fuel economy. and it is the proper weight. You must
‘‘For Gasoline Engines’’. follow the oil and filter change
intervals shown on the information
display.
Engine Oil Additives

Your vehicle does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely
affect the engine or transmission
performance and durability.
Ambient Temperature
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
334
Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
Always change the oil and filter WASHER OIL FILTER

according to the maintenance
messages shown on the information
display. The oil and filter collect
contaminants that can damage your
engine if they are not removed
regularly.
Changing the oil and filter requires

special tools and access from
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service station- OIL DRAIN BOLT
type hydraulic lift for this service.
Unless you have the knowledge and 2. Open the hood, and remove the 3. Remove the oil filter and let the
Maintenance
proper equipment, you should have engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil remaining oil drain. A special
this maintenance done by a skilled drain bolt and washer from the wrench (available from your
technician. bottom of the engine. Drain the oil dealer) is required.
into an appropriate container.
1. Run the engine until it reaches Make sure the oil filter gasket is
normal operating temperature, not stuck to the contacting surface
then shut it off. of the engine. If it is, remove it
before installing a new oil filter.
CONTINUED
335
Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
4. Install a new oil filter according to 7. Replace the engine oil fill cap.
the instructions that come with it. Start the engine. The oil pressure
Make sure to clean off any dirt indicator should go out within 5 Improper disposal of engine oil can be
and dust on the contacting surface seconds. If it does not, turn off the harmf ul to the environment. If you
of a new oil filter. engine, and check your work. change your own oil, please dispose of
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
5. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, 8. Let the engine run for several container and take it to a recycling
then reinstall the drain bolt. minutes, then check the drain bolt center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
Tighten the drain bolt to: and oil filter for leaks. or dump it on the ground.
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
9. Turn off the engine, let it sit for
6. Refill the engine with the recom- several minutes, then check the oil
mended oil. level on the dipstick. If necessary,
add more oil.
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
336
Engine Coolant
Adding Engine Coolant Always use Honda Long-life Anti- If the reserve tank is completely
freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant empty, you should also check the
is pre-mixed with 50 percent coolant level in the radiator.
antifreeze and 50 percent distilled
water. Never add straight antifreeze
or plain water.
Removing the radiator cap
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not while the engine is hot can
available, you may use another cause the coolant to spray out,
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a seriously scalding you.
temporary replacement. Make sure it
is a high-quality coolant Always let the engine and
RESERVE TANK recommended for aluminum engines. radiator cool down before
Continued use of any non-Honda removing the radiator cap.
Maintenance
If the coolant level in the reserve coolant can result in corrosion,
tank is at or below the MIN line, add causing the cooling system to
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line. malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
Inspect the cooling system for leaks. system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
CONTINUED
337
Engine Coolant
4. The coolant level should be up to 6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
the base of the filler neck. Add Fill it to halfway between the MAX
RADIATOR CAP coolant if it is low. and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Pour the coolant slowly and
carefully so you do not spill any. Do not add any rust inhibitors or
Clean up any spill immediately; it other additives to your vehicle’s
could damage components in the cooling system. They may not be
engine compartment. compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
5. Put the radiator cap back on, and
tighten it fully.
1. Make sure the engine and radiator

are cool.
2. Relieve any pressure in the cooling

system by turning the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without
pressing down.
3. Remove the radiator cap by

turning it counterclockwise.
338
Windshield Washers
LEVEL GAUGE Fill the reservoir with a good-quality

windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and Do not use engine antif reeze or a
prevents freezing in cold weather. vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze
When you refill the reservoir, clean can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
the edges of the windshield wiper a vinegar/water solution can damage
blades with windshield washer fluid the windshield washer pump. Use only
on a clean cloth. This will help to commercially-available windshield
condition the blade edges. washer f luid.
Check the level in the windshield
Maintenance
washer reservoir at least monthly
during normal use.
Check the fluid level by removing

the cap and looking at the level
gauge.
Canadian models only

The washer level indicator will come
on when the level is low (see page
62 ).
339
Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission 2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)

from the transmission, and wipe it
DIPSTICK with a clean cloth.
UPPER
MARK
LOWER
MARK
Check the fluid level with the engine 3. Insert the dipstick all the way into
at normal operating temperature. the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
Start the engine, let it run until the 4. Remove the dipstick and check
radiator fan comes on, then shut the fluid level. It should be
off the engine. For accurate between the upper and lower
results, wait about 60 seconds (but marks.
no longer than 90 seconds) before
doing step 2.
340
Transmission Fluid
5. If the level is below the lower 6. Insert the dipstick all the way back
mark, add fluid into the dipstick into the transmission securely as
hole to bring it to the level shown in the illustration. Use only Honda ATF DW-1 (automatic
between the upper and lower transmission f luid). Do not mix with
marks. The transmission should be drained other transmission f luids.
and refilled with new fluid according Using transmission f luid other than
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully to the Maintenance MinderTM (see Honda ATF DW-1 may cause
so you do not spill any. Clean up page 331 ). deterioration in transmission operation
any spill immediately; it could and durability, and could result in
damage components in the engine If you are not sure how to add fluid, damage to the transmission.
compartment. contact your dealer. Damage resulting f rom the use of
transmission f luid other than Honda
Always use Honda ATF DW-1 ATF DW-1 is not covered by the Honda
(automatic transmission fluid). new vehicle warranty.
Maintenance
341
Brake Fluid
Check the fluid level in the brake Using any non-Honda brake fluid can MAX
fluid reservoir monthly. cause corrosion and decrease the life
of the system. Have the brake
Independent of the Maintenance system flushed and refilled with
Minder information, replace the Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
brake fluid every 3 years. DOT 3 as soon as possible.
Always use Honda Heavy Duty Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not compatible with your vehicle’s
available, you should use only DOT 3 braking system and can cause
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed extensive damage.
container, as a temporary MIN
replacement.
The fluid level should be between
the MIN and MAX marks on the side
of the reservoir. If the level is at or
below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
342
Power Steering Fluid, Timing Belt
Power Steering Fluid Always use Honda Power Steering Timing Belt
Fluid. You may use another power The timing belt should be replaced
UPPER LEVEL steering fluid as an emergency according to the Maintenance
replacement, but have the power MinderTM (see page 331 ).
steering system flushed and refilled
with Honda PSF as soon as possible. Replace the timing belt every 60,000
miles (100,000 km) if you regularly
A low power steering fluid level can drive your vehicle in any of the
indicate a leak in the system. Check following conditions:
the fluid level frequently, and have
the system inspected as soon as In very high temperatures
possible. (over 110°F, 43°C).
LOWER LEVEL In very low temperatures
(under −20°F, −29°C).
Maintenance
Check the level on the side of the Frequently towing a trailer.
reservoir when the engine is cold. Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t
The fluid should be between the or right lock and holding it there can
UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL. damage the power steering pump.
If not, add power steering fluid to the
UPPER LEVEL.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully

so you do not spill any. Clean up
any spills immediately; it could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
343
Lights
Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight Bulb High Beam Headlight

The headlights were properly aimed Your vehicle has halogen headlight
when your vehicle was new. If you bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
regularly carry heavy items in the it by its base, and protect the glass
cargo area or pull a trailer, from contact with your skin or hard
readjustment may be required. objects. If you touch the glass, clean
Adjustments should be done by your it with denatured alcohol and a clean
dealer or another qualified cloth.
technician.
Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot

when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch STAY
on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter. 1. Open the hood.
To change a bulb on the

passenger’s side, remove the
engine coolant reserve tank by
pulling it out of its stay.
344
Lights
4. Install the new bulb, and turn it 6. Turn on the headlights to test the
one-quarter turn clockwise to lock new bulb.
TAB ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR it in place.
Passenger’s side
5. Push the electrical connector onto Reinstall the engine coolant
the bulb. reserve tank.
BULB
Maintenance
2. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab to unlock it, then slide the
connector off the bulb.
3. Remove the bulb by turning it

approximately one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
CONTINUED
345
Lights
Low Beam Headlight 6. Install the new bulb, and turn it

one-quarter turn clockwise to lock
HOLDING CLIP BULB it in place.
7. Push the electrical connector onto

the bulb.
TAB 8. Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
9. Put the inner fender cover in place.

Install the holding clip. Lock it in
SCREW ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR place by pushing on the center.
Tighten the screw securely.
1. To change the passenger’s side 3. Pull the inner fender cover away
bulb, start the engine, turn the from the fender and bumper.
steering wheel all the way to the
left, and turn off the engine. To 4. Remove the electrical connector
change the driver’s side bulb, turn from the bulb by pushing on the
the steering wheel to the right. tab to unlock it, then slide the
connector off the bulb.
2. Use a flat-tip screwdriver to
remove the holding clip from the 5. Remove the bulb by turning it
inner fender, and remove the approximately one-quarter turn
screw with a Phillips-head counterclockwise.
screwdriver.
346
Lights
Replacing a Front Turn Signal/

Parking Light Bulb
FASTENER SPLASH BULB
SEPARATOR
TAB
STAY DUCT SOCKET
Maintenance
1. Open the hood. To change a bulb on the driver’s side, 2. Remove the socket from the
remove the fastener with a flat-tip headlight assembly by turning it
To change the turn signal bulb on screwdriver, and remove the splash one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
the passenger’s side, remove the separator by pushing the tab. Then
engine coolant reserve tank by remove the duct. 3. To remove the burned out bulb,
pulling it out of its stay. push it in and turn it
counterclockwise until it unlocks.
CONTINUED
347
Lights
4. Install the new bulb and turn it Replacing a Front Side Marker
clockwise to lock it in place. Light Bulb HOLDING CLIP
1. To change the bulb on the driver’s
5. Insert the socket back into the side, start the engine, turn the
headlight assembly. Turn it steering wheel all the way to the
clockwise to lock it in place. right, then turn off the engine. To
change the bulb on the passenger’s
6. Turn on the lights to make sure side, turn the steering wheel to the
the new bulb is working. left.
7. Driver’s Side
Reinstall the splash separator and SCREW
duct securely. Reinstall the
fastener and secure it by pushing 2. Use a flat-tip screwdriver to
on the head until it locks. remove the holding clip from the
inner fender, and remove the
Passenger’s side screw with a Phillips-head
Reinstall the coolant reserve tank. screwdriver.
348
Lights
5. Insert the socket back into the Replacing Rear Bulbs

BULB headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place. COVER
6. Turn on the lights to make sure

the new bulb is working.
7. Put the inner fender cover in place.

Install the holding clip. Lock it in
place by pushing on the center.
Tighten the screw securely.
SOCKET
3. Remove the socket from the
Maintenance
headlight assembly by turning it 1. Open the tailgate. Place a cloth on
one-quarter turn counterclockwise. the edge of the cover to prevent
scratches. Remove the covers by
4. Pull the burned out bulb straight carefully prying on the edge with a
out of its socket. small flat-tip screwdriver.
Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.
CONTINUED
349
Lights
8. Turn on the lights to make sure

the new bulb is working.
SCREW
9. Align the clips on the taillight
assembly with the holes in the
body, then push the taillight
assembly into place. Tighten the
two mounting screws securely and
reinstall the covers.
BULB
TAILLIGHT ASSEMBLY SOCKET
2. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to 5. Remove the socket by turning it

remove the taillight assembly one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
mounting screw under each cover.
6. Pull the bulb straight out of its
3. Pull the taillight assembly out of socket. Push the new bulb straight
the body by sliding it outside. into the socket until it bottoms.
4. Determine which of the three 7. Insert the socket back into the
bulbs is burned out: stop/taillight, light assembly. Turn it clockwise
back-up light or turn signal light. to lock it in place.
350
Lights
Replacing a Fog Light Bulb UNDER COVER BULB

Your vehicle uses halogen light
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its plastic case, and protect the
glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass,
clean it with denatured alcohol and a
clean cloth.
ELECTRICAL
Halogen light bulbs get very hot when HOLDING CLIPS CONNECTOR TAB
lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on
the glass can cause the bulb to overheat Passenger’s side 2. Remove the electrical connector
Maintenance
and shatter. 1. Remove the three holding clips from the bulb by pushing on the
with a flat-tip screwdriver. tab to unlock it, then slide the
The fog lights were properly aimed connector off the bulb.
when your vehicle was new. If you Pull down the under cover from
regularly carry heavy items in the the bumper carefully. 3. Remove the bulb by turning it
cargo area or pull a trailer, about one-quarter turn
readjustment may be required. counterclockwise.
Adjustment should be done by your
dealer or another qualified
technician.
CONTINUED
351
Lights
BULB 9. Push the electrical connector back

HOLDING CLIP
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
10.Turn on the fog lights to test the

new bulb.
11.Passenger’s side
Reinstall the under cover and
holding clips, and then push in the
head of each clip.
SCREW ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR TAB
Driver’s side
Driver’s side 6. Remove the electrical connector Put the inner fender cover in place.
4. To change the bulb, start the from the bulb by pushing on the Install the holding clip. Lock it in
engine, turn the steering wheel all tab and pulling the connector place by pushing on the center.
the way to the right, then turn off down. Tighten the screw securely.
the engine.
7. Remove the bulb from the fog
5. Use a flat-tip screwdriver to light assembly by turning it one-
remove the holding clip from the quarter turn counterclockwise.
inner fender, and remove the
screw with a Phillips-head Driver’s and Passenger’s side
screwdriver. 8. Insert the new bulb into the hole,
and turn it one-quarter turn
clockwise to lock it in place.
352
Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats
Cleaning the Seat Belts Dirt build-up around the openings of Floor Mats
the seat belt anchors can cause the
OPENING
belts to retract slowly. Wipe the
openings with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
Maintenance
If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft 2WD models
brush with a mixture of mild soap The driver’s floor mat that came
and warm water to clean them. Do with your vehicle hooks over the
not use bleach, dye, or cleaning floor mat anchors. This keeps the
solvents. Let the belts air-dry before floor mat from sliding forward and
you use the vehicle. possibly interfering with the pedals
or making the front passenger’s
weight sensors ineffective.
CONTINUED
353
Floor Mats, Dust and Pollen Filter
If you remove a floor mat, make sure Dust and Pollen Filter
to re-anchor it when you put it back This filter removes the dust and
KNOB in your vehicle. pollen that is brought in from the
Unlock outside through the climate control
If you use a non-Honda floor mat, system.
make sure it fits properly and that it
Lock can be used with the floor mat Have your dealer replace this filter
anchors. Do not put additional floor when this service is indicated by a
mats on top of the anchored mat. maintenance message on the
information display. It should be
Make sure the rear floor mats are replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000
properly positioned. If not, the floor km) if you drive primarily in urban
ANCHOR mat will interfere with the seat areas that have high concentrations
operation and make the front of soot in the air, or if the flow from
4WD models passenger’s weight sensors the climate control system becomes
The driver’s floor mat that came ineffective. less than usual.
with your vehicle hooks over the
floor mat anchors. To lock each
anchor, turn the knob clockwise.
This keeps the floor mat from sliding
forward and possibly interfering with
the pedals.
When cleaning or replacing, turn the

knob counterclockwise to unhook
the floor mat.
354
Audio Antenna, Wiper Blades
Audio Antenna Wiper Blades Front

Check the condition of the wiper
blades at least every six months. WIPER ARMS
Replace them if you find signs of
cracking in the rubber, areas that are
getting hard, or if they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.
To replace front and rear wiper

blade:
1. Raise the wiper arm off the
windshield.
Front wiper arm
Maintenance
Before using an automatic car wash, Raise the driver’s side first, then the
remove the audio antenna so it does passenger’s side.
not get damaged. Remove the
antenna by unscrewing it. When you
reinstall the antenna, tighten it
securely. Do not open the hood when the wiper
arms are raised, or you will damage the
Before entering or parking in areas hood and wiper arms.
with low ceiling height, remove the
antenna.
CONTINUED
355
Wiper Blades
Rear WIPER ARM Pivot the blade assembly toward

the wiper arm until it releases
from the wiper arm.
When replacing a wiper blade,

make sure not to drop the wiper
blade or wiper arm down on the
windshield.
LOCK TAB
2. Disconnect the blade assembly

from the wiper arm:
Put a cloth on the edge of the lock

tab to prevent scratches, then
push up on the lock tab carefully
with a flat-tip screwdriver.
356
Wiper Blades
4. Examine the new wiper blades. If BLADE REINFORCEMENT

BLADE they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back TOP
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
3. Remove the blade from its holder Make sure the three rubber tabs
Maintenance
by grabbing the tabbed end of the inside the blade fit to each notch of
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs the reinforcement, as shown.
come out of the holder.
CONTINUED
357
Wiper Blades
6. Slide the wiper blade assembly

onto the wiper arm. Push down
the lock tab. Make sure the wiper
TAB blade assembly locks in place.
7. Lower the wiper arm down against

the windshield.
Front wiper arm

Lower the passenger’s side first,
INDENT then the driver’s side.
5. Place the top of the wiper blade on

the end of the blade assembly, and
slide the blade onto the assembly
in the direction pointed to by the
arrow.
Make sure the tab on the blade

assembly fits in the indent of the
wiper blade and the blade is
completely installed.
358
Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your Inflation Guidelines Even though your vehicle is
tires must be the proper type and Keeping the tires properly inflated equipped with TPMS, we
size, in good condition with adequate provides the best combination of recommend that you visually check
tread, and correctly inflated. handling, tread life, and riding your tires every day. If you think a
comfort. tire might be low, check it
The following pages give more immediately with a tire gauge.
detailed information on how to take Underinflated tires wear unevenly,
care of your tires and what to do adversely affect handling and fuel Use a gauge to measure the air
when they need to be replaced. economy, and are more likely to pressure in each tire at least once a
fail from being overheated. month. Even tires that are in good
condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
Overinflated tires can make your 20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per
Using tires that are excessively vehicle ride harshly, are more month. Remember to check the
worn or improperly inflated can prone to damage from road spare tire at the same time.
Maintenance
cause a crash in which you can hazards, and wear unevenly.
be seriously hurt or killed. Check the air pressures when the
The tire pressure monitoring system tires are cold. This means the
Follow all instructions in this (TPMS) warns you when a tire vehicle has been parked for at least 3
owner’s manual regarding tire pressure is low. See page 313 for hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
inflation and maintenance. more information. km). Add or release air, if needed, to
match the recommended cold tire
pressures on the next page.
CONTINUED
359
Tires
If you check air pressures when the Recommended Tire Pressures The compact spare tire pressure is:
tires are hot (driven for several The following chart shows the 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
miles/kilometers), you will see recommended cold tire pressures for
readings 4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 most normal driving conditions. For convenience, the recommended
to 0.4 kgf/cm ) higher than the cold tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
readings. This is normal. Do not let Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
air out to match the recommended for Normal Driving
cold air pressure. The tire will be 225/65R17 102T ＊1 Front/Rear: For additional information about
underinflated. 32 psi (220 kPa , your tires, see page 406 .
2.2 kgf/cm )
You should get your own tire 225/60R18 100H ＊2 Front/Rear:
pressure gauge and use it whenever 32 psi (220 kPa ,
you check your tire pressures. This 2.2 kgf/cm )
will make it easier for you to tell if a 225/60R18 100H ＊3 Front/Rear:
pressure loss is due to a tire problem 33 psi (230 kPa ,
and not due to a variation between 2.3 kgf/cm )
gauges.
＊1 : EX
While tubeless tires have some ＊2 : EX-L (2WD models)
ability to self-seal if they are ＊3 : EX-L (4WD models)
punctured, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.
360
Tires
Tire Inspection INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

A tire this worn gives very little
Every time you check inflation, you traction on wet roads. You should
should also examine the tires for replace the tire if you can see three
damage, foreign objects, and wear. or more tread wear indicators.
You should look for:
Bumps or bulges in the tread or

side of the tire. Replace the tire if
you find either of these conditions.
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side TREAD WEAR INDICATOR

of the tire. Replace the tire if you
can see fabric or cord. Your tires have wear indicators
Maintenance
molded into the tread. When the
Excessive tread wear. tread wears down, you will see a 1/2
inch (12.7 mm) wide band across the
tread. This shows there is less than
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on
the tire.
361
Tires
Tire Service Life The last four digits of the TIN (tire Tire Maintenance
The service life of your tires is identification number) are found on In addition to proper inflation,
dependent on many factors, the sidewall of the tire and indicate correct wheel alignment helps to
including, but not limited to, driving the date of manufacture (See Tire decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
habits, road conditions, vehicle Labeling on page 406 ). is worn unevenly, have your dealer
loading, inflation pressure, check the wheel alignment.
maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even Have your dealer check the tires if
when the tires are not in use). you feel a consistent vibration while
driving. A tire should always be
In addition to your regular rebalanced if it is removed from the
inspections and inflation pressure wheel. When you have new tires
maintenance, it is recommended that installed, make sure they are
you have annual inspections balanced. This increases riding
performed once the tires reach five comfort and tire life. For best results,
years old. It is also recommended have the installer perform a dynamic
that all tires, including the spare, be balance.
removed from service after 10 years
from the date of manufacture,
regardless of their condition or state
of wear.
362
Tires
Tire Rotation When the tires are rotated, make

sure the air pressures are checked.
Front Front
Improper wheel weights can damage
your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use
only Honda wheel weights f or
balancing.
(For Non-directional (For Directional

Tires and Wheels) Tires and Wheels)
Maintenance
To help increase tire life and
distribute wear more evenly, rotate
the tires according to the
maintenance messages displayed on
the information display.
Move the tires to the positions
shown in the illustration each time
they are rotated. If you purchase
directional tires, rotate only front-to-
back.
363
Tires
Replacing Tires and Wheels It is best to replace all four tires at

Replace your tires with radial tires of the same time. If that is not possible
the same size, load range, speed or necessary, replace the two front Installing improper tires on your
rating, and maximum cold tire tires or two rear tires as a pair. vehicle can affect handling and
pressure rating (as shown on the Replacing just one tire can seriously stability. This can cause a crash
tire’s sidewall). affect your vehicle’s handling. in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on If you ever replace a wheel, make
your vehicle can reduce braking sure that the wheel’s specifications Always use the size and type of
ability, traction, and steering match those of the original wheels. tires recommended in this
accuracy. Using tires of a different owner’s manual.
size or construction can cause the Also be sure you use only TPMS
ABS and vehicle stability assist specific wheels. If you do not, the
system (VSA) to work inconsistently. tire pressure monitoring system will
not work on that tire.
The ABS and VSA system work by
comparing the speed of each wheel. Replacement wheels are available at
When replacing tires, use the same your dealer.
size originally supplied with the
vehicle. Tire size and construction
can affect wheel speed and may
cause the system to activate.
364
Tires
Wheel and Tire Specifications Winter Driving Tire Chains

Wheels Tires marked ‘‘M ＋ S’’ or ‘‘All Mount tire chains on your tires when
EX: Season’’ on the sidewall have an all- required by driving conditions or
17 x 6 1/2J weather tread design suitable for local laws. Install them only on the
most winter driving conditions. front tires.
EX-L:
18 x 7J For the best performance in snowy Because your vehicle has limited tire
or icy conditions, you should install clearance, Honda strongly
Tires snow tires or tire chains. They may recommends using the chains listed
EX: be required by local laws under below, made by Security Chain
225/65R17 102T certain conditions. Company (SCC).
EX-L: Snow Tires EX

225/60R18 100H If you mount snow tires on your Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain
Maintenance
vehicle, make sure they are radial SC1042
See page 404 for DOT tire quality tires of the same size and load range
grading information, and page as the original tires. Mount snow EX-L
406 for tire size information. tires on all four wheels. The traction Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain
provided by snow tires on dry roads TC2111MM
may be lower than your original tires.
Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
CONTINUED
365
Tires
When installing chains, follow the Wheels

manufacturer’s instructions, and Clean the wheels as you would the
mount them as tight as you can. Using the wrong chains, or not rest of the exterior. Wash them with
Make sure they are not contacting properly installing chains, can the same solution, and rinse them
the brake lines or suspension. Drive damage the brake lines and thoroughly.
slowly with them installed. If you cause a crash in which you can
hear them coming into contact with be seriously injured or killed. Aluminum alloy wheels have a
the body or chassis, stop and protective clear-coat that keeps the
investigate. Remove them as soon as Follow all instructions in this aluminum from corroding and
you begin driving on cleared roads. owner’s manual regarding the tarnishing. Cleaning the wheels with
selection and use of tire chains. harsh chemicals (including some
commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff
brush can damage the clear-coat. To
Traction devices that are the wrong clean the wheels, use a mild
size or improperly installed can detergent and a soft brush or sponge.
damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
driving if they are hitting any part of
the vehicle.
366
Checking the Battery
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

Check the terminals for corrosion (a If additional battery maintenance is
white or yellowish powder). To needed, see your dealer or a
remove it, cover the terminals with a qualified mechanic.
solution of baking soda and water. It
will bubble up and turn brown. When WARNING: Battery posts,
this stops, wash it off with plain terminals, and related accessories
water. Dry off the battery with a contain lead and lead compounds.
cloth or paper towel. Coat the Wash your hands after handling.
terminals with grease to help prevent
future corrosion. If you need to connect the battery to
a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damaging your vehicle’s
electrical system. Always disconnect
Check the condition of the battery the negative (−) cable first, and
Maintenance
monthly by looking at the test reconnect it last.
indicator window. The label on the
battery explains the test indicator’s
colors.
The location of the test indicator

window varies between
manufacturers.
CONTINUED
367
Checking the Battery, Vehicle Storage
If your vehicle’s battery is Vehicle Storage

disconnected, or goes dead, the time If you need to park your vehicle for
The battery gives off explosive setting may be lost. To reset the time, an extended period (more than 1
hydrogen gas during normal see page 240 . month), there are several things you
operation. should do to prepare it for storage.
If your vehicle’s battery is Proper preparation helps prevent
A spark or flame can cause the disconnected or goes dead, the audio deterioration and makes it easier to
battery to explode with enough system may disable itself. The next get your vehicle back on the road. If
force to kill or seriously hurt you. time you turn on the radio, you will possible, store your vehicle indoors.
see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the
Wear protective clothing and a frequency display. Use the preset Fill the fuel tank.
face shield, or have a skilled buttons to enter the code (see page
technician do the battery 239 ). Wash and dry the exterior
maintenance. completely.
On models with navigation system
The navigation system will also Clean the interior. Make sure the
disable itself. The next time you turn carpeting, floor mats, etc., are
on the ignition switch, the system completely dry.
will require you to enter a PIN
before it can be used. Refer to the
navigation system manual.
368
Vehicle Storage, Interior Care
Leave the parking brake off. Put Support the front and rear wiper Leather
the transmission in Park. blade arms with a folded towel or EX-L models
rag so they do not touch the Vacuum dirt and dust from the
Block the rear wheels. windshield. leather frequently. Pay close
attention to the pleats and seams.
If the vehicle is to be stored for a To minimize sticking, apply a Clean the leather with a soft cloth
longer period, it should be silicone spray lubricant to all door dampened with a 90% water and 10%
supported on jackstands so the and tailgate seals. Also, apply a neutral wool detergent solution.
tires are off the ground. vehicle body wax to the painted Then buff it with a clean, dry cloth.
surfaces that mate with the door Remove any dust or dirt on leather
Leave one window open slightly (if and tailgate seals. surfaces immediately.
the vehicle is being stored
indoors). Cover the vehicle with a
‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
Maintenance
Disconnect the battery. from a porous material such as
cotton. Non-porous materials, such
as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
If possible, periodically run the

engine until it reaches full
operating temperature (the
cooling fans cycle on and off
twice). Preferably, do this once a
month.
369
370
Main Menu
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers the more Compact Spare Tire....................... 372

common problems that motorists Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 373
experience with their vehicles. It If the Engine Won’t Start .............. 380
gives you information about how to Jump Starting ................................. 382
safely evaluate the problem and what If the Engine Overheats ............... 384
to do to correct it. If the problem has Low Oil Pressure Indicator .......... 386
stranded you on the side of the road, Charging System Indicator........... 386
you may be able to get going again. Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 387
If not, you will also find instructions Brake System Indicator ................ 388
on getting your vehicle towed. Opening the Fuel Fill Door
Manually ..................................... 389
Fuses ............................................... 390
Fuse Locations ............................... 394
Emergency Towing ....................... 397

371
Compact Spare Tire
Use the compact spare tire as a Do not use your compact spare INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
temporary replacement only. Get tire on another vehicle unless it is
your regular tire repaired or replaced, the same make and model.
and put it back on your vehicle as
soon as you can. Do not place the flat tire, a full size
tire of any kind, or a compact
Check the air pressure of the spare from another vehicle in the
compact spare tire every time you spare tire holder. Damage to the
check the other tires. It should be holder could result.
inflated to:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm ) The low tire pressure indicator
comes on and stays on after you TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
Follow these precautions: replace the flat tire with the
compact spare tire. After several Replace the tire when you can see
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). miles (kilometers) driving with the the tread wear indicator bars. The
compact spare tire, the TPMS replacement tire should be the same
This tire gives a harsher ride and indicator comes on and the low size and design, mounted on the
less traction on some road tire pressure indicator goes off. same wheel. The spare tire is not
surfaces. Use greater caution designed to be mounted on a regular
while driving. wheel, and the spare wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.
Do not mount snow chains on the
compact spare tire.
372
Changing a Flat Tire
If you have a flat tire while driving, HOOK REMOVABLE TRAY

3. Open the tailgate. Pull up the
stop in a safe place to change it. handle on the removable tray.
Drive slowly along the shoulder until Then remove the hook, and hook
you get to an exit or an area to stop it to the hole on the cargo side
that is far away from the traffic lanes. panel (see page 120 ).
4. The tools and jack are under the

cargo area behind the utility box.
The vehicle can easily roll off Remove the utility box by lifting it
the jack, seriously injuring up with the handle (see page 121 ).
anyone underneath.
TOOLS SPARE TIRE JACK 5. Take the jack, tools and the bag
Follow the directions for out of the tool kit case.
changing a tire exactly, and 1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and
never get under the vehicle non-slippery ground. Put the
when it is supported only by the transmission in Park. Apply the

jack. parking brake.
If you are towing a trailer, unhitch
it.
2. Turn on the hazard warning lights,

and turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Have all
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.
CONTINUED
373
SPARE TIRE HOLDER HOOK
SPARE TIRE
PLASTIC COVER WHEEL NUT WRENCH
6. The spare tire is stored 7. Attach the short end of the wheel 8. Lift up the spare tire holder, then
underneath the cargo area. nut wrench to the spare tire holder slide the hook and lift down the
Remove the plastic cover on the shaft. Turn the wrench spare tire holder.
cargo area lining to access the counterclockwise until the shaft
shaft for the spare tire holder. loosens. Then attach the longer 9. Remove the spare tire from the
section of the wrench to the shaft, spare tire holder.
and turn it until you can see the
spare tire (about 65−70 rotations).
The wheel nut wrench supplied with
your vehicle is specially adapted to f it Do not turn the wrench any
the holder shaf t. Do not use any other further once you feel resistance.
tool.
374
10.To reinstall the spare tire holder, WHEEL NUT

slide the hook, lift up the spare tire
holder and attach it to the hook.
Attach the longer section of the
wrench to the spare tire holder
shaft. Turn the wrench clockwise.
Then attach the short end of the
wrench to the shaft, and tighten it
securely.
11.Reinstall the plastic cover.

JACKING POINTS
12.Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn 13.Place the jack under the jacking
with the wheel nut wrench. point nearest the tire you need to
change. Turn the end bracket

clockwise until the top of the jack
contacts the jacking point. Make
sure the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.
CONTINUED
375
17.Put on the spare tire. Put the

wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel nut wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten the
wheel nuts fully.
18.Lower the vehicle to the ground,

and remove the jack.
WHEEL WRENCH EXTENSION BRAKE HUB
14.Use the extension and the wheel 16.Before mounting the spare tire,
nut wrench as shown to raise the wipe any dirt off the mounting
vehicle until the flat tire is off the surface of the wheel and hub with
ground. a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully; it may be hot from
15.Remove the wheel nuts, then driving.
remove the flat tire. Handle the
wheel nuts carefully; they may be
hot from driving. Place the flat tire
on the ground with the outside
surface facing up.
376
HOOK REMOVABLE TRAY
PLASTIC BAG TOOL KIT CASE
19.Tighten the wheel nuts securely in 20.Put the flat tire into the plastic bag, 21.Store the jack and tools in the tool
the same crisscross pattern. Have which is stored in the tool kit case. kit case.
the wheel nut torque checked at Knot the top of the plastic bag.

the nearest automotive service 22.Replace the utility box. Remove
facility. the hook and close the removable
Tighten the wheel nuts to: tray.
80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)
CONTINUED
377
CARGO HOOK
Loose items can fly around the
interior in a crash and could
seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools BELT

securely before driving.
23.Bore through the bag, and pass 24.Place the flat tire in the cargo area,
the holding belt through the hole and thread the belt through the
of the bag and the wheel of the flat cargo hook as shown in the
tire as shown in the illustration. illustration. Pass the belt through
the ring, and tighten the belt to
This belt is with the bag in the tool secure the flat tire in place.
kit case.
378
26.Your vehicle’s original tire has a

tire pressure monitoring system
Always ensure that the spare tire holder sensor. To replace a tire, refer to
is installed onto the hook and the Changing a Tire with TPMS (see
holder is then completely raised into page 315 ).
place. If the holder is lef t down, it will
be damaged during driving and will
need to be replaced.
SPARE TIRE HOLDER

SPARE TIRE
25.When putting back the spare tire,

place the spare tire facing up on
the spare tire holder.

If you store the spare tire f ace down, it
will be damaged and need to be
replaced.
379
If the Engine Won’t Start
Diagnosing why the engine won’t Nothing Happens or the Starter Turn the ignition switch to the
start falls into two areas, depending Motor Operates Very Slowly START (III) position. If the
on what you hear when you turn the When you turn the ignition switch to headlights do not dim, check the
ignition switch to the START (III) the START (III) position, you do not condition of the fuses. If the fuses
position: hear the normal noise of the engine are OK, there is probably
trying to start. You may hear a something wrong with the
You hear nothing, or almost clicking sound, a series of clicks, or electrical circuit for the ignition
nothing. The engine’s starter nothing at all. switch or starter motor. You will
motor does not operate at all, or need a qualified mechanic to
operates very slowly. Check these things: determine the problem (see
Emergency Towing on page 397 ).
You can hear the starter motor Check the transmission interlock.
operating normally, or the starter The transmission must be in Park If the headlights dim noticeably or
motor sounds like it is spinning or neutral or the starter will not go out when you try to start the
faster than normal, but the engine operate. engine, either the battery is dis-
does not start up and run. charged or the connections are
Turn the ignition switch to the ON corroded. Check the condition of
(II) position. Turn on the the battery connections (see page
headlights, and check their 367 ). You can then try jump
brightness. If the headlights are starting the vehicle from a booster
very dim or do not come on at all, battery (see page 382 ).
the battery is discharged. See
Jump Starting on page 382 .
380
If the Engine Won’t Start
The Starter Operates Normally There may be an electrical

In this case, the starter motor’s problem, such as no power to the
speed sounds normal, or even faster fuel pump. Check all the fuses
than normal, when you turn the (see page 390 ).
ignition switch to the START (III)
position, but the engine does not run. If you find nothing wrong, you will
need a qualified technician to find
Are you using the proper starting the problem. See Emergency
procedure? Refer to Starting the Towing on page 397 .
Engine on page 301 .
Are you using a properly coded

key? An improperly coded key will
cause the immobilizer system
indicator in the instrument panel
to blink rapidly (see page 78 ).

Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
gauge; the low fuel indicator may
not be working.
381
Jump Starting
Although this seems like a simple To jump start your vehicle:

procedure, you should take several
precautions. 1. Open the hood, and check the
physical condition of the battery.
In very cold weather, check the
condition of the electrolyte. If it
A battery can explode if you do seems slushy or frozen, do not try
not follow the correct procedure, jump starting until it thaws.
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames, If a battery sits in extreme cold, the BOOSTER BATTERY
and smoking materials away electrolyte inside can f reeze.
from the battery. Attempting to jump start with a f rozen The numbers in the illustration show
battery can cause it to rupture. you the order to connect the jumper
cables.
You cannot start your vehicle by 2. Turn off all the electrical
pushing or pulling it. accessories: climate control, audio 3. Connect one jumper cable to the
system, lights, etc. Put the positive (＋) terminal on your
transmission in Park, and set the battery. Connect the other end to
parking brake. the positive (＋) terminal on the
booster battery.
382
Jump Starting
5. If the booster battery is in another Keep the ends of the jumper cables
vehicle, have an assistant start away from each other and any metal
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle. on the vehicle until everything is
disconnected. Otherwise, you may
6. Start the vehicle. If the starter cause an electrical short.
motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.
7. Once your vehicle is running,

disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
4. Connect the second jumper cable positive cable from your vehicle,
to the negative (−) terminal on then from the booster battery.
the booster battery. Connect the

other end to the engine hanger as
shown. Do not connect this jumper
cable to any other part of the
engine.
383
If the Engine Overheats
The pointer of the vehicle’s 3. If you do not see steam or spray,

temperature gauge should stay in leave the engine running and
the midrange. If it climbs to the red Steam and spray from an watch the temperature gauge. If
mark, you should determine the overheated engine can the high heat is due to overloading,
reason (hot day, driving up a steep seriously scald you. the engine should start to cool
hill, etc.). down almost immediately. If it
Do not open the hood if steam does, wait until the temperature
If your vehicle overheats, you should is coming out. gauge comes down to the midpoint,
take immediate action. The only then continue driving.
indication may be the temperature
gauge climbing to or above the red 1. Safely pull to the side of the road. 4. If the temperature gauge stays at
mark. Or you may see steam or Put the transmission in Park, and the red mark, turn off the engine.
spray coming from under the hood. set the parking brake. Turn off all
the accessories, and turn on the 5. Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
hazard warning lights. such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
Driving with the temperature gauge 2. If you see steam and/or spray so use caution. If you find a leak, it
pointer at the red mark can cause coming from under the hood, turn must be repaired before you
serious damage to the engine. off the engine. Wait until you see continue driving (see Emergency
no more signs of steam or spray, Towing on page 397 ).
then open the hood.
384
If the Engine Overheats
6. If you do not find an obvious leak, 8. Using gloves or a large heavy 10.Put the radiator cap back on
check the coolant level in the cloth, turn the radiator cap tightly. Run the engine, and check
radiator reserve tank (see page counterclockwise, without pushing the temperature gauge. If it goes
288 ). Add coolant if the level is down, to the first stop. After the back to the red mark, the engine
below the MIN mark. pressure releases, push down on needs repair (see Emergency
the cap, and turn it until it comes Towing on page 397 ).
7. If there was no coolant in the off.
reserve tank, you may need to add 11.If the temperature stays normal,
coolant to the radiator. Let the 9. Start the engine, and set the check the coolant level in the
engine cool down until the pointer temperature to maximum heat radiator reserve tank. If it has
reaches the middle of the tempera- (climate control to AUTO at gone down, add coolant to the
ture gauge, or lower, before check- ‘‘ ’’). Add coolant to the MAX mark. Put the cap back on
ing the radiator. radiator up to the base of the filler tightly.
neck. If you do not have the
proper coolant mixture available,
you can add plain water.

Removing the radiator cap Remember to have the cooling
while the engine is hot can system drained and refilled with
cause the coolant to spray out, the proper mixture as soon as you
seriously scalding you. can.
Always let the engine and

radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
385
Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator
Low Oil Pressure Indicator 1. Safely pull off the road, and shut Charging System Indicator
This indicator should never off the engine. Turn on the hazard If the charging system
come on when the engine is warning lights. indicator comes on brightly
running. If it starts flashing or stays when the engine is running, the
on, the oil pressure has dropped very 2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute. battery is not being charged.
low or lost pressure. Serious engine Open the hood, and check the oil
damage is possible, and you should level (see page 288 ). An engine Immediately turn off all electrical
take immediate action. very low on oil can lose pressure accessories. Try not to use other
during cornering and other driving electrically operated controls such as
The indicator notifies you of low oil maneuvers. the power windows. Keep the engine
pressure and does not measure the running; starting the engine will
oil level. Check your vehicle’s oil 3. If necessary, add oil to bring the discharge the battery rapidly.
level at each refueling. level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page 333 ). Go to a service station or garage
where you can get technical
4. Start the engine and watch the oil assistance.
Running the engine with low oil pressure indicator. If it does not go
pressure can cause serious mechanical out within 10 seconds, turn off the
damage almost immediately. Turn of f engine. There is a mechanical
the engine as soon as you can saf ely get problem that needs to be repaired
the vehicle stopped. before you can continue driving
(see Emergency Towing on page
397 ).
386
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
If this indicator comes on If the battery in your vehicle has

while driving, it means one been disconnected or gone dead,
of the engine’s emissions control If you keep driving with the these codes may be erased. It can
systems may have a problem. Even malf unction indicator lamp on, you can take several days of driving under
though you may feel no difference in damage your vehicle’s emissions various conditions to set the codes
your vehicle’s performance, it can controls and engine. Those repairs may again.
reduce your fuel economy and cause not be covered by your vehicle’s
increased emissions. Continued warranties. To check if they are set, turn the
operation may cause serious damage. ignition switch to the ON (II)
The indicator may also come on with position, without starting the engine.
If you have recently refueled your the ‘‘D’’ indicator. The malfunction indicator lamp will
vehicle, the indicator coming on come on for 20 seconds. If it then
could be due to a loose or missing Readiness Codes goes off, the readiness codes are set.
fuel fill cap. Tighten the cap until it Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness If it blinks five times, the readiness
clicks at least once. Tightening the codes’’ that are part of the on-board codes are not set. If possible, do not
cap will not turn the indicator off diagnostics for the emissions take your vehicle for an emissions

immediately; it can take several days systems. In some states, part of the test until the readiness codes are set.
of normal driving. emissions testing is to make sure Refer to Emissions Testing for
these codes are set. If they are not more information (see page 413 ).
If the indicator comes on repeatedly, set, the test cannot be completed.
even though it may go off as you
continue driving, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer as soon as
possible.
387
Brake System Indicator
U.S. Canada However, if the brake pedal does not Slow down by shifting to a lower
feel normal, you should take gear, and pull to the side of the road
immediate action. A problem in one when it is safe. Because of the long
The brake system indicator normally part of the system’s dual circuit distance needed to stop, it is
comes on when you turn the ignition design will still give you braking at hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
switch to the ON (II) position, and as two wheels. You will feel the brake should have it towed and repaired as
a reminder to check the parking pedal go down much farther before soon as possible (see Emergency
brake. It will stay on if you do not the vehicle begins to slow down, and Towing on page 397 ).
fully release the parking brake. you will have to press harder on the
pedal. If you must drive the vehicle a short
If the brake system indicator comes distance in this condition, drive
on while driving, the brake fluid level slowly and carefully.
is probably low. Press lightly on the
brake pedal to see if it feels normal. If the ABS indicator and the VSA
If it does, check the brake fluid level system indicator come on with the
the next time you stop at a service brake system indicator, have your
station (see page 342 ). vehicle inspected by your dealer
immediately.
If the fluid level is low, take your
vehicle to a dealer, and have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
388
Opening the Fuel Fill Door Manually
If there is a problem with the power

door lock system and you cannot
unlock the driver’s door, use the
release lever.
If you cannot also unlock the tailgate

due to the power door lock system
malfunction, see page 92 and open
the tailgate manually.
COVER RELEASE LEVER
Place a cloth on the edge of the To open the fuel fill door, pull the
cover to prevent scratches. Remove release lever rearward.
the cover by carefully prying on its

edge with a small flat-tip screwdriver.
389
Fuses
INTERIOR (Driver’s side) INTERIOR (Passenger’s side) UNDER-HOOD
NOTCH
FUSE BOX FUSE LABEL TAB
The vehicle’s fuses are contained in The passenger’s side interior fuse The under-hood fuse box is on the
three fuse boxes. box is on the lower passenger’s side driver’s side. To open it, push the
panel. To remove the fuse box lid, tabs as shown.
The driver’s side interior fuse box is put your finger in the notch on the
under the dashboard on the driver’s lid, and pull it upward slightly, then
side. The fuse label is attached to the pull it toward you and take it out of
side panel. its hinges.
390
Fuses
Checking and Replacing Fuses FUSE

If something electrical in your BLOWN BLOWN
vehicle stops working, the first thing
you should check for is a blown fuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
394 , 395 and 396 , or the diagram on
the fuse box lid or the fuse label,
which fuse or fuses control that
component. Check those fuses first,
but check all the fuses before
deciding that a blown fuse is not the
cause. Replace any blown fuses and
check if the device works.
3. Check each of the large fuses in Also check the combined fuse box in
1. Turn the ignition switch to the the under-hood fuse box by the under-hood fuse box.
LOCK (0) position. Make sure the looking at the wire inside.

headlights and all other Removing these fuses requires a
accessories are off. Phillips-head screwdriver.
2. On the under-hood and passenger’s

side interior fuse boxes, remove
the cover from each fuse box.
CONTINUED
391
Fuses
BLOWN
FUSE PULLER FUSE PULLER SPARE FUSES
4. Check the smaller fuses in the 5. Look for a blown wire inside the Your vehicle has spare fuses on the
under-hood fuse box and all the fuse. If it is blown, replace it with back of the under-hood fuse box
fuses in the interior fuse boxes by one of the spare fuses of the same cover.
pulling out each one with the fuse rating or lower.
puller provided on the back of the
under-hood fuse box cover.
392
Fuses
If you cannot drive the vehicle

without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse Replacing a f use with one that has a
of the same rating or a lower rating higher rating greatly increases the
from one of the other circuits. Make chances of damaging the electrical
sure you can do without that circuit system. If you do not have a
temporarily (such as the accessory replacement f use with the proper rating
power socket). f or the circuit, install one with a lower
rating.
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it 6. If the replacement fuse of the
might blow out again. This does not same rating blows in a short time,
indicate that anything is wrong. there is probably a serious
Replace the fuse with one of the electrical problem with your
correct rating as soon as you can. vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in
that circuit, and have your vehicle

checked by a qualified technician.
393
Fuse Locations
UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX No. Amps. Circuits Protected

3−7 − Not Used
3 − 8 50 A IG Main
4 7.5 A Fan Relay
5 40 A Rear Defroster
6 − Not Used
7 15 A Hazard
8 20 A Horn, Stop
9 − Not Used
10 (15 A) Trailer＃
11 15 A IG Coil
12 15 A FI Sub
13 − Not Used
14 − Not Used
15 10 A Back Up
No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected 16 7.5 A Interior Lights
1 − 1 120 A Battery 2−6 − Not Used 17 15 A FI Main
1 − 2 40 A Passenger’s Side Fuse Box 3−1 30 A Sub Fan Motor 18 15 A DBW
2−1 − Not Used 3−2 30 A Wiper Motor 19 7.5 A Back Up, FI ECU
2 − 2 40 A ABS/VSA 3−3 30 A Main Fan Motor 20 40 A Heater Motor
2 − 3 30 A ABS/VSA Motor 3−4 30 A Driver’s Side Light Main 21 7.5 A MG Clutch
2 − 4 40 A Passenger’s Side Fuse Box 3−5 60 A Driver’s Side Fuse Box
2−5 − Not Used 3−6 30 A Passenger’s Side Light Main ＃: Use this space for the trailer light, if it is
installed.
394
Fuse Locations
INTERIOR FUSE BOX (Driver’s Side) No. Amps. Circuits Protected

16 7.5 A A/C
17 7.5 A Accessory, Key, Lock
18 7.5 A Accessory
19 20 A Driver’s Power Seat Sliding
20 20 A Moonroof
21 20 A Driver’s Power Seat Reclining
22 20 A Rear Left Power Window
23 15 A Front Accessory Power Socket
24 20 A Driver’s Power Window
25 15 A Driver’s Side Door Lock
26 10 A Left Front Fog Light
27 10 A Left Side Small Lights
(Exterior)
28 10 A Left Headlight High Beam
No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected 29 7.5 A TPMS

1 − Not Used 9 20 A Fuel Pump 30 15 A Left Headlight Low Beam
2 7.5 A Seat Memory＊ 10 10 A VB SOL2 31 − Not Used
3 15 A Washer 11 10 A SRS A − Not Used
4 10 A Wiper 12 7.5 A OPDS (Occupant Position
5 7.5 A Meter Detection System) ＊: If equipped
6 7.5 A ABS/VSA 13 − Not Used
7 15 A ACG 14 10 A ACM
8 7.5 A STS 15 7.5 A Daytime Running Lights
CONTINUED
395
Fuse Locations
INTERIOR FUSE BOX (Passenger’s Side) No. Amps. Circuits Protected

16 15 A Accessory Power Socket
(Cargo)
17 − Not Used
18 10 A Lumbar Support
19 15 A Seat Heater＊
20 − Not Used
21 − Not Used
22 − Not Used
＊: If equipped
No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected

1 10 A Right Headlight High Beam 9 20 A Front Passenger’s Power
2 10 A Right Side Small Lights Seat Sliding
(Exterior) 10 10 A Right Side Door Lock
3 10 A Right Front Fog Light 11 20 A Rear Right Power Window
4 15 A Right Headlight Low Beam 12 15 A Accessory Power Socket
5 − Not Used (Console)
6 7.5 A Interior Lights 13 20 A Front Passenger’s Power
7 − Not Used Window
8 20 A Front Passenger’s Power 14 − Not Used
Seat Reclining 15 20 A Premium AMP＊
396
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle needs to be towed, On 2WD models If, due to damage, your vehicle must
call a professional towing service or There are two ways to tow your be towed with the front wheels on
organization. Never tow your vehicle vehicle: the ground, do this:
with just a rope or chain. It is very
dangerous. Flat-bed Equipment − The operator Start the engine.
loads your vehicle on the back of a Shift to the D position and hold for
On 4WD models truck. This is the best way to 5 seconds, then to N.
The only way you can safely tow transport your vehicle. Turn off the engine.
your vehicle is with flat-bed Leave the ignition switch in the
equipment. The operator will load Wheel-lift Equipment − The tow ACCESSORY (I) position so the
your vehicle on the back of a truck. truck uses two pivoting arms that go steering wheel does not lock.
Any other method of towing will under the front tires and lift them off Release the parking brake.
damage the drive system. When you the ground. The rear tires remain on
contact the towing agency, inform the ground. This is an acceptable
them a flat-bed is required. way to tow your vehicle.

Towing with only two tires on the
ground will damage parts of the
all-wheel-drive system. Your vehicle
should be transported on a f lat-bed
truck or trailer.
CONTINUED
397
Emergency Towing
Improper towing preparation will Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by the The steering system can be damaged if
damage the transmission. Follow the bumpers will cause serious damage. the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
above procedure exactly. If you cannot The bumpers are not designed to ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)
shif t the transmission or start the support the vehicle’s weight. position, and make sure the steering
engine, your vehicle must be wheel turns f reely bef ore you begin
transported with the f ront wheels of f towing.
the ground.
With the front wheels on the ground,

do not tow the vehicle more than 50
miles (80 km), and keep the speed
below 35 mph (55 km/h).
398
Main Menu
Technical Information
The diagrams in this section give Identification Numbers ................. 400

you the dimensions and capacities of Specifications ................................ 402
your vehicle and the locations of the DOT Tire Quality Grading
identification numbers. It also (U.S. Vehicles) ........................... 404
includes information you should Tire Labeling .................................. 406
know about your vehicle’s tires and Tire Pressure Monitoring System
emissions control systems. (TPMS)−Required Federal
Explanation............................. 408
Emissions Controls........................ 410
Three Way Catalytic
Converters .................................. 412
Emissions Testing ......................... 413
399
Identification Numbers
Your vehicle has several identifying

numbers in various places. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The vehicle identification number

(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
dealer uses to register your vehicle
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
see it by looking through the
windshield on the driver’s side. It is
also on the certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.
CERTIFICATION LABEL
400
Identification Numbers
The engine number is stamped on

the front of the engine block.
The transmission number is on a

label on top of the transmission.
ENGINE NUMBER
TRANSMISSION NUMBER
401
Specifications
Dimensions Capacities
Length 196.8 in (4,999 mm) Fuel tank Approx.
Width 74.7 in (1,898 mm) 18.5 US gal (70.0 )
Height 65.7 in (1,670 mm) Engine Change＊1 1.74 US gal (6.6 )
Wheelbase 110.1 in (2,797 mm) coolant Total 2.27 US gal (8.6 )
Track Front/Rear 64.9 in (1,648 mm) Engine oil Change＊2
Including filter 4.5 US qt (4.3 )
Weights Without filter 4.2 US qt (4.0 )
Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attached Total 5.3 US qt (5.0 )
to the driver’s doorjamb. Automatic Change
transmission 2WD 3.5 US qt (3.3 )
Air Conditioning fluid 4WD 3.0 US qt (2.8 )
Refrigerant type HFC-134a (R-134a) Total
Charge quantity 14.1−15.9 oz (400−450 g) 2WD 7.9 US qt (7.5 )
Lubricant type ND-OIL8 4WD 8.3 US qt (7.9 )
Rear Change 1.3 US qt (1.2 )
Engine differential Total 1.5 US qt (1.4 )
Type Water cooled 4-stroke fluid (4WD)
SOHC i-VTEC VCM 6-cylinder (V6) Transfer Change 0.43 US qt (0.41 )
gasoline engine assembly Total 0.48 US qt (0.45 )
Bore x Stroke 3.50 x 3.66 in (89.0 x 93.0 mm) fluid (4WD)
Displacement 212 cu-in (3,471 cm ) Windshield
Compression ratio 10.5 : 1 washer 5.3 US qt (5.0 )
Spark plugs NGK: ILZKR7B11 reservoir
DENSO: SXU22HCR11
＊1 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
Seating Capacities engine
Total 5 Reserve tank capacity: 0.180 US gal (0.68 )
Front 2 ＊2 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
Rear 3
402
Specifications
Lights Fuses
Headlights High 60 W (HB3) Interior Driver’s side See page 395 or the fuse label
Low 55 W (H11) attached on the side panel.
Front turn signal/parking lights 24/2 2 CP(Amber) Passenger’s side See page 396 or the fuse label
Front side marker lights 5W attached to the inside of the fuse
Front Fog lights 55 W (H11) box door.
Rear turn signal lights 21 W (Amber) Under-hood See page 394 or the fuse box
Back-up lights 21 W cover.
Stop/taillights 21/5 W
License plate lights 5W Tires
High-mount brake light LED type＊ Size Front/Rear 225/65R17 102T ＊1
Ceiling light 8W 225/60R18 100H ＊2
Spotlights 8W Spare T155/90D16 110M＊3
Glove box light 3.8 W T155/90D17 101M＊4
Courtesy light (Ceiling) LED type＊ Pressure Front/Rear 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )＊3
Cargo area lights 5W 33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm )＊4
Front door courtesy lights 3.8 W Spare 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Vanity mirror lights 1.4 W
＊1 : EX
＊ : Replacement of a light bulb should be done by your dealer. ＊2 : EX-L
＊3 : 2WD
Battery ＊4 : 4WD
Capacity 12 V − 72 AH/20 HR
12 V − 60 AH/5 HR Alignment
Toe-in Front 0.00 in (0.0 mm)
Rear 0.08 in (2.0 mm)
Camber Front 0°
Rear −1°
Caster Front 3°30’
403
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all Treadwear Traction

U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. The treadwear grade is a compara- The traction grades, from highest to
All tires are also graded for tive rating based on the wear rate of lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
treadwear, traction, and temperature the tire when tested under controlled grades represent the tire’s ability to
performance according to conditions on a specified government stop on wet pavement as measured
Department of Transportation test course. For example, a tire under controlled conditions on
(DOT) standards. The following graded 150 would wear one and one- specified government test surfaces
explains these gradings. half (1 1/2) times as well on the of asphalt and concrete. A tire
government course as a tire graded marked C may have poor traction
Uniform Tire Quality Grading 100. The relative performance of performance.
Quality grades can be found where tires depends upon the actual condi-
applicable on the tire sidewall tions of their use, however, and may Warning: The traction grade
between tread shoulder and depart significantly from the norm assigned to this tire is based on
maximum section width. For due to variations in driving habits, straight-ahead braking traction tests,
example: service practices and differences in and does not include acceleration,
Treadwear 200 road characteristics and climate. cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
Traction AA traction characteristics.
Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform

to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
404
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Temperature Warning: The temperature grade for

The temperature grades are A (the this tire is established for a tire that
highest), B, and C, representing the is properly inflated and not
tire’s resistance to the generation of overloaded. Excessive speed,
heat and its ability to dissipate heat underinflation, or excessive loading,
when tested under controlled either separately or in combination,
conditions on a specified indoor can cause heat buildup and possible
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tire failure.
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
405
Tire Labeling
The tires that came on your vehicle Tire Size H − Speed symbol (an
have a number of markings. Those Whenever tires are replaced, they alphabetical code indicating
you should be aware of are described should be replaced with tires of the the maximum speed rating).
below. same size. Following is an example
of tire size with an explanation of Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire Labeling Example what each component means. The tire identification number (TIN)
(1) is a group of numbers and letters
225/60R18 100H that look like the following example.
TIN is located on the sidewall of the
225 − Tire width in millimeters. tire.
60 − Aspect ratio (the tire’s section DOT AP14 002X 2202

height as a percentage of its
width). DOT − This indicates that the tire
meets all requirements of
R − Tire construction code (R the U.S. Department of
indicates radial). Transportation.
(4) (1) 18 − Rim diameter in inches. AP14 − Manufacturer’s

identification mark.
(3) (2) 100 − Load index (a numerical code
(1) Tire Size associated with the maximum
(2) Tire Identification Number (TIN) load the tire can carry).
(3) Maximum Tire Pressure
(4) Maximum Tire Load
406
Tire Labeling
002X − Tire type code. Glossary of Tire Terminology Treadwear Indicators (TWI) −
Cold Tire Pressure − The tire air Means the projections within the
2202 − Date of manufacture. pressure when the vehicle has been principal grooves designed to give a
Year parked for at least three hours or visual indication of the degrees of
Week driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). wear of the tread.
Load Rating − Means the maximum

load that a tire is rated to carry for a
given inflation pressure.
Maximum Inflation Pressure − The

maximum tire air pressure that the
tire can hold.
Maximum Load Rating − Means the

load rating for a tire at the maximum
permissible inflation pressure for
that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure −
The cold tire inflation pressure
recommended by the manufacturer.
407
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if As an added safety feature, your Driving on a significantly under-
provided), should be checked vehicle has been equipped with a tire inflated tire causes the tire to
monthly when cold and inflated to pressure monitoring system (TPMS) overheat and can lead to tire failure.
the inflation pressure recommended that illuminates a low tire pressure Under-inflation also reduces fuel
by the vehicle manufacturer on the telltale efficiency and tire tread life, and may
vehicle placard or tire inflation affect the vehicle’s handling and
pressure label. stopping ability.
(If your vehicle has tires of a when one or more of your tires is Please note that the TPMS is not a
different size than the size indicated significantly under-inflated. substitute for proper tire
on the vehicle placard or tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
inflation pressure label, you should Accordingly, when the low tire responsibility to maintain correct tire
determine the proper tire inflation pressure telltale illuminates, you pressure, even if under-inflation has
pressure for those tires.) should stop and check your tires as not reached the level to trigger
soon as possible, and inflate them to illumination of the TPMS low tire
the proper pressure. pressure telltale.
408
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation
Your vehicle has also been equipped Always check the TPMS malfunction
with a TPMS malfunction indicator telltale after replacing one or more
to indicate when the system is not tires or wheels on your vehicle to
operating properly. The TPMS ensure that the replacement or
malfunction indicator is provided by alternate tires and wheels allow the
a separate telltale, which displays the TPMS to continue to function
symbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated. properly.
When the malfunction indicator is

illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect

or signal low tire pressure as
intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a

variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly.
409
Emissions Controls
The burning of gasoline in your The Clean Air Act intake manifold. They are then
vehicle’s engine produces several by- The United States Clean Air Act＊ drawn into the engine and burned.
products. Some of these are carbon sets standards for automobile
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen emissions. It also requires that Evaporative Emissions Control
(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC). automobile manufacturers explain to System
Gasoline evaporating from the tank owners how their emissions controls As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
also produces hydrocarbons. Con- work and what to do to maintain tank, an evaporative emissions
trolling the production of NOx, CO, them. This section summarizes how control canister filled with charcoal
and HC is important to the environ- the emissions controls work. adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
ment. Under certain conditions of canister while the engine is off. After
＊
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC In Canada, Honda vehicles comply the engine is started and warmed up,
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’ with the Canadian emission the vapor is drawn into the engine
Carbon monoxide does not contri- requirements, as specified in an and burned during driving.
bute to smog creation, but it is a agreement with Environment
poisonous gas. Canada, at the time they are Onboard Refueling Vapor
manufactured. Recovery
The onboard refueling vapor
Crankcase Emissions Control recovery (ORVR) system captures
System the fuel vapors during refueling. The
Your vehicle has a positive vapors are adsorbed in a canister
crankcase ventilation system. This filled with activated carbon. While
keeps gasses that build up in the driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
engine’s crankcase from going into into the engine and burned off.
the atmosphere. The positive
crankcase ventilation valve routes
them from the crankcase back to the
410
Emissions Controls
Exhaust Emissions Controls Ignition Timing Control System Replacement Parts

The exhaust emissions controls This system constantly adjusts the The emissions control systems are
include four systems: PGM-FI, ignition timing, reducing the amount designed and certified to work to-
ignition timing control, exhaust gas of HC, CO, and NOx produced. gether in reducing emissions to
recirculation, and three way catalytic levels that comply with the Clean Air
converter. These four systems work Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Act. To make sure the emissions
together to control the engine’s System remain low, you should use only new
combustion and minimize the The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) Honda replacement parts or their
amount of HC, CO, and NOx that system takes some of the exhaust equivalent for repairs. Using lower
come out the tailpipe. The exhaust gas and routes it back into the intake quality parts may increase the
emissions control systems are manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the emissions from your vehicle.
separate from the crankcase and air/fuel mixture reduces the amount
evaporative emissions control of NOx produced when the fuel is The emissions control systems are
systems. burned. covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your vehicle. Read your
PGM-FI System Three Way Catalytic Converter warranty manual for more informa-
The PGM-FI system uses sequential The three way catalytic converter is tion.
multiport fuel injection. in the exhaust system. Through
It has three subsystems: air intake, chemical reactions, it converts HC,
engine control, and fuel control. The CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
powertrain control module (PCM) to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen
uses various sensors to determine (N2), and water vapor.
how much air is going into the
engine. It then controls how much
fuel to inject under all operating
conditions.
411
Three Way Catalytic Converters
The three way catalytic converters Keep the engine well maintained.
contain precious metals that serve as
catalysts, promoting chemical Have your vehicle diagnosed and
reactions to convert the exhaust repaired if it is misfiring, back-
gasses without affecting the metals. firing, stalling, or otherwise not
The catalytic converters are referred running properly.
to as three-way catalysts, since they
act on HC, CO, and NOx.
Replacement units must be original
Honda parts or their equivalent.
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS
The three way catalytic converters
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take Defective three way catalytic
place. They can set on fire any converters contribute to air pollution,
combustible materials that come and can impair your engine’s
near them. Park your vehicle away performance. Follow these
from high grass, dry leaves, or other guidelines to protect your vehicle’s
flammables. three way catalytic converters.
Always use unleaded gasoline.

Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converters
ineffective.
412
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes If the testing facility determines that 4. Without touching the accelerator
If you take your vehicle for an the readiness codes are not set, you pedal, start the engine, and let it
emissions test shortly after the will be requested to return at a later idle for 20 seconds.
battery has been disconnected or date to complete the test. If you must
gone dead, it may not pass the test. get the vehicle retested within the 5. Keep the vehicle in Park. Increase
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness next two or three days, you can the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and
codes’’ that must be set in the on- condition the vehicle for retesting by hold it there until the temperature
board diagnostics for the emissions doing the following. gauge rises to at least 1/4 of the
systems. These codes are erased scale (about 3 minutes).
when the battery is disconnected, 1. Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
and set again only after several days but not completely, full (around 6. Without touching the accelerator
of driving under a variety of 3/4). pedal, let the engine idle for 20
conditions. seconds.
2. Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 6
hours or more.
3. Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 40° and
95°F (4° and 35°C).
CONTINUED
413
Emissions Testing
7. Select a nearby lightly traveled 8. Then drive in city/suburban

major highway where you can traffic for at least 10 minutes.
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph When traffic conditions allow, let
(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 the vehicle coast for several
minutes. Drive on the highway in seconds without using the
D. Do not use the cruise control. accelerator pedal or the brake
When traffic allows, drive for 90 pedal.
seconds without moving the
accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed 9. Make sure the vehicle has been
may vary slightly; this is okay.) If parked with the engine off for 30
you cannot do this for a minutes.
continuous 90 seconds because of
traffic conditions, drive for at least If the testing facility determines the
30 seconds, then repeat it two readiness codes are still not set, see
more times (for a total of 90 your dealer.
seconds).
414
Main Menu
Warranty and Customer Relations
Customer Service Information..... 416

Warranty Coverages ..................... 417
Reporting Safety Defects.............. 418
Authorized Manuals ...................... 419

415
Customer Service Information
Honda dealership personnel are Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please give
trained professionals. They should Honda Canada Inc. us this information:
be able to answer all your questions. Customer Relations
If you encounter a problem that your 180 Honda Boulevard Vehicle Identification Number
dealership does not solve to your Markham, ON (see page 400 )
satisfaction, please discuss it with L6C 0H9
the dealership’s management. The Name and address of the dealer
service manager or general manager Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9 who services your vehicle
can help. Almost all problems are Fax: 1-877-939-0909
solved in this way. E-Mail: honda_cr@ch.honda.com Date of purchase
If you are dissatisfied with the In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin Odometer reading of your vehicle
decision made by the dealership’s Islands:
management, contact Honda Vortex Motor Corp. Your name, address, and tele-
Customer Service. Bella International phone number
P.O. Box 190816
U.S. Owners: San Juan, PR 00919-0816 A detailed description of the
American Honda Motor Co., Inc. problem
Automobile Customer Service Tel: (787) 620-7546
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A Name of the dealer who sold the
1919 Torrance Boulevard vehicle to you
Torrance, California 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009
416
Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners Seat Belt Limited Warranty − a seat Replacement Battery Limited
Your new vehicle is covered by these belt that fails to function properly is Warranty − provides prorated
warranties: covered by a limited warranty. coverage for a replacement battery
Please read your warranty booklet purchased from your dealer.
New Vehicle Limited Warranty − for details.

covers your new vehicle, except for Replacement Muffler Lifetime
the emissions control systems and Rust Perforation Limited Warranty Limited Warranty − provides
accessories, against defects in − all exterior body panels are coverage for as long as the pur-
materials and workmanship. covered for rust-through from the chaser of the muffler owns the
inside for the specified time period vehicle.
Emissions Control Systems Defects with no mileage limit.
Warranty and Emissions Restrictions and exclusions apply to
Performance Warranty − these two Accessory Limited Warranty − all these warranties. Please read the
warranties cover your vehicle’s Honda accessories are covered 2012 Honda warranty information
emissions control systems. Time, under this warranty. Time and booklet that came with your vehicle
mileage, and coverage are mileage limits depend on the type of for precise information on warranty
conditional. Please read your accessory and other factors. Please coverages. Your vehicle’s original
warranty booklet for exact read your warranty booklet for tires are covered by their
information. details. manufacturer. Tire warranty
information is in a separate booklet.
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty − covers all Honda Canadian Owners
replacement parts against defects in Please refer to the 2012 warranty
materials and workmanship. manual that came with your vehicle.
417
Reporting Safety Defects
In the US In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should
should immediately inform the National Highway immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to inform Transport Canada.
notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or become involved in individual problems between you,
American Honda Motor Co., Inc. your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and
Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For more
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to information on reporting safety defects or about motor
http://www.saf ercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsaf ety.
NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington,
DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.saf ercar.gov.
418
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) Service Manual:

The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm Covers maintenance and recommended procedures for
Incorporated. You can order by phone or online: repair to engine and chassis components. It is written
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only) for the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enough
Go online at www.helminc.com for most mechanically inclined owners to understand.
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.
at 1-800-782-4356. Body Repair Manual:
Describes the procedures involved in the replacement
Publication Form Description of damaged body parts.
Form Number
61TP602 2010-2012 Crosstour V6 Service Manual
61TP631 2010-2012 Crosstour L4/V6 Body Repair Manual
Authorized Manuals
31TP6620 2012 Crosstour Owner’s Manual
31TP6820 2012 Crosstour Navigation System Owner’s Manual
31TP6M20 2012 Crosstour Honda Service History
31TP6Q20 2012 Crosstour Technology Reference Guide
HON-R Order Form for Previous Years-
Indicate Year and Model Desired
419
420
Main Menu
Index
A Automatic Transmission............... 302 Fluid ............................................ 342

Capacity, Fluid ........................... 402 Parking ........................................ 112
Accessories..................................... 292 Shifting ........................................ 302 System Indicator .................. 57, 388
ACCESSORY Shift Lever Position Wear Indicators ......................... 308
(Ignition Key Position)................ 79 Indicators ................................ 302 Braking System.............................. 308
Accessory Power Sockets............. 114 Shift Lever Positions ................. 302 Break-in, New Vehicle .................. 282
Active Head Restraints ................... 96 Shift Lock Release ..................... 305 Brightness Control, Instruments ... 73
Additives, Engine Oil..................... 334 Auxiliary Input Jack ....................... 236 Bulb Replacement
Advanced Airbags............................ 25 Back-up Lights ........................... 349
Airbag (SRS) ................................ 9, 21 B Brake Lights............................... 349
Airbag System Components ........... 21 Fog Lights .................................. 351
Air Conditioning System ............... 126 Battery Front Parking Lights ................. 347
Usage .......................................... 127 Charging System Headlights .................................. 344
Air Pressure, Tires ........................ 359 Indicator............................ 56, 386 Rear Lights ................................. 349
Antifreeze ....................................... 337 Jump Starting ............................. 382 Specifications ............................. 403
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) Maintenance ............................... 367 Turn Signal Lights............. 347, 349
Indicator ................................ 58, 309 Specifications ............................. 403 Bulbs, Halogen ....................... 344, 351
Operation .................................... 309 Before Driving ............................... 281
Anti-theft, Audio System............... 239 Belts, Seat ..................................... 8, 18 C
Anti-theft Steering Column Lock .. 79 Beverage Holders .......................... 114
Audio Antenna ............................... 355 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink ......... 253 Capacities Chart............................. 402
Audio System ................................. 134 Booster Seats ................................... 48 Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 51
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ...... 81 Brakes Cargo Area Light ........................... 122
INDEX
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners .... 19 Anti-lock System (ABS) ............ 309 Carrying Cargo .............................. 294
Automatic Speed Control.............. 246 Break-in, New Linings .............. 282
Bulb Replacement ..................... 349 CONTINUED
I
Main Menu
Index
CAUTION, Explanation of .............. iii Child Seats ........................................ 33 D

CD Care .......................................... 233 LATCH.......................................... 42
CD Changer ........................... 149, 197 Tether Anchorage Points ........... 46 DANGER, Explanation of ................ iii
Ceiling Light ................................... 121 Childproof Door Locks ................... 87 Dashboard .................................... 3, 54
Certification Label ......................... 400 Cleaning the Seat Belts ................. 353 Daytime Running Lights........... 61, 72
Chains ............................................. 365 Climate Control System ................ 126 Daytime Running Lights
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 373 Clock ............................................... 238 Indicator ........................................ 61
Changing Oil CO in the Exhaust ................... 51, 412 Dead Battery .................................. 382
How to ......................................... 335 Cold Weather, Starting in ............. 301 Defects, Reporting Safety............. 418
When to....................................... 325 Compact Spare ............................... 372 Defogger, Rear Window ................. 75
Charging System Indicator .... 56, 386 Compass.......................................... 242 Defrosting the Windows ............... 130
Check Fuel Cap Message ............. 285 Console Compartment .................. 115 Dimensions ..................................... 402
Checklist, Before Driving ............. 300 Consumer Information.................. 416 Dimming the Headlights ................ 70
Child Safety ...................................... 33 Controls, Instruments and .............. 53 Dipstick
Booster Seats ............................... 48 Coolant Automatic Transmission........... 340
Child Seats .............................. 40, 41 Adding ......................................... 337 Engine Oil ................................... 288
Important Safety Checking ..................................... 288 Directional Signals ........................... 70
Reminders ........................... 33-50 Proper Solution .......................... 337 Disc Brake Wear Indicators ......... 308
Infants ........................................... 38 Temperature Gauge .................... 66 Disposal of Used Oil ...................... 336
Larger Children ........................... 47 Courtesy Lights ............................. 122 Doors
LATCH.......................................... 42 Crankcase Emissions Control Auto Door Lock ........................... 81
Risks with Airbags....................... 34 System......................................... 410 Auto Door Unlock........................ 84
Small Children.............................. 39 Cruise Control Indicator ................. 62 Childproof Door Locks ............... 87
Tether ........................................... 46 Cruise Control Operation ............. 246 Locking and Unlocking ............... 80
Warning Labels ............................ 52 Customer Service .......................... 416 DOT Tire Quality Grading＊ ......... 404
Where Should a Child Sit ........... 34 Driver and Passenger Safety ............ 5
II
Main Menu
Index
Driving ............................................ 299 Overheated Engine ................... 384 F

Economy ..................................... 289 Towing ........................................ 398
Driving Position Memory Emergency Brake .......................... 112 Fan, Interior.................................... 129
System......................................... 101 Emergency Flashers ....................... 74 Features .......................................... 125
Dual Temperature Control ........... 131 Emergency Towing ....................... 397 Filling the Fuel Tank ..................... 283
Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 354 Emissions Controls........................ 410 Filters
Emissions Testing ......................... 413 Dust and Pollen ......................... 354
E Engine Oil ................................................ 335
Adding Engine Coolant ............. 337 Flashers, Hazard Warning.............. 74
Easy Fold-down 60/40 Split Rear Coolant Temperature Gauge ..... 66 Flat Tire, Changing a .................... 373
Seatback........................................ 97 If It Won’t Start .......................... 380 Floor Mats ...................................... 353
Economy, Fuel ............................... 289 Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 387 Floor Storage Compartment ........ 119
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Oil Life Indicator........................ 325 Fluids
System......................................... 311 Oil Pressure Indicator ............... 386 Automatic Transmission........... 341
Emergencies................................... 371 Oil, What Kind to Use ............... 333 Brake ........................................... 342
Battery, Jump Starting .............. 382 Overheating................................ 384 Power Steering........................... 343
Brake System Indicator ............ 388 Specifications ............................. 402 Windshield Washer ................... 339
Changing a Flat Tire ................. 373 Speed Limiter ............................. 305 Fog Lights......................................... 73
Charging System Indicator ...... 386 Starting........................................ 301 Folding Rear Seats........................... 97
Checking the Fuses................... 390 Engine Speed Limiter.................... 305 Four-way Flashers ........................... 74
Fuel Fill Door, Opening Ethanol in Gasoline ....................... 283 Front Airbags ............................... 9, 23
Manually ................................. 389 Evaporative Emissions Controls .. 410
INDEX
Hazard Warning Flashers .......... 74 Exhaust Fumes ................................ 51
Jump Starting ............................. 382 Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ...... 386 Belts by ......................................... 16
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 387 CONTINUED
III
Main Menu
Index
Fuel .................................................. 282 Glove Box ....................................... 116 Hood, Opening and Closing ......... 287
Check Fuel Cap Message ......... 285 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Horn............................................... 4, 67
Fill Door and Cap....................... 284 (GVWR) .............................. 296, 317
Gauge ............................................ 66 I
Low Fuel Indicator ...................... 61 H
Octane Requirement ................. 282 Identification Number, Vehicle.... 400
Oxygenated ................................ 283 Halogen Headlight Bulbs.............. 344 Ignition
Tank, Refueling ......................... 283 HandsFreeLink ............................ 253 Keys............................................... 77
Fuel Economy ................................ 289 Hazard Warning Flashers............... 74 Switch ............................................ 79
Fuel Economy (ECO) Indicator ..... 59 Headlights......................................... 70 Timing Control System ............. 411
Fuses, Checking the ...................... 390 Aiming ......................................... 344 Immobilizer System......................... 78
Automatic Lighting Off ............... 72 Important Safety Precautions .......... 6
G Automatic Lighting On ............... 71
Daytime Running Lights............. 72
Gas Mileage, Improving ....... 289, 290 High Beam Indicator ................... 61
Gasoline .......................................... 282 Lights On Indicator ..................... 60
Gauge ............................................ 66 Reminder Chime .......................... 70
Low Fuel Indicator ...................... 61 Replacing Halogen
Octane Requirement ................. 282 Bulbs ............................... 344, 351
Tank, Refueling ......................... 283 Turning on .................................... 70
Gas Station Procedures................. 283 Head Restraints ......................... 13, 94
Gauges Heated Mirrors .............................. 106
Engine Coolant Temperature .... 66 Heaters, Seat .................................. 100
Fuel ................................................ 66 Hidden Removable Utility Box .... 118
Gearshift Lever Positions HomeLink Universal
Automatic Transmission........... 302 Transceiver................................. 249
IV
Main Menu
Index
Indicators .......................................... 56 VSA Off ......................................... 58 Jump Starting ................................. 382

ABS (Anti-lock Brake) ................ 58 VSA System .................................. 58
Brake (Parking and Brake Indicators, Instrument Panel .......... 56 K
System) ............................. 57, 388 Infant Restraint ................................ 38
Charging System ................. 56, 386 Infant Seats ....................................... 38 Keys ................................................... 77
Cruise Control .............................. 62 Tether Anchorage Points ........... 46
Cruise Main .................................. 62 Inflation, Proper Tire .................... 359 L
Door and Tailgate Open ............. 60 Information Display ......................... 64
DRL (Daytime Running Inside Mirror .................................. 104 Label, Certification ........................ 400
Lights)....................................... 61 Inspection, Tire .............................. 361 Lane Change, Signaling .................. 70
Fog Lights .................................... 62 Installing a Child Seat ..................... 41 Lap/Shoulder Belts ................... 14, 19
Fuel Economy Indicator ............. 59 Tether Anchorage Points ........... 46 LATCH System ................................ 42
High Beam.................................... 61 Using LATCH .............................. 42 Lights
Key (Immobilizer System) ......... 62 Instrument Panel ............................. 55 Bulb Replacement ..................... 344
Lights On ...................................... 60 Instrument Panel Brightness ......... 73 Indicator ........................................ 55
Low Fuel ....................................... 61 Instruments and Controls ............... 53 Parking .......................................... 70
Low Oil Pressure ................. 56, 386 Interface Dial.................................. 177 Turn Signal ............................. 60, 70
Low Tire Pressure ....................... 59 Interior Care ................................... 369 Load Limits..................................... 295
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 387 Interior Lights ................................ 121 LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ....... 79
Security System ........................... 61 Introduction ......................................... i
Side Airbag Off ............................ 57 iPod ........................................ 159, 209
Seat Belt ........................................ 56
SRS ................................................ 57
INDEX
J
TPMS ............................................ 59
Turn Signal and Hazard Jacking up the Vehicle .................. 375
Warning .................................... 60 Jack, Tire ........................................ 375 CONTINUED
V
Main Menu
Index
Locks Memory, Driving Position ............ 101 Selecting Proper Viscosity

Anti-theft Steering Column ........ 79 Meters, Gauges.......................... 55, 63 Chart ....................................... 334
Childproof Door ........................... 87 Methanol in Gasoline .................... 283 ON (Ignition Key Position) ............ 79
Fuel Fill Door ............................. 283 Mirrors ............................................ 104 Onboard Refueling Vapor
Glove Box ................................... 116 Adjusting..................................... 105 Recovery ..................................... 410
Lockout Prevention ..................... 81 Heated ......................................... 106 Outside Mirrors ............................. 105
Power Door .................................. 80 Reverse Tilt ................................ 105 Outside Temperature Indicator ..... 65
Tailgate ......................................... 91 Modifications Your Vehicle .......... 293 Overheating, Engine ..................... 384
Low Coolant Level ......................... 288 Moonroof ........................................ 110 Owner’s Maintenance Checks ..... 330
Low Fuel Indicator .......................... 61 Oxygenated Fuels.......................... 283
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .... 56, 386 N
Lower Anchors................................. 42 P
Lubricant Specifications Chart .... 402 Neutral Gear Position.................... 303
Luggage, Storing (Cargo) ............ 294 New Vehicle Break-in ................... 282 Panel Brightness Control ............... 73
NOTICE, Explanation of .................... i Park Gear Position......................... 303
M Numbers, Identification ................ 400 Parking ............................................ 307
Parking Brake ................................ 112
Maintenance ................................... 323 O Parking Brake and Brake
Minder......................................... 325 System Indicator .................. 57, 388
Main Items and Sub Octane Requirement, Gasoline .... 282 Parking Lights.................................. 70
Items ............................... 328, 331 Odometer .......................................... 64 Parking Over Things that Burn ... 412
Owner’s Maintenance Oil Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ..... 30
Checks .................................... 330 Change, How to ......................... 335 PGM-FI System.............................. 411
Minder Indicator .......................... 62 Change, When to ....................... 328 Pollen Filter .................................... 354
Safety........................................... 324 Checking Engine ....................... 288 Power Door Locks ........................... 80
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 387 Pressure Indicator ............... 56, 386 Power Seat Adjustments ................. 93
VI
Main Menu
Index
Power Socket Locations................ 114 Rearview Mirror ............................ 104 S

Power Windows ............................. 106 Rearview Mirror with Rearview
Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts .......... 16 Camera Display.......................... 278 Safety Belts................................... 8, 18
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 11 Rear Window Defogger .................. 75 Safety Defects, Reporting............. 418
Additional Safety Precautions .... 17 Reclining the Seat Backs ................ 93 Safety Features .................................. 7
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 16 Refueling......................................... 283 Airbags ............................................ 9
Protecting Children ......................... 33 Reminder Indicators ........................ 56 Seat Belts ........................................ 8
General Guidelines ...................... 33 Remote Audio Controls................. 234 Safety Labels, Location of .............. 52
Protecting Infants ........................ 38 Remote Transmitter ........................ 87 Safety Messages ............................... iii
Protecting Larger Children ........ 47 Replacement Information Seat Belts ...................................... 8, 18
Protecting Small Children .......... 39 Engine Oil and Filter ................. 335 Additional Information ................ 18
Using Child Seats with Fuses ........................................... 390 Automatic Seat Belt
Tethers...................................... 46 Light Bulbs ................................. 344 Tensioners ................................ 19
Using LATCH .............................. 42 Timing Belt ................................. 343 Cleaning ...................................... 353
Tires ............................................ 364 Lap/Shoulder Belt ................. 14, 19
R Wiper Blades .............................. 355 Maintenance ................................. 20
Replacing Seat Belts After a Reminder Indicator and
Radiator Overheating .................... 384 Crash ............................................. 20 Beeper ................................. 18, 56
Radio/CD Sound System .............. 134 Reporting Safety Defects.............. 418 System Components.................... 18
Radio Theft Protection.................. 237 Reserve Tank, Engine Use During Pregnancy................ 16
Radio, XM ............................. 143, 190 Coolant ................................ 288, 337 Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt .... 19
RDS ......................................... 139, 182 Restraint, Child ................................ 33
Readiness Codes ............................ 413 Reverse Gear Position................... 303
INDEX
Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement ... 349 Rotation, Tire ................................. 363
Rear Seats, Folding.......................... 97
Rearview Camera and Monitor .... 277 CONTINUED
VII
Main Menu
Index
Seats Spare Tire Starting the Engine........................ 301

Adjusting ....................................... 93 Inflating ....................................... 372 In Cold Weather at High
Folding .......................................... 97 Specifications ............................. 403 Altitude ................................... 301
Heaters........................................ 100 Spark Plugs ..................................... 402 With a Dead Battery ................. 382
Security System ............................. 241 Specifications ................................. 402 Steam Coming from Engine ......... 384
Select/Reset Knob .......................... 63 Speed Control ................................. 246 Steering Wheel
Selecting a Child Seat ...................... 40 Speed Limiter ................................. 305 Adjustments ................................. 76
Selector Knob (Disc Changer) .... 135 Speedometer .................................... 63 Anti-theft Column Lock .............. 79
Serial Number ................................ 400 SRS, Additional Information........... 21 Steering Wheel Buttons........ 234, 253
Service Minder ............................... 325 Additional Safety Precautions .... 32 Stereo Sound System .................... 134
Service Manual＊ ............................ 419 Airbag Service .............................. 31 Sun Visors ....................................... 117
Service Station Procedures .......... 283 Airbag System Components ....... 21 Sunglasses Holder ......................... 117
Setting the Clock ........................... 238 How the Passenger Airbag Off Supplemental Restraint
Shift Lever Position Indicators .... 302 Indicator Works ....................... 30 System................................... 9, 21
Shift Lock Release ......................... 305 How the Side Airbag Off Servicing ....................................... 31
Side Airbags ................................. 9, 27 Indicator Works ....................... 30 SRS Indicator.......................... 29, 57
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 27 How the SRS Indicator Works ... 29 System Components.................... 21
How the Side Airbag Off How Your Front Airbags SVC (Speed-sensitive
Indicator Works ....................... 30 Work.......................................... 23 Volume Compensation) .... 142, 189
Side Curtain Airbags ................... 9, 28 How Your Side Airbags Work.... 27 Synthetic Oil ................................... 334
How Your Side Curtain How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Airbags Work ........................... 28 Work.......................................... 28 T
Signaling Turns ................................ 70 SRS Indicator.............................. 29, 57
Snow Tires ...................................... 365 START (Ignition Key Position) ..... 79 Tailgate
Sound System ................................. 134 Open Indicator ............................. 60
Opening the .................................. 91
VIII
Main Menu
Index
Taking Care of the Unexpected .. 371 Tires ................................................ 359 Treadwear ...................................... 361
Technical Descriptions Air Pressure ............................... 360 Trip Meter ........................................ 65
DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 404 Chains ......................................... 365 Turn Signals ..................................... 70
Emissions Control Systems ...... 410 Checking Wear .......................... 361
Three Way Catalytic Compact Spare ........................... 372 U
Converters .............................. 412 DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 404
Temperature Gauge ........................ 66 Inflation ....................................... 359 Unexpected, Taking Care of
Temperature, Outside ..................... 65 Inspection ................................... 361 the ................................................ 371
Tether Anchorage Points ............... 46 Replacing .................................... 364 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..... 404
Theft Protection, Radio................. 237 Rotating....................................... 363 Unleaded Gasoline......................... 282
Three Way Catalytic Service Life ................................. 362 USB Adapter
Converters .................................. 412 Snow ............................................ 365 Cable ................... 161, 171, 211, 222
Time, Setting the ........................... 238 Specifications ............................. 403 USB Flash Memory Device.. 168, 219
Timing Belt ..................................... 343 Terminology ............................... 407 Used Oil, How to Dispose of ........ 336
Tire Chains ..................................... 365 Tools, Tire Changing .................... 373 Utility Box ....................................... 118
Tire, How to Change a Flat .......... 373 Towing
Tire Information ............................ 406 A Trailer ...................................... 316 V
Tire Labeling .................................. 406 Emergency Wrecker ................. 397
Tire Pressure Monitoring Pre-Tow Checklist ..................... 320 Vanity Mirror ................................. 120
System (TPMS) ............. 313, 408 Weight Limit .............................. 316 Vehicle Capacity Load .................. 295
Low Tire Pressure Transmission Vehicle Dimensions....................... 402
Indicator............................ 59, 313 Checking Fluid Level, Vehicle Identification Number..... 400
Required Federal Automatic ............................... 340
INDEX
Explanation............................. 408 Fluid Selection............................ 341
TPMS Indicator ................... 59, 314 Identification Number ............... 401
Shifting the Automatic .............. 302 CONTINUED
IX
Main Menu
Index
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ) Windows

System..................................... 311 Auto Reverse .............................. 107
VSA Off Indicator ................ 58, 311 Operating the Power ................. 106
VSA Off Switch .......................... 312 Rear, Defogger ............................ 75
VSA System Indicator ......... 58, 311 Windshield
Vehicle Storage .............................. 368 Cleaning ........................................ 68
Ventilation ...................................... 132 Defroster .................................... 130
VIN .................................................. 400 Washers ........................................ 68
Viscosity, Oil................................... 334 Wipers, Windshield
Voice Control System............ 127, 177 Changing Blades ........................ 355
Operation ...................................... 68
W Worn Tires ..................................... 361
Wrecker, Emergency Towing ...... 397
WARNING, Explanation of ............. iii
Warning Labels, Location of .......... 52 X
Warranty Coverages＊ ................... 417
Washers, Windshield XM Radio .............................. 143, 190
Checking the Fluid Level ......... 339
Indicator ........................................ 62 ＊: U.S. only
Operation ...................................... 68
Wheels
Adjusting the Steering ................ 76
Alignment and Balance ............. 362
Compact Spare ........................... 372
Wrench, Nut ............................... 375
X
Main Menu
Main Menu
Service Information Summary
Gasoline: 4WD models only Tire Pressure (measured cold):

Unleaded gasoline, pump octane Rear Differential Fluid: 2WD models only
number of 87 or higher. Honda Dual Pump Fluid II. Do Front/Rear:
not use ATF. 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
Fuel Tank Capacity:
18.5 US gal (70.0 ) Capacity: 4WD models only
1.3 US qt (1.2 ) Front/Rear:
Recommended Engine Oil: 33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm )
API Premium grade 0W-20 4WD models only
detergent oil (see page 333 ). Transfer Assembly Fluid: Spare Tire Pressure:
SAE 90 viscosity hypoid gear oil, 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Oil change capacity (including API service classified GL4 or GL5
filter): only.
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
Power Steering Fluid:
Automatic Transmission Fluid: Honda Power Steering Fluid
Honda ATF DW-1 (automatic preferred, or another brand of
transmission fluid) (see page 341 ). power steering fluid as a
temporary replacement. Do not
use ATF (see page 343 ).
Brake Fluid:
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page 342 ).

2012 Honda Accord Crosstour

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2012 Honda Accord Crosstour

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Main Menu 2012 Crosstour Online Reference Owner's Manual

OWNER This owner’s manual should be considered

This owner’s manual covers all models of

Images throughout this owner’s manual

POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN

Maintaining your vehicle according to the Maintenance MinderTM shown in

Event Data Recorders

California Proposition 65 Warning

Service Diagnostic Recorders

California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act

A Few Words About Safety

Of course, it is not practical or You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow

2012 Crosstour Online Reference Owner's Manual

Your Vehicle at a Glance (main controls) ................................................................................................ 3

Driving (engine and transmission operation).......................................................................................... 299

Technical Information (vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls)............................................... 399

Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) (how to order) ................................................................................... 419

Contents Before Driving Technical Information

Your Vehicle at a Glance

MOONROOF SWITCH (P.110) HOMELINK BUTTONS＊ (P.249)

Your Vehicle at a Glance

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS AUXILIARY INPUT JACK (P.236)

Your Vehicle at a Glance

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS WINDSHIELD PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

VEHICLE STABILITY INTERFACE DIAL＊3

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver and Passenger Safety

Important Safety Precautions

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Your vehicle is equipped with many

Driver and Passenger Safety

However, you and your passengers

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Seat Belts Help keep you from being thrown

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Driver and Passenger Safety

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

Protecting Adults and Teens

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Adults and Teens

If you sit too close to the steering 3.Adjust the Seat-Backs

Protecting Adults and Teens

4.Adjust the Head Restraints

Reclining the seat-back too far Improperly positioning head

Driver and Passenger Safety

Reclining a seat-back so that the

Protecting Adults and Teens

Make sure all seat belts are

If necessary, pull up on the belt again

Protecting Adults and Teens

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Adults and Teens

This will reduce the risk of injuries

Protecting Adults and Teens

Driver and Passenger Safety

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Driver and Passenger Safety

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Honda provides a limited warranty Check your seat belts regularly

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Airbag System Components